wmm 
 
 iijwiwi Miwmwuuii 
 
 ill )Jlll l lUIMUU I >MiiU I IIWilW 
 
 n 
 
 \ 
 
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 
 
 Cliap Copyright No 
 
 Slielf.3.._^_*=? -5 
 
 UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, 
 

/> . 
 
SCHOOL GYMNASTICS 
 
 WITH LIGHT APPARATUS 
 
 BY 
 
 JESSIE H. BANCROFT 
 
 DIRECTOR OF PHYSICAL TRAINING IN THE PUBLIC SCHOOLS 
 OF NEW YORK CITY, BOROUGH OF BROOKLYN 
 
 BOSTON, U.S.A. 
 
 D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS 
 
 1900 
 
 r-." 
 
61397 
 
 
 l^ibi^ry of Conv 
 
 pv,u CDfiti *tai 
 OCT 15 1900 
 
 stcow conr. 
 
 OftOiii DIVISION, 
 
 OCT 18 lyuu 
 
 &V4-S-? 
 
 Copyright, 1900, 
 By JESSIE H. BANCROFT 
 
 TYPOGRAPHY BY J, 8. CUSTIING A CO., NORWOOD, MASS. 
 
 PRE8SW0RK BY JI. M. PLIMPTON A CO., NORWOOD, MASS. 
 
Contents 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Publisher's Note ...,..,... 5 
 
 Introduction 7 
 
 Explanatory Notes : 
 
 1. Period for exercise 10 
 
 2. Each lesson for one week 10 
 
 3. Place for exercise . . . . . . . .10 
 
 4. Floor formation . . . . . . , . .11 
 
 5. Position ; stretching 12 
 
 6. Tactics (facings and marching) . . , . . .15 
 
 7. Running .......... 16 
 
 8. Breathing I7 
 
 9. Commands 18 
 
 10. Exercises in series ig 
 
 11. Time ........... 20 
 
 12. Music 90 
 
 13. Leading 20 
 
 14. New exercises . . . 20 
 
 15. Progressive principles 21 
 
 16. Effects of exercises 21 
 
 17. Programmes for special exercises 23 
 
 Course of Instruction 
 FOR Boys and Girls : 
 
 Eirst series, first school year, second half, dumb-bells, \ pound 25 
 
 Second series, second school year, second half, wands, 3 feet . 57 
 
 Third series, third school year, second half, dumb-bells, J pound 91 
 
 Fourth series, fourth school year, second half, wands, 3^ feet . 133 
 
Contents 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Fifth series, fifth year, boys and girls, Indian clubs, J pound . 179 
 Sixth series, fifth or sixth year, boys and girls, double series, 
 
 wands, 4 feet . . . 215 
 
 Seventh series, sixth year, boys, bar-bells, 4 feet . . . 253 
 
 Eighth series, sixth year, girls, iron grace hoops, 1^ pounds . 297 
 
 Ninth series, seventh year, boys and girls, Indian clubs, 1 pound 335 
 Tenth series, seventh or eighth year, boys and girls, double 
 
 series, dumb-bells, 1 pound 379 
 
 Eleventh series, eighth year, boys, dumb-bells, 1 pound . . 419 
 
 Twelfth series, eighth year, girls, dumb-bells, 1 pound , . 467 
 
Publisher's Note 
 
 The course of lessons herewith presented for public school 
 use is in two divisions — free hand and light apparatus exer- 
 cise respectively. Each of these divisions is a complete course 
 in itself, covering eight grades of work from the lowest primary 
 to the highest grammar. The free hand work can be used 
 in the regular classroom, though a special room is obviously 
 desirable. The apparatus work necessitates free floor space. 
 
 Each grade of work is arranged in eighteen lessons, extend- 
 ing over half of the school year. This does not cover the 
 entire term of most school sessions, as it is considered best to 
 use review work during times of examination and promotion, 
 rather than to tax pupils with new exercises at such times. 
 
 While each course is complete in itself, the two kinds of 
 work are designed to be interchanged — half of the school 
 year to be devoted to free hand exercise and the succeeding 
 half to the apparatus. 
 
 In grading the exercises each free hand series is used as the 
 foundation for the movements of the apparatus work for the 
 same year, which in turn, in the greater variety and freedom 
 of its exercises, forms an advance upon the last series of free 
 work. 
 
 Both courses prepare for the heavier work of the gymnasium. 
 
Introduction 
 
 The course of school gymnastics with light apparatus here 
 presented supplements the course of free gymnastics contained 
 in School Gymnastics, Free Hand. The course of free work 
 comprises eight series or grades of lessons, each covering 
 one half of the school year. The completed plan uses appa- 
 ratus for the second half of each school year. In the full 
 course, therefore, the free work alternates with the apparatus 
 work throughout the eight years of the elementary school. 
 
 The reasons for this alternation lie in the superiority of free 
 work for the correction of posture, which is the main object 
 of school gymnastics, and in the superiority of apparatus work 
 for physiological results, for the cultivation of skill, and for 
 the holding of interest and attention. 
 
 In free gymnastics the concentration of attention upon the 
 muscular sense, and especially upon the strong resistance of 
 antagonistic muscular groups, results in greater expansion of 
 the chest, and better carriage of the shoulders, head, spine, etc., 
 than is apt to come from apparatus work alone. Too much 
 emphasis cannot be placed upon the question of posture in 
 any exercise intended for schools. The constant conditions 
 of school life are such as tend to cultivate and fix what has 
 been called the fatigue position, — a position in which the 
 chest is contracted and flattened, the shoulders rounded for- 
 ward, and the head and hips protruded forward. This is the 
 typical school attitude where corrective gymnastics are not 
 taken. The habit of incorrect position implies in the child 
 a distorted muscular sense — the habitual feeling of a dispro- 
 
8 Introduction 
 
 portionate contraction and relaxation in opposing groups of 
 muscles. A new adjustment of the muscles, and its main- 
 tenance until correct posture becomes a habit, cannot be ac- 
 complished without a conscious effort on the part of the pupil. 
 This effort is better concentrated in free gymnastics. The 
 limitations of free work are reached, however, when the pupil's 
 interest flags because the work seems to him " too easy.'' 
 The motor powers want instinctively some outlet requiring 
 greater skill, more muscular strength, and greater range of 
 movement than is possible without apparatus. By accustom- 
 ing the body to correct form in typical movements without 
 apparatus, the power of correct position may be used as a foun- 
 dation for apparatus exercise without danger of cultivating 
 incorrect positions. 
 
 Apparatus work is advisable because it is more stimulating 
 to the circulation, respiration, and other physiological processes, 
 than free work. This effect comes partly through the resist- 
 an<je of the Aveight to muscular action, which induces a greater 
 activity in the processes of waste and repair, and partly through 
 the greater range and more vigorous character of the move- 
 ments. Apparatus work is also advantageous because of the 
 greater control of the bodily powers gained in the skill required 
 to handle the apparatus itself. All of these factors tend to 
 increase the pleasure and the interest in exercise — features of 
 the work that are of great importance. 
 
 Fixed and heavy apparatus is not practicable for elementary 
 public schools, where there are forty or fifty pupils in a class, 
 only fifteen or twenty minutes for the entire lesson, and where 
 special gymnastic dress is impossible. This reduces the avail- 
 able apparatus to the lighter, movable pieces, such as dumb- 
 bells, Indian clubs, wands, etc., etc. The course here presented 
 differs radically from some features characteristic of most 
 apparatus exercise. Excessive arm work is usually found in 
 such exercise. In this course all-over work is a cardinal 
 principle. Every exercise for the arms is combined with work 
 
Introduction 9 
 
 for the legs or trunk. The " series '' form of exercise, used in 
 a slighter degree in the free hand course, is used exclusively 
 in this apparatus course. In this series work three exercises, 
 as for the arms and trunk and their combination, are taken in 
 rapid succession, without a pause for commands between them, 
 so that a maximum of exercise is possible in a given period. 
 By breaking the work into these series, instead of putting it 
 into a longer, continuous drill, as is customary in apparatus exer- 
 cise, the aiitomatic element, which leads to poor posture, and the 
 strain upon the memory to recall " what comes next,'^ are done 
 away with. By this series method progressive work from 
 week to week is also possible, at least one new series being 
 introduced into each lesson in place of the simpler one which 
 prepared the way for it. The same general lesson plan is 
 pursued as in the free work, the first series being for the 
 extremities, the arms, legs, and their combination, the next 
 for balance work, and the third trunk work. Provision is 
 also made for running and for breathing exercises. The table 
 thus forms a gradual progression to the work that makes a 
 maximum demand upon the physiological powers. 
 
 Gymnastic exercise of any description should never be con- 
 sidered a substitute for a recess period. Active games in a 
 recess period should be part of the physical training of every 
 school child. 
 
 In the sixth and eighth years of the course here presented, 
 different series of work are given for boys and girls. An 
 alternative, suitable for mixed classes, is also given. There 
 is no reason why girls should not take the exercise designated 
 for boys, if properly dressed for it. Many of the exercises, 
 however, call for greater freedom of movement than is possible 
 in the usual school dress of girls of the age implied. 
 
Explanatory Notes 
 
 1. Period for Exercise. — The lessons are designed to occupy 
 at least fifteen minutes daily. This period includes the time 
 required for passing to and from the gymnasium. 
 
 The most advantageous time for the lesson is in the middle 
 of the afternoon session. Next to this in desirability is a 
 period between the morning recess and the noon intermission. 
 
 2. Each Lesson is to be used one week, that of the previous 
 week being discontinued. AYhen the continuance of an exer- 
 cise is deemed necessary for physiological reasons, it is included 
 in the new lesson. No effort should be made to have the 
 children keep in mind any exercises not so indicated. 
 
 In conducting the lesson, the order in which the exercises 
 are arranged should be strictly adhered to. 
 
 The work will be greatly facilitated if the teacher will 
 memorize the lessons. This is much less formidable than at 
 first ajjpears, as the general order in which the exercises are 
 arranged is the same in all lessons, and generally only one new 
 series is introduced each week. The teacher will then be free 
 to observe her class, and the rapid succession of the exercises 
 will be more nearly assured. 
 
 3. Place for Exercise. — The gymnastics with light apparatus 
 are designed to be taken on free floor space. In primary grades 
 each pupil should have at least sixteen square feet of space, or 
 an area measuring four feet square ; in grammar grades each 
 pupil should have at least thirty six square feet, or an area 
 
 10 
 
Explanatory Notes 11 
 
 six feet square. While a gymnasium is highly desirable, the 
 exercise can be taken in corridors, assembly, and playrooms, 
 where light, ventilation, and floor space are sufficient. In mild 
 weather work in the open air is desirable. 
 
 4. Floor Formation. — The manner of taking places on the 
 free floor space is of much importance, as much time may be 
 lost. Several modes are possible. A choice will depend largely 
 upon the age of the pupils, the shape of the room, and the 
 convenience with which the apparatus can be procured while 
 passing to place. Floor marks should never be depended upon. 
 The first lesson should be devoted entirely to drill upon floor 
 formation. From the time the pupils stand in the class-room 
 until they return to it again, all facings and marching should 
 be according to the military tactics hereinafter described. 
 
 The simplest method of floor formation is that in which the 
 pupils march into the room in single file, each taking apparatus 
 while passing to place. One line of pupils, still in single file, 
 should march across the rear of the room and turn toward the 
 front on the farther side. Each pupil in the line should pause 
 at his own place, which should be more than arm's length from 
 the pupil next in front, or according to the spacing indicated 
 in the third note. This first line should serve as a guide for 
 spacing to all other lines. The leaders of the successive lines 
 should turn and march to the front at proper intervals from 
 the lines preceding them. All should mark time at their places 
 until the command to halt is given to the entire class. This is 
 the simplest method of taking places upon the floor, and it 
 is particularly adapted to the youngest pupils, though they 
 can also be taught other formations. 
 
 Another method of formation is for the leaders of each line 
 to march across the rear of the room, face toward the front at 
 the proper places for their lines, mark time until all of the 
 leaders are in line, and then all march forward in rank to the 
 front. Those whose places are next behind them in their 
 
12 Explanatory Notes 
 
 respective lines should march in rank to their places in the 
 same way, and so on until all are in place. 
 
 By yet another method all pupils should march to the front 
 in solid ranks of four or more, according to the number of 
 lines. The different ranks should pause at the proper distance 
 from the rank next in front. All should stop marking time at 
 command, and orders should then be given for spacing sideways. 
 For example, if pupils are in ranks of fours, the commands 
 would be, "Inside lines one step, outside lines three steps, 
 outward — March ! '' The teacher should then count for the 
 marching, two counts for each step — one to place the foot, the 
 second to put the heels together. 
 
 Many other methods of formation are possible, ^one should 
 be used which requires unnecessary time, such as those in which 
 pupils have to number before marching to place. 
 
 Classes should never face the light. The best position is 
 with the side to the light. 
 
 5. Position. Stretching. — A good standing position from 
 which to take the exercises is essential for effective work. To 
 assist the chest and spine to this position, every lesson begins 
 with a preliminary stretching of the arms upward and side- 
 ways, and it is repeated again at the close of the lesson after 
 putting away the apparatus. This stretching is better for the 
 purpose in many ways than the usual admonitions to throw the 
 shoulders back and draw the chin in. Such directions make 
 the child self-conscious ; they do not, in the youngest chiklren 
 at least, produce the desired result, for such children are not 
 capable of the isolated control of the parts named, and other 
 faults of posture are produced — such as a sway-back attitude 
 with protruding abdomen, etc. The stretching, by its straight 
 pull in a line with the vertical and lateral diameters of the 
 body, lifts and expands the chest and erects the spine without 
 this painfully self-conscious effort. Moreover, such a general 
 muscular tension, taking in both the flexors and extensors, is 
 
Explanatory Notes 
 
 13 
 
 apt to have a more lasting effect than a spasmodic effort of 
 the will can produce. The one specific direction that can be 
 given in this and in nearly all other exercises is to hold the 
 head up. 
 
 For the stretching, formal commands are omitted to save 
 time. Upon being told to stretch the arms upv^ard, pupils 
 should rise on tiptoe and reach up with both arms as high as* 
 
 Incorrect Standing Position 
 
 Correct Standing Position 
 
 possible. The teacher is particularly requested to urge them 
 higher, farther, etc., etc. The position should not he long sus- 
 tained, and the arms should be dropped at the command down 
 or position, following soon after the first direction. The 
 upward stretching should be taken two or three times, and 
 then the arms should be stretched sideways in the same man- 
 ner. Avoid bending the body backward or the head forward 
 
14 
 
 Explanatory Notes 
 
 when the arms are up. Never stretch the arms forward in this 
 prelirainari/ exercise. This stretching has been usied in some 
 
 departments after every lesson 
 throughout the day. It requires 
 but a few seconds and is an admi- 
 rable corrective of the injurious 
 positions acquired in the seats. 
 
 It should not be inferred that 
 the stretching does away entirely 
 with the necessity for calling for, 
 or consciously assuming, an erect 
 attitude. The teacher will have 
 frequently to use the command 
 position, When this command is 
 heard, pupils should stand with 
 heels together, toes turned out, 
 chest and head erect, face to the 
 front, and arms hanging easily 
 at the sides. The direction " face 
 to the front" does not mean that 
 the gaze shall be fastened upon 
 the head of the pupil next in 
 front, or upon any other one spot. 
 Such a practice is reprehensible in 
 the extreme. The eye is an exceed- 
 ingly restless organ, and should not be altogether deprived of 
 its natural activity. The weight should be borne upon the for- 
 ward part of the foot. A good test for correct poise, which 
 should be frequently employed b}^ the teachers, is the ability to 
 rise on the toes without having first to sway forward. In pri- 
 mary classes attention may have to be frequently called to keep- 
 ing the heels together and the head erect. The class should be 
 called to position before marching from the classroom, again 
 after the march before beginning the exercises, and at any time 
 during the lesson when the attitudes become careless. 
 
 Preliminary Stretching, 
 Upward 
 
Explanatory Notes 
 
 15 
 
 Preliminary Stretching, Sideways 
 
 6. Tactics 
 
 a. Left — Face! 
 Right — Face I 
 
 Raise the left toe, and face to the left, turning on the left heel. 
 
 The facings to the right are also executed u]3on the left heel. 
 
 The heel is lifted in response to the word right (or left) ; the 
 turning is executed in response to the command /ace. ^ 
 
 Make clear to the children that four turns in the same direc- 
 tion complete a circle, and when that is understood, vary the 
 directions to make them alert and independent. This is an 
 excellent means of rousing a sleepy class, and may be intro- 
 duced briefly anywhere if the lesson is lagging. 
 
 h. About — Face! 
 
 Raise slightly the right toe, face to the rear, turning to the 
 right on the right heel and the ball of the left foot ; replace 
 the left foot beside the right. 
 
16 Explanatory Notes 
 
 The heel is lifted in response to the word about ; the turning 
 and replacing of the foot are executed in reponse to the com- 
 mand face. 
 
 c. Mark time — March ! 
 
 As soon as mark time is heard, throw the weight on the right 
 foot, being careful not to exaggerate the swing of the body to 
 ^ that side ; upon hearing march, lift the left foot forward, toe 
 pointing downward, as though to step, but draw it back imme- 
 diately to position, all in one count ; repeat with the right foot. 
 Continue the movement with one foot and then the other alter- 
 nately in the rhythm of w^alking, but without gaining ground. 
 The feet should be placed firmly but without undue noise. 
 The body will sway slightly from side to side, but should be 
 held as steadily as possible, with no bending at the waist. 
 
 d. Mark time — March! {during the march). 
 
 On the executive command stop gaining ground and mark 
 time in place. 
 
 e. Class — Halt I 
 
 The marking time ceases and the heels remain together on 
 halt, which command may be given as either foot strikes the 
 ground. 
 
 To halt while marching, on the command halt, stop gaining 
 ground and bring the rear foot up, placing heels together. 
 
 /. Forivard — March ! 
 
 When taken from a halt, in response to forward, throw the 
 weight on the right foot as in marking time, but keep the heels 
 firmly together until the executive command is heard; in re- 
 sponse to march, step out j)romptly with the left foot. 
 
 When taken from marking time, the words forward and 
 march are given as the right foot strikes the ground; pupils 
 start forward with the left foot. 
 
 7. Running. — All running should be done on the toes. The 
 fists should be closed and the arms bent at the elbow, and 
 allowed to work freely. The extent of the run must be gov- 
 
Explanatory Notes 17 
 
 erned by careful judgment on the part of the teacher. The 
 run should be at least long enough to perceptibly quicken the 
 breathing : how much longer will depeii 1 upon the endurance 
 of a majority of the class, who should run until thoroughly in- 
 vigorated, but by no means to the end of their strength. The 
 weaker members of the class should step aside* as they feel 
 fatigued, and walk until the order is given foi^ the class to 
 march, when they should fall into their usual places. No rac- 
 ing should be allowed; instead all of the runners should keep 
 in line as for marching. Pupils having heart or lung troubles 
 should not be allowed to run. PuidUs should never he called to 
 a halt directly from a run, as that throws a distressing amount of 
 work upon the heart and lungs. Normal action of these organs 
 should he restored hy a march in common time immediately follow- 
 ing the run, until the hreathing is normal. The command for 
 this is ''In common time — March !^^ After this march in 
 common time a breathing exercises should be taken as indi- 
 cated in the lessons. 
 
 8. Breathing. — Where the method of breathing is not 
 specified, it is understood to be that last described in the 
 lessons. 
 
 The teacher should indicate in some way both the inhaling 
 and exhaling, as by raising and lowering one hand, or by the 
 words in and out at the beginning of the movements. In all 
 respiratory exercises the children should be urged to a forced 
 respiration, i.e., a deeper breath than the normal. Care should 
 be taken to have the breathing slow and even, not a quick gasp 
 or sigh, which may lead to dizziness. The exercises are for 
 successive breaths ; do not pause for a normal breath between. 
 
 At first the breathing may be very audible in the respiratory 
 exercises, and in the lowest primary grade it may be found 
 necessary to keep it so throughout the term to be sure the right 
 thing is being done. But as soon as possible in other grades 
 the breath, though just as deep, should be slower, in order to 
 
18 Explanatory Notes 
 
 give strength and control to the respiratory muscles, and the 
 breathing will then be quieter. 
 
 In all cases an exaggerated lifting of the shoulders should 
 be avoided. While the sternum participates in correct, and 
 especially in forced, breathing, the main action is indicated by 
 the expansion of the ribs and abdomen, and every exercise is 
 designed to ciiltivate this intercostal and diaphragmatic action. 
 
 9. Commands. — The psychological training and disciplinary 
 features of the work will be found to rest chiefly upon the 
 manner of giving the commands. There should be a distinct 
 pause after the preparatory command, that pupils may grasp 
 clearly just what they are to do, and also cultivate the inhibi- 
 tory control necessary to hold the idea without yielding to 
 the impulse to action. It should never be forgotten that the 
 executive command is a signal, and as such it should always 
 be given. Upon the manner of giving this command rests the 
 minor result of united response from the class, and the more 
 important one of quick, connected working of all of the powers 
 included in motor response, from sense perception to muscular 
 contraction. 
 
 Most of the exercises are in measures of eight or sixteen 
 counts. The teacher will, in repeating the exercise, continue 
 the count to this number, rather than break into a repetition 
 of one — tivo, one — two^ etc. The longer rhythm is less of a 
 strain upon the child, and insures equal work for the two sides 
 of the body. 
 
 The figures after the command indicate how many counts 
 are to be given to the exercise, three eights meaning one side 
 eight counts, the other eight, and, in arm exercises, both arms 
 together eight. In other than arm exercises, the third eight 
 means to alternate the sides. This distribution of the counts 
 should be strictly observed that the sides of the body may be 
 equally exercised. 
 
 Where an exercise, as for the arms, is taken first on one 
 
Explanatory Notes 19 
 
 side, then on the other, then with both arms, those changes 
 should be indicated in the counting, substituting the words 
 riglitj left, change, or hath, for tlie last count before the change, 
 thus : — 
 
 Arm stretching sideicaf/s, right — One! — two, three, four. Jive, 
 six, seven, left; etc. Here the word left is substituted for eight. 
 This method of indicating changes applies also to exercises in 
 series. 
 
 Where the direction of an exercise is not given it is under- 
 stood to begin to the right. 
 
 10. Exercises in Series. — In almost every lesson of the free 
 hand work and in all of the apparatus lessons, are to be found 
 short series of exercises marked a, b, c. These series are 
 always composed of one or two simple exercises, and then, in 
 most lessons, of a combination of the two; as, for instance, an 
 arm exercise, a foot exercise, and then the two taken together, 
 indicated by the word combine. Wherever such a series occurs 
 the change from one exercise to the next is to be made without 
 breaking the rhythm, or pausing for a separate command. 
 This is accomplished, as in the change of side above illustrated, 
 by substituting some word or words for the last count before 
 the change. When the change is a radical one, as from an 
 arm to a foot exercise, it will be well, at least when the lesson 
 is new, to assist the children's memory by substituting words 
 for counts in the first few movements of the change, using counts 
 again as soon as the pupils understand clearly what they are 
 to do. To illustrate further, the commands and counts would 
 be as follows for (a) stretching the arms forward and sideways 
 alternately, (b) step position forward and sideways alternately, 
 and (c) a combination of these two exercises, the three form- 
 ing a series to be taken in unbroken rhythm : — 
 
 Arm stretching forward and sideways alternately, right — One ! 
 — tico, three, four, five, six, seven, left; one, tivo, three, four. Jive, 
 six, seven, both; one, tiuo, three, four, five, six, seven. Foot! — 
 
20 Explanatory Notes 
 
 » 
 
 forward, place, side, place, jive, six, seven, left; one, tivo, three, 
 four, five, six, seven. Combine!^ — forward, place, side, ^ylace, 
 five, six, seven, change; one,^ two, three, four, five, six, seven, 
 eight. 
 
 Words, or cues, for these changes are given in the lessons, 
 but any words may be used as cues which convey the idea, 
 provided they do not interrupt the regular rhythm, or time, 
 of the exercise. 
 
 11. Time. — The time should be brisk and invigorating. 
 While quick enough to be effective for hygienic purposes, how- 
 ever, the movements should never be taken ivith a jerk, or so rap- 
 idly that good posture cannot be maintained. A strong, steady 
 stretch or flexion should be the aim, and this will be secured 
 largely through the teacher's method of counting. 
 
 12. Music. — Wherever possible it is highly desirable that 
 the work be taken with musical accompaniment. In working 
 with music the teacher will not count, but give merely the first 
 command for each exercise and a cue for changes of side, etc. 
 The pupils and music start together in response to the execu- 
 tive command, and the music guides the rhythm. With many 
 exercises the classes can sing, or one half sing or whistle 
 while the other works. National airs and old ballads are 
 especially suited to this purpose. 
 
 13. Leading. — The teacher will lead in new exercises. 
 After an exercise is once understood the pupils should not be 
 dependent upon the teacher's leading. 
 
 14. New Exercises are indicated by heavy type. The 
 descriptive notes and illustrations follow the lesson. For any 
 other exercises not understood, trace the command back 
 through preceding lessons until its descriptive note is found. 
 The notes are for the teacher, not for the children. No such 
 formal explanation of an exercise should be given to a class. 
 
 1 Right foot and both arms. 2 Left foot and both arms. 
 
Explanatory Notes 21 
 
 Instead, the teacher should take the exercise herself and let 
 the pupils catch it directly from imitation, working with her. 
 The children should understand the postural effect of the 
 various exercises as given in the notes, and work consciously 
 on the parts mentioned. Older children should also understand 
 how all e^^ercise affects the nutritive processes of the body. 
 
 15. Progressive Principles. — The exercises in this work 
 follow certain progressive principles which the teacher should 
 understand in order to appreciate the relation of one lesson to 
 the next. In trunk exercises the work is made increasingly 
 difficult for the muscles near the waist by increasing the weight 
 at the upper end of the working lever (near the shoulders or 
 head) or, later, by lengthening this lever. These effects are 
 attained through various positions of the arms. In balance 
 exercises the work is increased in difficulty in two ways — by 
 narrowing the base with different positions of the feet, and by 
 raising the centre of gravity with different positions of the 
 arms. Physiologically a progressive demand is made, among 
 other ways, by more and more use of the large muscular groups, 
 particularly those of the thigh and trunk ; by an increased 
 number of exercises in each lesson ; and by a greater number of 
 counts in each exercise. All this means a gradually increased 
 demand upon the heart and lungs. The child's power of mus- 
 cular coordination, as shown in his ability to take exercises in 
 correct form, or with good posture, is considered by gradually 
 leading up to those exercises whose execution is most prone to 
 accompanying ^^ faults.'' With scarcely any exceptions the 
 closing movement of each exercise is one that leaves the body 
 in a good position. In the very few cases where this is not 
 done, the succeeding exercise makes the correction. 
 
 It will be seen that each exercise, each lesson, and each series 
 of work prepares for that which comes after. 
 
 16. Effects of the Exercises. — To get the full benefit from 
 any exercise the teacher should bear in mind that strength and 
 
22 Explanatory Notes 
 
 vigor of movement are positively essential. When an arm or a 
 leg is extended, it should be stretched to the farthest extent; 
 when the knee or the trunk is bent, it should be to the utmost 
 degree compatible with good posture ; when a balance move- 
 ment calls for rising on the toes, the heels should be lifted 
 as high as possible ; in breathing exercises a very deep, full 
 breath should be taken. In short, constant urging to vigor of 
 execution is necessary. 
 
 Both teachers and pupils should understand that all arm 
 exercises are taken more for their effect upon the chest 
 and shoulder blades than for the effect upon the arms. 
 The arms should therefore be stretched to their utmost in 
 all exercises calling for a straight arm position, whether as 
 a terminal position or in transition to the terminal posi- 
 tion. The lifting and expanding of the chest should be 
 borne in mind in taking these exercises, and to that end 
 the elbow should be straight. All movements of the legs 
 should work upon the muscles around the hip, abdomen, and 
 lower back, strengthening those muscles in their power to hold 
 the trunk erect and to keep the body from awkward and 
 fatiguing positions in walking and standing. Particularly 
 effective in this way are the point step backward and the 
 stretch steps and chargings. Especial care should be given, 
 therefore, in the point steps to the full stretch from the hip, 
 and in the charging and stretch steps to the length of the step, 
 that it may be long enough to necessitate considerable contrac- 
 tion of the thigh muscles ; attention should also be paid in the 
 charging to keeping the trunk erect with the chest prominent 
 and forward. Any tendency to a swayback position, which 
 is especially liable to occur in these movements, should be 
 avoided. It should be borne in mind also that all trunk ex- 
 ercises, and all charging and other knee-bending exercises, are 
 particularly useful for quickening the circulation, because they 
 bring into action the largest muscular groups in the body. 
 The trunk exercises have also a very stimulating effect upon 
 
Explanatory Notes 23 
 
 the digestive organs. These effects will be lost unless the 
 bending of the knee and the trunk is very pronounced. In 
 exercises that call for rising on the toes, great care should be 
 taken to keep the weight poised forward over the balls of the 
 feet after the heels are lowered. This forward poise is part of 
 a correct standing position, and helps to secure good posture 
 of the upper part of the body. 
 
 See also the note upon Progressive Principles. 
 
 17. Programmes for Special Exercises, selected from the 
 grade work, are given at the end of each series in the primary 
 grades. In the grammar grades the material for special pro- 
 grammes is so much greater that they can be easily made. 
 The arrangement of the exercises in these special programmes 
 is not the same as in the lessons. 
 
 For exhibit purposes very pretty effects can be produced 
 by trimming the light apparatus for the girls with ribbon 
 bows or fringed papers. 
 
SCHOOL GYMNASTICS 
 
 First Series 
 
 First Year, Boys and Girls 
 Dumb-bells, \ pound 
 
 LESSON I 
 
 Note. — For preliminaries, stretching, tactics, floor forma- 
 tion, etc., see Explanatory Notes. The exercises in this series 
 are very simple and are intended mainly to introduce the chikl 
 to conscious muscular control. Plays and games should form 
 a large share of the physical exercise for this year. 
 Class — Stand ! 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Left— Face! 
 Right— Face ! 
 
 Forward — March ! (Take the bells and march to position 
 on the floor.) 
 
 Bells on Hips — Place ! 
 
 a. Clicking— One ! 8. 
 
 b. Point step forward, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Combine! 8 — 8. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 4. Forward — March ! (Keturn bells to place.) 
 Class—Halt ! 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (to seats.) 
 
 25 
 
26 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 Position for Bells while 
 Marching to Place 
 
 Bells on Hips 
 
 3 a. CLICKING 
 
 1, click the thumb ends of the bells ; 2, replace bell on hips. 
 While clicking, the arms should be held in an easy position 
 forward and downward, the elbows slightly bent. 
 
 3 6. POINT STEP FOKWAKD 
 
 1, extend the foot and touch the toe on a line directly forward 
 of the position from which it started ; 2, heels together. Keep 
 the shoulders (upper part of body) perfectly still and the knees 
 stiff, that the exercise may lead to firm, erect carriage. Do 
 not drag or scuff the foot over the floor. The weight should 
 remain entirely on the stationary foot. 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 
 
 27 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
 FORWARD AND CLICKING 
 
 1, click the bells and take the 
 point step forward simultaneously ; 
 2, hands on hips and heels together. 
 
28 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON II 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facing. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 ' a. Clicking — One ! 8. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step forward with the right foot. 
 I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 4. Alternate rising on toes and clicking bells, four counts each 
 — One ! Repeat four times. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 5. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 6. Stretching. 
 
 Arms folded behind — Place ! 
 
 7. Breathing — Begin ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 29 
 
 4. ALTERNATE RISING ON TOES AND CLICKING BELLS, 
 FOUR COUNTS EACH 
 
 1, rise on the toes ; 2. heels down, quietly and without jar- 
 ring ; 3, rise again on the toes ; 4, heels down ; 5, click the 
 thumb ends of the bells ; 6, click the little finger ends of the 
 bells; 7, click the thumb ends; 8, click the little fiuger ends 
 and return the bells at once to the hips. 
 
 The rising on the toes should be as high as possible in order 
 to make an effective balance movement. The return to position 
 should not be made until the command for it is given. 
 
 7. BREATHING 
 
 Inhale a deep breath through the nostrils and exhale through 
 the mouth. Repeat three times. 
 
 The folding of the arms behind throws the chest forward 
 and upward and keeps the shoulders from an exaggerated 
 lifting or shrugging during the inhalation. 
 
30 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSOI^ III 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 ' a. Clicking — One ! 8. 
 h. Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step sideways. 
 I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Alternate rising on toes and clicking bells, four counts 
 each — One ! Four times. 
 
 Position ! 
 Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Running. 
 
 Note. — See Reference Note 7. 
 8. Breathing — Begin ! Three times. 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 31 
 
 3 b. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, extend the foot directly 
 to the side and touch the 
 inner side of the toe; 2, 
 heels together. The ex- 
 tended knee and ankle 
 should be stretched as 
 straight as possible. The 
 weight should remain en- 
 tirely on the stationary foot. 
 The shoulders should be im- 
 movable, that the exercise 
 may cultivate power of erect 
 carriage. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING 
 
 1, click the bells and take the point step to the side simul- 
 taneously ; 2, bells on hips and heels together. 
 
 8. BREATHING 
 
 Raise the arms sideways to shoulder level while inhaling; 
 lower them to position while exhaling. The breath should be 
 slower and deeper than the normal. 
 
32 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON IV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 f a. Clicking — One ! 8. 
 
 3. \ b. Foot !— side— place. 8—8. 
 ic. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 4. Swinging bell to chest, right— One! 8 — 8—8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 5. Alternate rising on toes and clicking bells, four counts each 
 
 — One ! Four times. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells 
 to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Three times. 
 
 4. SWINGING BELL TO CHEST 
 
 1, bend the elbow and swing the 
 forearm forward and upward un- 
 til the bell touches the chest in 
 a vertical position ; 2, return the 
 bell to the side. Keep the shoul- 
 ders squarely to the front during 
 this exercise. When the bell is at 
 the chest, draw the shoulders and 
 
 elbows backward in order to counteract any tendency to cramp 
 
 the chest. 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 33 
 
 LESSON V 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Position ! 
 ' a. Swinging bell to chest, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Point step forward. 
 I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 4. Raising bell sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 5. Alternate rising on toes and clicking bells, four counts each 
 — One ! Four times. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND SWINGING 
 
 BELLS TO CHEST 
 
 1, point step forward with the right foot, and swing both 
 bells to the chest; 2, heels together and bells down to position. 
 
 4. RAISING BELL SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, raise the arm straight out sideways to shoulder level, the 
 palm down and the bell horizontal ; 2, lower the arm to position 
 at the side. 
 
34 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Position ! 
 r a. Swinging bell to chest, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 3. \h. Foot !— forward— place. 8—8. 
 Ic. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 4. Eaising bell sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 a. Trunk twisting, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 With clicking ! 8—8. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 =■ \i 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 
 
 35 
 
 ba. TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, twist or rotate the trunk to 
 the side ; 2, return to the forward 
 position. The movement should 
 be from the ankles, the feet re- 
 maining firmly in place and flat 
 upon the floor. The head should 
 turn with the trunk, but no far- 
 ther. There should be no bend- 
 ing of the trunk sideways. 
 
 5 h. TRUNK TWISTING WITH 
 CLICKING 
 
 1, twist the trunk and click 
 the thumb ends of the bells in 
 front as the body then faces; 
 2, return to the front, bells on 
 hips. 
 
36 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON VII 
 Stretching. 
 
 Facings. 
 
 Marching. 
 
 Position I 
 
 ' a. Raising bell sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 b. Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step sideways. 
 
 . c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 i a. Trunk twisting with point step, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 \b. With clicking I 8—8. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4. 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 37 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF 
 POINT STEP AND 
 RAISING BELLS SIDE- 
 WAYS 
 
 1, point step side- 
 ways with the right 
 foot and raise both 
 bells sideways; 2, 
 heels together and 
 bells down to posi- 
 tion. 
 
 This is an excellent 
 balance movement 
 and will cultivate an 
 erect carriage if the 
 head is held erect 
 and there is no weight 
 on the moving foot. 
 
 4 a TEUNK TWISTING WITH POINT STEP 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right and extend the right foot in 
 front of the body as it then faces ; 2, return to the front, heels 
 together. The left foot should remain firmly in place. 
 
 4 ft. TRUNK TWISTING WITH POINT STEP AND CLICKING 
 
 1, click the bells while twisting the trunk and extending the 
 foot ; 2, face the front, bells on hips, and heels together. 
 
38 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON VIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 3. Swinging bell to chesty forward and return^ right — One! 
 
 8—8—8. 
 
 ' a. Raising bell sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8— 8. 
 h. Foot ! — side — place. 8-^8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 a. Trunk twisting with point step, right — One ! 8 — 8o 
 h. With clicking ! 8—8. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Peturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Punning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin! Four times. 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 
 
 39 
 
 3. SWINGING BELL TO CHEST, FOR- 
 WARD AND RETURN 
 
 1, swing the bell to the chest as 
 in previous lessons ; 2, stretch the 
 axm forward at shoulder level, the 
 bell still vertical; 3, return to 
 the chest; 4, bell down to posi- 
 tion. Be sure to extend the arm 
 to its full length forward while 
 taking the movement, that the 
 arm and shoulder muscles may be 
 well exercised. 
 
4D 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON IX 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 3. Swinging bell to chest, forward and return, right — One! 
 8—8—8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 4. Stepping forward and rising on toes, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 a. Alternate raising bells sideways and clicking, both — 
 One I 16. 
 
 b. Foot ! — side— place — twist — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Alternate point step sideways, and trunk 
 
 twisting. 
 , c. Combine ! 16—16. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Punning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 5. \ 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 41 
 
 4. STEPPING FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, step forward with the right foot, both feet flat upon the 
 floor and the weight equal ; 2, rise on the toes ; 3, heels down ; 
 4, heels together. 
 
 Because of the elongated base the rising on toes is here a 
 more difficult balance movement than when taken with the 
 heels together. 
 
 5 a. ALTERNATE RAISING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING 
 
 1, raise the bells sideways to shoulder level ; 2, bells down 
 to position at the sides ; 3, click the thumb ends of bells in front 
 of the body; 4, bells down to position at the sides. 
 
 5&. ALTERNATE POINT STEP SIDEWAYS AND TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 Ij point step to the side with the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 
 3, twist the trunk to the right ; 4, return to the front. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF ALTERNATE POINT STEP SIDEWAYS AND 
 TRUNK TWISTING, WITH RAISING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND 
 CLICKING 
 
 1, point step sideways and both arms raised sideways; 
 2, heels together and arms down; 3, twist the trunk to the 
 side (the heels remaining together), and click the bells ; 4, re- 
 turn to the front, arms at sides. 
 
42 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON X 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 4. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 r a. Swinging bell to chest, forward and return, right- 
 
 I One ! 8—8—8. 
 
 ^ h. Foot! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Stepping forward and rising on toes. 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 Alternate raising bells sideways and clicking, both- 
 One ! 16. 
 Foot ! — side — place — twist — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 f a. 
 
 I 
 
 [c. Combine! ^—^. 
 
 5. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 6. Stretching. 
 
 7. Running. 
 
 8. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 
 
 43 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING FOR- 
 WARD AND RISING ON TOES WITH 
 BELLS AT CHEST AND FORWARD 
 
 1, step forward with the right 
 foot and swing both bells to the 
 chest ; 2, rise on the toes and 
 stretch the bells forward ; 3, heels 
 
 down and bells again to 
 the chest ; 4, heels to- 
 gether and arms down in 
 position. The waist and 
 head should be held 
 firmly erect. 
 
 7. BREATHING 
 
 In this and succeeding lessons both the inhaling and exhal- 
 ing should be through the nostrils. 
 
44 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. ] 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Position ! 
 f a. Swinging bell to chest, forward and return, right — 
 One! 8—8—8. 
 
 b. Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 a. Alternate raising bells sideways and clicking both — 
 
 One ! 16. 
 h. Foot ! — side — place — twist — place. 8—^8. 
 . c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 5. Alternate trunk bending sideways and clicking bells, right 
 — One! Four times. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 
 
 4i5 
 
 5. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING BELLS 
 
 1, bend the trunk directly to the 
 right side; 2, return to the erect 
 position ; 3, bend to the left side ; 
 4, return to the erect position ; 5, 
 click the thumb ends of the bells; 
 
 6, click the little finger ends ; 7, 
 8, repeat the clicking and return 
 the hands to the hips immediately 
 after the last count. While bend- 
 ing the trunk keep both feet flat 
 upon the floor and the knees stiff. 
 The head should remain in a 
 straight line with the axis of the 
 trunk. The bending should be to 
 an obtuse angle and as far as can 
 easily be done without strain. 
 There should be no rotating of 
 the trunk forward or backward of 
 the lateral line. 
 
46 School Gvmnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 ^ a. Swinging bell to chest, sideways and return, right- 
 One! 8—8—8. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Stepping forward and rising on toes as in 
 previous lessons, 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 f a. Alternate raising bells sideways and clicking, both — 
 
 4. J ^'''- 
 
 I 5. Foot! — side — place — twist — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 I c. Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 5. Alternate trunk bending sideways and clicking bells, right 
 — One ! Four times. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 
 
 47 
 
 Za. SWINGING BELL TO 
 CHEST, SIDEWAYS AND 
 RETURN 
 
 1, swing the bell to the 
 chest as in previous les- 
 sons ; 2, extend the arm 
 sideways at shoulder level, 
 palm to the front, bell 
 vertical; 3, return the 
 bell to the chest ; 4, arm 
 down to position at the 
 side. Keep the head 
 erect. 
 
 The stretching of the 
 arms to the side should 
 be vigorous (though with- 
 out jerking), that it may 
 lift and expand the chest. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 
 WITH BELLS TO CHEST, SIDEWAYS, AND RETURN 
 
 1, step forward and swing the bells to the chest; 2, rise on 
 the toes and stretch the arms sideways ; 3, heels down and bells 
 again to the chest ; 4, heels together and arms down to posi- 
 tion at the sides. 
 
3. 
 
 48 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XIIT 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Position ! 
 f a. Swinging bell to chest, sideways and return, right — 
 One ! 8—8—8. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — up— down — place. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine! 8 — 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 4. Stamping and clicking, right foot — One ! Four times. 
 
 5. Alternate trunk bending sideways and clicking bells, right 
 — One ! Four times. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. R/unning. 
 
 9. Breathing^Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4. STAMPING AND CLICKING 
 
 1, stamp the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 3, stamp the left 
 foot ; 4, heels together ; 5, click the thumb ends of the bells ; 
 6, click the opposite ends of the bells ; 7, 8, repeat the clicking, 
 and return the hands to the hips immediately after. 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 49 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 3. Swinging bell forward to shoulder^ right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 f a. Rising on toes — One ! IG. 
 I h. With arms ! 1(3. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 5. Stamping and trunk bending alternated with the clicking, 
 right foot — One ! Two or four times. 
 
 Cues. — Stamp — heels — stamp — heels ; click, click, click- 
 click ; bend — up — bend — up ; click, click, click, click. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Punning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin! Four times. 
 
 3. SWINGING BELL FORWARD TO 
 SHOULDER 
 
 1, swing the bell forward the 
 full length of the arm, and when 
 it is at shoulder level bend the 
 elbow and bring the hand to the 
 top of the shoulder, the elbow re- 
 maining pointed forward at the 
 shoulder level; 2, swing the arm 
 forward and downward to posi- 
 tion at the side. Keep the head 
 and trunk erect. This is an ex- 
 cellent exercise for the arm and 
 shoulder. 
 
50 School Gymnastics 
 
 4«. RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, rise on the toes ; 2, lieels down, quietly, and without 
 jarring. _______ 
 
 4 6. WITH ARMS 
 
 While rising on the toes raise the arms straight out at the 
 sides to shoulder level, palms down, bells horizontal ; arms 
 down to position while heels sink. 
 
 5. STAMPING AND TRUNK BENDING ALTERNATED WITH THE 
 
 CLICKING 
 
 1, stamp the right foot ; 2, heels together : 3, stamp the left 
 foot ; 4, heels together ; 5, 6, 7, 8, click the bells, pJternating 
 the ends beginning with the thumb ends ; 9, bend the trunk to 
 the right side ; 10, resume the erect position ; 11, bend to the 
 left side ; 12, erect position ; 13, 14, 15, 16, clicking. This 
 succession of movements should be directed throughout by the 
 cues as given in the lesson, at least when the exercise is new. 
 Otherwise it may be unnecessarily difficult for the children. 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 51 
 
 LESSOK XV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Position ! 
 f a. Swinging bell forward to shonlder, right — One ! 8 — 
 
 3 ! ^-^- 
 
 j h. Stamping ! 8 — 8. 
 
 I c. Combine ! S—^, 
 
 { a. Ilising on toes — One ! 16. 
 4. ' 
 
 \h. With arms! 16. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 5. Stamping and trunk bending alternated with clicking, right 
 foot — One ! Four times. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3 6. STAMPING 
 
 This is the same as given in previous exercises. Stamp 
 the foot on the first count and place the heels together on the 
 second count. 
 
 3 e. COMBINATION OF STAMPING AND SWINGING BELLS FORWARD 
 
 TO SHOULDERS 
 
 1, stamp the foot and swing both bells forward to the top of 
 the shoulders ; 2, heels together and arms forward and down- 
 ward to place. 
 
m 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 
 LESSON XVI 
 
 1. stretching. 
 
 
 2. Facings. 
 
 
 Marching. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Position! 
 ' a. Swinging bell forward to shoulder, right — One ! 
 
 8—8—8. 
 ' h. Stamping! 8—8. 
 ^ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 4. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 5. Stamping and trunk bending alternated with clicking, right 
 foot — One ! Twice. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 9. Breathing — Begin! Four times. 
 
 4. SWINGING BELL SIDEWAYS TO 
 SHOULDER 
 
 1, swing the bell up sideways 
 the full length of the arm, turn- 
 ing the palm up as it moves; 
 when at shoulder level bend the 
 elbow and bring the hand to the 
 top of the shoulder, the elbow 
 extended horizontally at the side ; 
 2, swing the bell out again to the 
 side, the full length of the arm, 
 and down to position, turning the 
 palm in as it moves. 
 
 If taken with vigor, this is an 
 effective exercise for the side of 
 the chest, for the top and back of 
 the shoulder, and for the arm 
 itself. 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 53 
 
 LESSON XYII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marcliinsr. 
 
 'O' 
 
 Position ! 
 [a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, right — One! 
 I 8—8—8. 
 
 3. \ h. On toes ! 8. 
 
 I XoTE. — Rising on toes. 
 
 [ c. Combine ! 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 4. Stamping and trunk bending alternated with clicking, right 
 foot — One ! Four times. 
 
 f a. Trunk twisting with point step, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 5. \ b. With clicking ! 8—8. 
 
 [ i^OTE. — As in Lesson VII. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND SWINGING BELLS 
 SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS 
 
 1, rise on the toes and swing the bells sideways to the top 
 of the shoulders ; 2, heels and arms down. Keep the head 
 erect. 
 
 This is a comparatively difficult balance movement, requiring 
 strong work of the ankle, hip, and waist muscles. 
 
54 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 7. 
 8. 
 9. 
 
 a. 
 
 LESSON XVIII 
 Stretching. 
 Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Position ! 
 Swinging bell to shoulder, forward and sideways alter- 
 nately, right — One I 8 — 8. 
 Foot ! — forward — place — side— place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step forward and sideways alternately. 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 Rising on toes — One ! 16. 
 With arms ! 16. 
 
 XoTE.— As in previous lesson. 
 Trunk twisting with point step, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 With clicking ! 8—8. 
 
 Position ! 
 Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Running. 
 Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
First Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 55 
 
 Za. SWINGING BELL TO SHOULDER. FORWARD AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 ALTERNATELY 
 
 1, swing the bell forward to the top of the shoulder ; 2, swing 
 it forward and downward to position at the side ; 3, swing it 
 sideways to the top of the shoulder; 4, swing sideways and 
 downward to position at the side. 
 
 3 6. POINT STEP FORWARD AND SIDEWAYS ALTERNATELY 
 
 1, point step forward ; 2, heels together ; 3, point step to the 
 side ; 4^ heels together. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND SWINGING BELLS TO 
 
 SHOULDERS 
 
 1, point step forward and swing both bells forward to the 
 top of the shoulders ; 2, heels together and bells down through 
 the forward position ; 3, point step sideways and swing bells 
 sideways to the top of the shoulders; 4, heels together and 
 arms down through the side position. 
 
 In these exercises the stretching of the arms should be 
 vigorous, and the balance firm on the stationary foot. Keep 
 the head erect. 
 
56 School Gymnastics 
 
 First Series 
 
 Dumb-bells, \ pound 
 
 PROGRAMME FOR SPECIAL EXERCISES 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 a. Clicking — One ! 8. Lesson I. 
 
 h. Foot !— forward— place. 8—8. " I. 
 
 [c. Combine! 8—8. " I. 
 
 Position ! 
 ' a. Raising bells sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 Lesson V. 
 h. Foot !— side— place. 8—8. " III. 
 
 c. Combine! 8—8. " VII. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 3. Rising on toes four counts and clicking bells four counts — 
 One ! Four times. Lesson 11. 
 
 ' a. Trunk twisting w^ith point step, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 4. -! Lesson VII. 
 h. With clicking ! 8—8. " VII. 
 
 Position ! 
 ' a. Swinging bell to chest, forward and return, right — 
 One ! 8—8—8. Lesson VIII. 
 
 5. "! h. Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 
 c. Combine! 8—8. " X. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 6. Stamping and trunk bending alternated with the clicking, 
 right foot — One ! Four times. Lesson XIV. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 ' a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulder, right — One ! 
 
 8—8-8. Lesson XVI. 
 
 h. On toes ! 8. " XVI. 
 
 c. Combine! 8. " XVII. 
 
Second Series 
 
 Second year, Boys and Girls 
 Wands, 3 feet 
 
 lesso:n^ I 
 
 Note. — For details of preliminaries^ stretching, tactics, 
 floor formation, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 
 Class — Stand ! 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Left— Face! 
 Right— Face ! 
 Forward — March ! (Take 
 
 wands and hold '' at carry " 
 
 while marching to position 
 
 on floor.) 
 Wand in position for work — 
 One ! Two ! 
 
 3. Raising wand to chest — One ! 
 16. 
 Wand at carry— One ! Two ! 
 
 4. Forward — March ! (Eeturn 
 
 wands to place.) 
 Class— Halt ! 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 6. Forward — March! (to seats). 
 
 WAND AT CAREY 
 
 Hold the wand vertically in 
 the right hand so that it rests against the right shoulder, the 
 lower end held by the right foreflnger. 
 
 67 
 
58 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 To return the wand 
 to the carry position, 
 command, " Wand at 
 carry — One ! Two ! " 
 Kaise the left arm on 
 One ! as for position for 
 work, and drop that arm 
 to position at the side 
 on Two! 
 
 WAND IN POSITION FOR 
 WORK 
 
 In response to the first 
 count of the executive 
 command raise the left 
 arm, with elbow bent at 
 right angles across the 
 forehead, palm out, and 
 grasp the upper end of 
 the wand with the left 
 hand. In response to the 
 second count bring the 
 wand down to a hori- 
 zontal position at arm's 
 length in front. 
 
Second Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 
 
 m 
 
 4. RAISING WAND TO p 
 CHEST r 
 
 1, bend the elbows ■ 
 and lift the fore- i 
 arms upward until the 
 wand rests horizon- 
 tally across the chest ; 
 2, lower the wand 
 again to position. 
 
 Draw the upper 
 arm, including the 
 shoulder, well back- 
 ward, and close to the 
 sides, that the shoul- 
 der blades may be 
 flattened by the move- 
 ment and the chest 
 expanded. Keep the 
 head erect. 
 
 
60 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON II 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Note. — The taking of the wands and the com- 
 mand " Position for work — One ! Two ! '' will be 
 omitted from succeeding lessons, those preliminaries 
 being understood, 
 a. Eaising wand to chest — One ! 16. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — place. Eight 8, left 8. 
 j Note. — Point Step forward. 
 
 [c. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 4. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 5. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
 
 6. Stretching. 
 
 Arms folded behind — Place ! 
 
 7. Breathing — Begin ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 3. 
 
 3 b. POINT STEP FORWARD. 
 
 1, extend the right foot forward and touch the toe on a line 
 directly forward of the position from which it started ; 2, heels 
 together. Keep the shoulders (upper part of body) perfectly 
 still and the knees stiff. Do not drag or scuff the foot over 
 the floor. The weight should remain entirely on the stationary 
 foot. 
 
 If correctly taken, this exercise cultivates an erect carriage. 
 
Second Series, IVamis — Boys and Girls 61 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND RAISING WAND 
 
 TO CHEST 
 
 1, point step forward 
 and wand raised to chest 
 simultaneously ; 2, wand 
 down and heels together. 
 
 Do not interrupt the 
 rhythm in passing from 
 one of these exercises to 
 the next. For the method 
 of commanding for this 
 series' work, see Refer- 
 ence Kote 14. 
 
 7. BREATHING 
 
 Inhale a deep breath 
 through the nostrils 
 and exhale through the 
 mouth. Eepeat three 
 times. The folding of 
 the arms behind throws 
 the chest forward and upward, and holds the shoulders from 
 an exaggerated lifting or shrugging during the inhalation. 
 
62 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON III 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Eaising wand to chest — One ! 16. 
 
 3. \ b. Foot !— forward— place. 8—8. 
 ic. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 ( a. Trunk bending sideways, Right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 • \b. With wand! 8—8. 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 Note. — See Reference Note 7. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Three times. 
 
Second Series, IVamis — Boys and Girls 
 
 63 
 
 4 a. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, bend the trunk from the Avaist directly to the side; 2, re- 
 turn to the erect position. Keep both feet flat upon the floor 
 and the knees stiff. The head should remain in a straight 
 line with the axis of the trunk. The bending should be to an 
 obtuse angle and as far as can easily be done without strain. 
 There should be no rotating of the trunk forward or backward 
 of the lateral line. During the bending the wand should be 
 held at arm's length down in front. 
 
 4 b. TRUNK BENDING SIDE- 
 WAYS WITH WAND TO 
 CHEST 
 
 1, raise the wand to the 
 chest as in previous exer- 
 cises; 2, holding the wand 
 in this position bend the 
 trunk to the side ; 3, resmne 
 the erect position, the wand 
 still held at the chest; 4, 
 wand down. 
 
 9. BREATHING 
 
 While inhaling, raise the 
 arms sideways to shoulder 
 level ; while exhaling lower 
 them to position. 
 
64 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 lesso:n^ IV 
 
 3. 
 
 5. 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 8. 
 9. 
 
 Stretching. 
 
 Facings. 
 
 Marching. 
 
 4. \ 
 
 Aiming, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Point step sideways. 
 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 Trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 With wand ! 8—8. 
 Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Running. 
 Breathing — Begin ! Four Times. 
 
 a. 
 
 h. 
 
 c. 
 
 {a. 
 b. 
 
 Za. AIMING 
 
 1, swing the wand up to shoulder level at the right side, the 
 right arm extended at full length to the right, the grasp of the 
 right hand loosened so as to allow the wand to slip through it 
 and rest lightly in the crotch of the thumb ; the wand should 
 be horizontal, and the left elbow lifted so that it is level with 
 the wand ; 2, swing the wand down again to position, the right 
 hand resuming its grasp. 
 
 This exercise affects the shoulder and chest muscles and 
 those of the arm. 
 
Second Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 65 
 
 3 h. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, touch the side of the toe directly to the side, stretching 
 the instep as straight as possible; 2, heels together. As in 
 the point step forward, the weight should be held steadily 
 on the stationary foot. Keep Jhe shoulders squarely to the 
 front and the knees stiff. Like the point step forward, this 
 exercise cultivates steady poise and erect carriage. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND AIMING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, aim to the right and take the point step to the right 
 simultaneously ; 2, heels together and wand down to position. 
 
66 ' School Gymnastics 
 
 lesso:n^ V 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Aiming^ right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 b. Eoot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 r a. Rising on toes — One ! 8. 
 • [h. With wand! 8. 
 
 ^ f a. Trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 8—8. 
 
 ""• \b. With wand! 8—8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4 a. RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, rise on the toes as high as possible; 2, heels down, quietly 
 and without jarring. Keep the weight forward (i.e. avoid any 
 swaying backward) when the heels are lowered. This should 
 be the usual standing position, and no swaying forward should 
 be necessary before rising on the toes. 
 
 4 7>. RISING ON TOES WITH WAND TO CHEST 
 
 1, rise on the toes and raise the wand to the chest ; 2, heels 
 and wand down. 
 
Second Series, ]Vands — Boys and Girls 67 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging wand forward — One ! 8. 
 
 h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Point step forward. 
 
 c. Combine I 8 — 8. 
 f a. Rising on toes — One ! 8. 
 I h. With wand ! 8. 
 
 r a. Trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 I h. With wand ! 8—8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. E/unning. 
 
 10. Breathing— Begin ! Four times. 
 
 5. 
 
 J 
 
68 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 SWINGING WAND FORWARD 
 
 1, swing the wand forward and upward to shoulder level at 
 arm's length; 2, return the wand to position. Keep the head 
 and waist firmly erect, and correct any tendency to throw the 
 hips forward or the shoulders backward. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND SWINGING 
 
 WAND FORWARD 
 
 1, point step and wand forward ; 2, heels together and wand 
 down. 
 
 8. BREATHING 
 
 In this and succeeding lessons the exhaling should be through 
 the nostrils, the lips being closed. 
 
Second Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 69 
 
 LESSON YII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Swinging wand forward — One ! 8. 
 
 3. ] h. Foot 1— forward— place. 8—8. 
 Ic. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 r a. Rising on toes — One ! 8. 
 '^' [h. With wand! 8. 
 
 a. Raising wand vertically forward, right arm up — 
 One! 8—8—8. 
 
 5. \ b. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
 Note. — Trunk twisting. 
 
 ;. Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
70 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 a. RAISING WAND VERTICALLY FORWARD 
 
 1, raise the wand to a vertical position at arm's length in 
 front ; 2, return to position. Right arm uppermost eight counts ; 
 left eight ; alternate eight. 
 
 5 6. TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, twist or rotate the trunk to the side ; 2, return to the for- 
 ward position. The movement should be from the ankles, the 
 feet remaining firmly in place and flat upon the floor. The 
 head should turn with the trunk, but no farther. There should 
 be no bending of the trunk sideways. 
 
 V^ITF^S^ 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWIST- 
 ING AND RAISING WAND VERTI- 
 CALLY FORWARD 
 
 1, twist to the right and raise 
 the wand vertically forward, the 
 right arm up and the left down; 
 2, return to the front, wand down 
 to position. In twisting to the 
 left, the left arm should be up. 
 
Second Series, IVands — Boys ami Girls 71 
 
 LESSOK VIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a: Alternate swinging wand forward and aiming — One ! 
 8—8. 
 
 3. \ h. Foot! — forward — place — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Alternate point step forward and sideways. 
 
 c. Combine I 8 — 8. 
 { a. Eising on toes — One ! 16. 
 1^. With wand! 16. 
 
 f a. Wand vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 
 8—8—8. 
 
 h. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
 I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 6. 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 3 a. ALTERNATE SWINGING WAND FORWARD AND AIMING 
 1, swing the wand forward at arm's length to shoulder level ; 
 2, down to position ; 3, aim to the right side; 4, down to position. 
 
 3&. ALTERNATE POINT STEP FORWARD AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step forward ; 2, heels together ; 3, point step side- 
 ways ; 4, heels together. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND SIDEWAYS AND 
 SWINGING WAND FORWARD AND AIMING 
 
 1, point step forward and wand forward ; 2, heels together 
 and wand down ; 3^ point step to the side and aiming to the 
 same side ; 4,, heels together and wand down. 
 
72 School Gymnastics 
 
 , ^. . . . LESSON IX 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Alternate swinging wand forward and aiming — One ! 
 
 3. ^ b. Foot! — forward — place — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Wand to chest, forward and return — One ! 16. 
 
 b. Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Stepping forward and rising on toes. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Wand vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 8 — 
 8—8. 
 
 b. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
 ^c. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin! Four times. 
 
Second Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 
 
 73 
 
 4 a. WAND TO CHEST, FORWARD AND RETURN 
 
 1, raise the wand to the chest ; 2, extend the wand forward 
 arm's length at shoulder level; 3, wand agam to the chest; 
 4, down to position. 
 
 4 6. STEPPING FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, step forward, both feet flat upon the floor and the weight 
 equal ; 2, rise on the toes ; 3, heels down ; 4, heels together. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF STEP- 
 PING FORWARD AND 
 RISING ON TOES WITH 
 WAND TO CHEST. FOR- 
 WARD AND RETURN 
 
 1, step forward and 
 raise the wand to the 
 
 chest; 2, rise on the toes and 
 extend the wand forward; 3, 
 heels down and wand again to 
 the chest; 4, heels together 
 and wand down. 
 
74 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. \ 
 
 LESSON X 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Wand to chest, vertical and return — One ! 8 — 8. 
 Foot ! — side — face — front— place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step sideways, face to the side and 
 return. 
 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 Wand to chest, forward and return — One ! 16. 
 Foot ! — forward — up— down — place. 8 — 8. 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 J a. Trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 ^' \b. With wand! 8—8. 
 
 Note. — As in Lesson III et seq. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 a. 
 b. 
 
Second Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 76 
 
 3 a. WAND TO CHEST, VERTICAL AND RETURN 
 
 1, raise the wand to the chest ; 2, extend vertically forward ; 
 3, return to the chest ; 4, down to position. 
 
 3 6. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS. FACE TO THE SIDE AND RETURN 
 
 1, point step sideways; 2, face to the side, the feet being 
 then in the position of point step forward; 3, return to the 
 front, the feet then being in the position of point step sideways ; 
 4, heels together. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND FACING SIDEWAYS AND 
 WAND TO CHEST AND VERTICALLY FORWARD 
 
 1, point step to the side and wand raised to the chest ; 2, face 
 to the side and extend the wand vertically forward ; 3, face to 
 the front and return the wand to the chest ; 4, heels together 
 and wand down. In facing to the right, the right arm will be 
 uppermost in extending the wand, and vice versa. 
 
76 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Wand to chest, vertical and return — One ! 8 — 8. 
 h. Foot ! — side — face — front — place. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Aiming right and left alternately — One ! 8 — 8. 
 h. Foot! — step — up, down; — step — up, down. Forward 
 4. \ 8, backward 8. 
 
 Note. — Stepping and rising on toes. 
 . Combine! 8—8. 
 fa. Trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 I h. With wand ! 8—8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Second Series, JVamis — Boys and Girls 77 
 
 4 a. AIMING RIGHT AND LEFT ALTERNATELY 
 
 1, aim to the right; 2, swing the wand down in front of and 
 across the body to the left; 3, aim to the left; 4, swing the 
 wand down and across to the right; 5, aim to the right; 
 6, 7, continue to alternate the direction of the aiming, swing- 
 ing the wand down in the transition ; 8 wand down to position 
 in front. 
 
 4 6. STEPPING AND RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, step forward with the right foot as for walking ; 2, bring 
 up the left heel beside the right, at the same time quickly 
 rising on the toes and lowering the heels to position ; 3, step 
 forward with the left foot ; 4, bring up the right foot, rise on 
 the toes and lower the heels to position ; 5, step backward 
 with the right foot; 6, draw the left foot back beside the 
 right, rise on the toes and lower the heels to position ; 7, 8, the 
 same with the left foot leading. Eepeat. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND RISING ON TOES AND AIMING 
 
 1, step forward with the right foot, rise on the toes, and aim 
 to the right ; 2, swing the wand down across the body as the 
 heels are lowered; 3, 4, repeat with the other foot leading 
 and the wand swung across to the aiming position on that 
 side. The combination of these two exercises will fall into a 
 natural, swinging rhythm, the aiming and the rising on toes 
 coming together and the downward motion of the wand and 
 heels coinciding. Waltz time will facilitate the mastery of 
 this rhythm. 
 
78 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 
 10. 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 Stretching. 
 
 Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Wand to chest, vertical and return — One ! 
 
 Foot ! — side — face — front — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 Aiming right and left alternately — One ! 8 
 
 Foot ! — step — up, down. 8 — 8. 
 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 Wand over head — One ! 16. 
 
 Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
 Note. — Trunk twisting. 
 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 Forward — March! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 E/unning. 
 Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 8—8. 
 
 b. 
 c. 
 a. 
 b, 
 c. 
 a. 
 b. 
 
 c. 
 
Second Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 
 
 79 
 
 5 a. WAND OVER HEAD 
 
 1, raise the wand in a horizontal position directly over the 
 head, the elbows straight and the head erect ; 2, wand down 
 to position. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND WAND OVER HEAD 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the side and raise the wand over the 
 head ; 2, return to the front, the wand down to position. 
 
80 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Alternate wand to chest and aiming, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 b. On toes ! — up — down— side— place. 
 
 3. j Note. — Alternate rising on toes and point step 
 sideways. 
 
 ^ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 f a. Aiming right and left alternately — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 4. \ b. Foot ! — step — up, down. 8 — 8. 
 Ic. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 ( a. Wand over head — One ! 16. 
 
 5. ] b. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
 Ic. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One 1 Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 Arms folded behind — Place ! 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Second Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 81 
 
 3 a. ALTERNATE WAND TO CHEST AND AIMING 
 
 1, raise the wand to the chest ; 2, wand down to position ; 
 3, aim to the right side ; 4, wand down to position. 
 
 3 6. ALTERNATE RISING ON TOES AND POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, rise on the toes ; 2, heels down ; 3, point step sideways ; 
 4, heels together. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 
 WITH WAND TO CHEST AND AIMING 
 
 1, rise on the toes and raise the wand to the chest ; 2, heels 
 and wand down ; 3, aim to the right side and take the point 
 step to the left ; 4, heels together and wand down. In aiming 
 to the left take the point step to the right. 
 
82 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Alternate wand to chest and aiming — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 3. ^ h. On toes ! — up — down— side — place. 8 — 8. 
 U. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 a. Alternate point step and stepping and rising on toes, 
 
 right — One ! Forward 16, backward 16. 
 h. With aiming ! 16—16. 
 a. Wand over head — One ! 16. 
 h. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 4 a. ALTEKNATE POINT STEP AND STEPPING AND EISING ON TOES 
 
 1, point step forward with the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 
 3, point step forward with the left foot ; 4, heels together ; 
 5, 6, ^' step, up, down," with the right foot leading ; 7, 8, " step, 
 up, down," with the left foot leading. Eepeat through 16 
 counts ; on the second 16 step backward instead of forward. 
 
 4 6. COMBINATION OF ALTERNATE POINT STEP AND STEPPING 
 AND RISING ON TOES WITH AIMING 
 
 During the stepping and rising on toes aim to the sides as 
 in previous lessons. The wand remains down in front during 
 the point steps. 
 
Second Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 83 
 
 LESSON XV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 j- a. Alternate wand to chest and aiming — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 3. ] h. On toes ! — up — down — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 ic. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 a. Alternate point step and stepping and rising on toes, 
 
 right— One ! 16—16. 
 h. With aiming! 16—16. 
 
 a. Wand to chest and over head alternately — One ! 16. 
 h. Trunk ! — bend— up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
 6. \ Note. — Alternate trunk bending sideways and 
 
 twisting, 
 c. Combine ! 8^ — 8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
84 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 a. WAND TO CHEST AND OVER HEAD ALTERNATELY 
 
 1, wand to the chest; 2, wand down to position; 3, wand 
 over head ; 4, wand down to position. 
 
 5 h. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND TWISTING 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the side ; 2, resume the erect position ; 
 3, twist the trunk to the same side ; 4, face to the front. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND TWISTING 
 WITH WAND TO CHEST AND OVERHEAD 
 
 1, raise the wand to the chest and bend the trunk to the 
 side simultaneously ; 2, resume the erect position, wand down 
 in front ; 3, raise the wand over the head and twist the trunk 
 to the side ; 4, face to the front, wand down to position. 
 
 ' 
 
Second Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 85 
 
 LESSON XVI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Aiming sideways, wand forward and return, right ! 
 —One ! 8—8. 
 
 b. Foot !— side — forward— side — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Point step sideways, forward, and return. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Alternate point step and stepping and rising on toes, 
 
 4. ] right— One! 16—16. 
 
 b. With aiming ! 16—16. 
 
 f a. Wand to chest and over head alternately — One ! 16. 
 
 5. ] 6. Trunk — bend — up — twist — front. 16 — 16. 
 i c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
86 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 a, AIMING SIDEWAYS, WAND FORWARD AND RETURN 
 
 1, aim to the side ; 2, swing the wand from this to the for- 
 ward position as in Lesson VI ; 3, aim again to the same side ; 
 4, wand down to position. 
 
 3 6. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS, FORWARD AND RETURN 
 
 1. point step to the side ; 3, point step forward ; 3, point 
 step again to the side ; 4, heels together. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND WAND, SIDEWAYS, 
 FORWARD AND RETURN 
 
 1, point step and aiming to the side ; 2, point step forward, 
 and wand forward ; 3, point step and aiming again to the side ; 
 4, heels together and wand down to position. 
 
Second Series. Wands — Boys and Girls 87 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON XVII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Aiming sideways, wand forward and return, right 
 
 _One! 8—8. 
 h. Foot ! — side — forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Wand forward twice and to chest twice — One ! 16. 
 h. Foot! forward — place— change — place; twist — front 
 
 — change — front. 16. 
 
 Note. — Point step and trunk twisting. 
 0. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 f a. Wand to chest and over head alternately — One! 8. 
 
 5. \h. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
 [c. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin I Four times. 
 
88 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 a. WAND FORWARD TWICE AND TO CHEST TWICE 
 
 1, raise the wand forward ; 2, down to position ; 3, 4, repeat ; 
 5, wand to chest ; 6, down to position ; 7, 8, repeat. 
 
 4 6. POINT STEP AND TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, point step forward with the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 
 3, point step forward with the left foot ; 4, heels together ; 
 
 6, twist the trunk to the right and extend the right foot in a 
 point step in front of the body as it then faces ; 6, return to the 
 front, heels together ; 1, 8, repeat the twisting to the opposite 
 side. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND TRUNK TWISTING WITH 
 WAND FORWARD AND TO CHEST 
 
 1, point step forward with the right foot and raise the wand 
 forward ; 2, heels together and wand down ; 3, raise the wand 
 forward again and take the point step forward with the left 
 foot ; 4, wand down and heels together ; 6, twist to the right, 
 the right foot extended in a point step and the wand at the 
 chest ; 6, return to the front, heels together and wand down ; 
 
 7, 8, repeat to the opposite side. 
 
Second Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 89 
 
 LESSON XVIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Wand forward twice and to chest twice — One ! 16. 
 
 b. Foot ! — forward — place — change — place ; twist — front 
 — change — front. 16. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 a. Wand over head — One ! 8. 
 
 b. On toes! 8. 
 Note. — Eising on toes. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8. 
 
 a. Wand to chest and over head alternately — One ! 8. 
 
 b. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND WAND OVER HEAD 
 
 1, rise on the toes and raise the wand over the head; 2, 
 heels and wand down. Keep the head erect. 
 
90 School Gymnastics 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 6 
 
 Second Series 
 
 Wands, 3 feet 
 PROGRAMME FOE SPECIAL EXERCISES 
 
 a. Aiming, right — One ! 8 — 8. Lesson IV. 
 
 h. Foot! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 . c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 ' a. Wand vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 
 8—8—8. Lesson VII. 
 
 ] h. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
 [c. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 a. Wand to chest, forward and return — One ! 16. 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 
 b. Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Wand to chest and overhead, alternately — One ! 16. 
 
 Lesson XV. 
 h. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 16 or 32. 
 
 c. Combine I 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Wand over head — One ! 8. Lesson XVIII. 
 5. \ b. On toes ! 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8. 
 
 ' a. Aiming right and left, alternately — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Lesson XL 
 
 b. Foot ! — step — up, down ; step — up, down. 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
Third Series 
 
 Third year, boys and girls 
 
 Dumb-bells, ^ pound 
 
 LESSON I 
 
 Note. — For details of preliminaries, stretching, tactics, 
 floor formations, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 
 Class — Stand ! 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Left— Face! 
 Right— Face ! 
 
 Forward — March ! (Take bells and march to position on 
 
 floor.) 
 ^ a. Raising bell forward, right — One ! Eight 8, left 8 
 both 8. 
 
 3. J h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Point step forward. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 4. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 Class— Halt ! 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 6. Forward — March! (To seats.) 
 
 91 
 
92 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 a. RAISING BELLS FORWARD 
 
 1, raise the bell at full arm's length forward and upward to 
 shoulder level, the bell vertical ; 2, lower again to the side. 
 Keep the head erect, and avoid any forward motion of the 
 hips or backward inclination of the shoulders. 
 
 3 6. POINT STEP FORWARD 
 
 1, extend the foot forward, and touch the toe on a line 
 directly forward of the position from which it started ; 2, heels 
 together. Keep the body firmly poised, with the shoulders 
 (upper part of the body) perfectly still, and the knees stiff. 
 Do not drag or scuff the foot over the floor. The weight 
 should remain entirely on the stationary foot. 
 
 3 e. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
 FORWARD AND RAISING BELLS 
 FORWARD 
 
 1, point step forward with the 
 right foot and both bells raised 
 forward ; 2, heels together and 
 bells down. 
 
3. 
 
 Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 93 
 
 LESSON II 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Raising bell sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step sideways. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Clicking bells vertically forward — One ! 8. 
 h. Trunk ! — twist — front — left — front. 8. 
 
 Note. — Trunk twisting, right and left alternately. 
 
 c. Alternate ! — twist — place — click — place. 16. 
 
 d. Combine! 8. 
 
 5. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 6. Stretching. 
 
 Arms folded behind — Place ! 
 
 7. Breathing — Begin! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 RAISING BELL SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, raise the bell at full arm's length sideways to shoulder 
 level, bell horizontal ; 2, lower again to the side.* Keep the 
 waist and head erect, and make the movement a strong pull 
 throughout that it may lift and expand the chest. 
 
 3 6. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, touch the side of the toe directly to the side, stretching 
 the instep as straight as possible ; 2, heels together. As in the 
 point step forward, the weight should be held steadily on the 
 stationary foot that a firmly poised carriage may be cultivated 
 by the exercise. Keep the shoulders squarely to the front and 
 the knees stiff. 
 
94 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND RAISING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step tio the side and both bells raised sideways; 
 2, heels together and bells down to position. 
 
 4 a. CLICKING BELLS VERTICALLY FORWARD 
 
 1, swing the bells up to shoulder level at arm's length in 
 front and click the four lobes together, the bells held verti- 
 cally ; 2, lower the bells again to the sides. 
 
 Avoid bending backward from the waist as the arms are 
 stretched forward, and be sure that the chest is thrown well 
 forward as the arms return to position at the sides. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 
 
 95 
 
 4 h. TRUNK TWISTING, RIGHT AND LEFT ALTERNATELY 
 
 1, twist or rotate the trunk to the right side ; 2, return to the 
 forward position ; 3, 4, twist to tlie left side and return. The 
 movement shoukl be from the ankles, the feet remaining firmly 
 in place and flat upon the floor. The head should turn with 
 the trunk, but no farther. There should be no bending side- 
 ways at the waist. 
 
 4 c. ALTERNATE TRUNK TWISTING AND CLICKING BELLS 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right ; 2, return to the front ; 3, click 
 the bells forward ; 4, bells down to the sides ; 6, twist the trunk 
 to the left ; 6, face to the front ; 7, click the bells ; 8, position. 
 
 ^d. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING 
 AND CLICKING BELLS 
 
 1, twist to the right and click the bells 
 in front of the body as it then faces ; 2, re- 
 turn to the front, bells down to the sides ; 
 3, twist to the left and click the bells in 
 front; 4, position. 
 
 7. BREATHING 
 
 Inhale a deep breath through the nostrils 
 and exhale through the mouth. Repeat 
 three times. The breath should be much - 
 deeper than the normal. 
 
 The folding of the arms behind keeps the shoulders from an 
 exaggerated shrugging or lifting during the inhalation. 
 
96 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 LESSON III 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging bell forward to shoulder, right — One! 
 
 8—8—8. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step forward, 
 c. Combine! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Eaising bell sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 6. On toes ! — up — down. 8. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes. 
 
 c. Alternate ! — up — down — arms— down. 8. 
 
 d. Combine! 8. 
 
 a. Clicking bells vertically forward — One ! 8. 
 h. Trunk ! — twist — front — left — front. 8. 
 
 c. Alternate ! — twist — place — click — place. 16. 
 
 d. Combine ! 8. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 Note. — See Eeference Note 7. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells ^ Boys and Girls 
 
 97 
 
 Za. SWINGING BELL FORWAKD 
 TO SHOULDER 
 
 1, swing the bell forward and 
 upward the full length of the 
 arm as in the raising forward, 
 and when at shoulder level bend 
 the elbow and bring the hand 
 to the top of the shoulder, the 
 elbow remaining pointed for- 
 ward at shoulder level ; 2, swing 
 the arm forward and downward 
 to position at the side. Keep 
 the head and torso erect. Be 
 sure that the arm is stretched to 
 its full length in passing through 
 the forward position. Avoid 
 tipping the trunk backward by 
 keeping the hips well back. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND SWINGING 
 BELLS FORWARD TO SHOULDERS 
 
 1, point step forward with the right foot and swing both 
 bells forward to the top of the shoulders ; 2, heels together 
 and bells forward and downward to position. 
 
 9. BREATHING 
 
 While inhaling raise the arms sideways to shoulder level ; 
 while exhaling lower them to position. 
 
98 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 46. RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, rise on the toes as high as possible ; 2, heels down, quietly 
 and without jarring. The return to position should not be 
 made until the count for it is given, that the exercise may lose 
 nothing of its power to cultivate good balance a,nd erect car- 
 riage. Be sure that the weight is not allowed to sway back 
 over the heels when the latter are lowered. 
 
 4 c. ALTERNATE RAISING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, rise on the toes; 2, heels down; 3, raise the bells side- 
 ways ; 4, bells down. 
 
 
 4 d. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND RAISING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, rise on the toes and raise the bells sideways to shoulder 
 level; 2, heels and bells down to position. 
 
 I 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 99 
 
 LESSON IV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, right — One 
 8—8—8. 
 
 3. \ b. Foot !— side— place. 8—8. 
 Note. — Point step sideways. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 f a. Raising bell sideways, right — One! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 , ! b. On toes ! 8. 
 
 I c. Alternate ! — up — down — arms — down. 8. 
 [ d. Combine ! 8. 
 
 a. Clicking bells vertically forward — One ! 8. 
 
 b. Trunk ! — twist — front — left — front. 8. 
 
 c. Alternate ! — twist — place — click — place. 16. 
 
 d. Combine ! 8. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 L«rc. 
 
100 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 a. SWINGING BELL SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDER 
 
 1, swing the bell upward at 
 the side the full length of the 
 arm, turning the palm upward 
 as it moves ; when at shoulder 
 level, bend the elbow and bring 
 the hand to the top of the 
 shoulder, the elbow remaining 
 extended horizontally at the 
 side ; 2, swing the bell out again 
 to the side the full length of 
 the arm, and down to position, 
 turning the palm down and in 
 as it moves. 
 
 This is a very effective exer- 
 cise for the side of the chest, for 
 the top and back of the shoulder, 
 and for the arm itself. Keep the 
 head erect. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND SWINGING BELLS 
 SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS 
 
 1, point step to the side and swing both bells sideways to the 
 top of the shoulders ; 2, heels together, and bells outward and 
 downward to position. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 101 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 LESSON V 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, right — One ! 
 
 8—8—8. 
 h. Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine! 8 — 8. 
 a. Clicking bells over head — One ! 8. 
 h. On toes! 8. 
 
 Note. — Eising on toes, 
 c. Alternate! 8. 
 cL Combine ! 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 a. Alternate point step forward and trunk bending side- 
 ways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 h. With clicking! 8—8. 
 
 Position I 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 f 
 
 4 a. CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD 
 
 1, swing the bells upward at the sides with a full sweep of 
 the arms and click the thumb ends over the head ; 2, swing the 
 arms outward and downward again to position at the sides. 
 Keep the head erect. 
 
 This is an excellent exercise for the chest and shoulders, 
 if the arms are stretched to their full extent throughout the 
 movements. 
 
102 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 c. ALTERNATE RISING ON TOES AND CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD 
 
 1, rise on the toes ; 2, heels down ; 3, click the bells over the 
 head ; 4, bells down. 
 
 4rf. COMBINATION OF RISING ON 
 TOES AND CLICKING BELLS OVER 
 HEAD 
 
 1, rise on the toes and click the 
 bells over the head ; 2, bells and 
 heels down to position. 
 
 6 a. ALTERNATE POINT STEP FORWARD AND TRUNK BENDING 
 
 SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step forward with the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 
 3, point step forward with the left foot; 4, heels together; 
 
 5, bend the trunk from the waist directly to the right side ; 
 
 6, resume the erect position; 7, bend the trunk to the left 
 side ; 8, resume the erect position. 
 
 In bending the trunk keep both feet flat upon the floor and 
 the knees stiff. The head should remain in a straight line with 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 103 
 
 the axis of the trunk. The bending shoukl be to an obtuse 
 angle, and as far as can easily be done without strain. There 
 shoukl be no rotating of the trunk forward or backward of the 
 lateral line. The bending should be far enough to exert a 
 strong pressure upon the internal organs, and thus affect the 
 circulation and digestion. 
 
 5 ft. ALTERNATE POINT STEP FORWARD AND TRUNK BENDING 
 SIDEWAYS WITH CLICKING 
 
 Click the thumb ends of the bells at arm's length down in 
 front while taking the point step ; return the bells to the 
 hips as the heels come together. The bells remain on the hips 
 during the trunk bending. 
 
104 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 1. Stretching. ^ 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 a. Extending bells sideways, clicking forward and re- 
 turning, both — One ! 16. 
 h. Foot ! — side — forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step sideways, forward, and return. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Position ! 
 a. Clicking over head — One ! 8. 
 h. On toes ! 8. 
 
 c. Alternate ! 8. 
 
 d. Combine! 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 f a. Alternate point step forward and trunk bending side- 
 
 5. \ ways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 [h. With clicking ! 8—8. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 105 
 
 3 a. EXTENDING BELLS SIDEWAYS, CLICKING FORWARD, AND 
 
 RETURNING 
 
 1, extend the bells sideways at full arm's length, palms down 
 and bells horizontal ; 2, keeping the elbows straight, swing the 
 bells forward and click the thumb ends at shoulder level in 
 front ; 3, return again to the side position ; 4, bells on hips. 
 Keep the head erect. 
 
 This succession of movements is admirable for chest ex- 
 pansion. 
 
 Zh. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS, FORWARD, AND RETURN 
 
 1, point step to the side ; 2, move the same foot to the point 
 step forward ; 3, return the foot to the point step sideways ; 
 4, heels together. 
 
 This is an admirable balance exercise if the movement be 
 made a full circular sweep from the hip joint and the shoulders 
 are held squarely to the front — not allowed to swing to the 
 side as the foot moves. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP SIDEWAYS, FORWARD, AND RE- 
 TURNING WITH BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING FORWARD 
 
 1, point step, and both arms sideways ; 2, point step forward 
 and click the bells in front ; 3, foot and bells again to the side ; 
 4, heels together and bells on hips. 
 
106 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON VII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 a. Extending bells sideways, clicking forward and return- 
 ing, both — One ! 16. 
 
 b. Foot ! — side — forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Extending bells sideways, both — One ! 8. 
 h. Knee ! — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Lifting knee, 
 c. Alternate ! — knee — place — arms — place. 16. 
 ^ d. Combine ! 8. 
 r a. Alternate point step forward and trunk bending side- 
 
 5. \ ways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 [ b. With clicking ! 8—8. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells ■— Boys and Girls 107 
 
 4 h. LIFTING KNEE 
 
 1, lift the knee upward and for- 
 ward until the thigh is at right 
 angles with the trunk of the body, 
 and the lower leg is at right angles 
 with the thigh, the toe depressed 
 and pointed downward; 2, heels 
 together. Keep the trunk erect. 
 
 This exercise affects chiefly the 
 muscles of the thigh and abdomen. 
 It is an admirable balance move- 
 ment. 
 
 4 c. ALTERNATE LIFTING KNEE AND EXTENDING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, lift the right knee; 2, heels together; 3, extend both bells 
 sideways ; 4, bells on hips ; 5, lift the left knee ; 6, heels 
 together ; 7, extend both arms ; 8, bells on hips. 
 
 4d. COMBINATION OF LIFTING KNEE AND EXTENDING BELLS 
 
 SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, lift the knee and extend both bells to the side ; 2, heels 
 together and bells on hips. Alternate the knees in this combi- 
 nation. Keep the shoulders and head erect. 
 
108 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON VIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging bell forward to shoulder, extending forward 
 
 and returning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Stepping forward and rising on toes. 
 c. Combine! 8 — 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 a. Extending bells sideways, both — One ! 8. 
 h. Knee ! — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Alternate ! — knee — place — arms — place. 16. 
 
 d. Combine 18. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 a. Clicking bells forward and backward — One. 8. 
 h. Trunk !— twist— front. 8. 
 Note. — Trunk twisting, 
 c. Alternate ! — twist — front — click — click. 16. 
 , d. Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3«. SWINGING BELL FORWARD TO SHOULDER, EXTENDING 
 FORWARD AND RETURNING 
 
 1, swing the bell forward to the top of the shoulder ; 2, ex- 
 tend the bell at arm's length forward at shoulder level, bell 
 vertical; 3, return to the shoulder; 4, swing forward and 
 downward to position at the side. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 109 
 
 Zh. STEPPING FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, step forward, both feet flat upon the floor and with the 
 weight resting equally upon them ; 2, rise on the toes ; 3, heels 
 down ; 4, heels together. 
 
 Because of the elongated base this is a more difficult balance 
 movement than the rising on toes with the heels together. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 
 WITH BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND FORWARD 
 
 1, step forward and swing 
 both bells forward to the 
 top of the shoulders ; 2, rise 
 on the toes and extend the 
 
 bells forward; 3, heels down and 
 bells again on the shoulders; 4, 
 heels together and bells forward 
 and downward to position at the 
 sides. 
 
110 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 a. CLICKING BELLS FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
 
 1, click the thumb ends of the bells at arm's length down in 
 front; 2, swing the bells around the hips and click the same 
 ends at arm's length down behind; 3, 4, 5^ 6, 7, continue to 
 alternate the forward and backward clicking ; 8, arms to posi- 
 tion at the sides. Keep the head erect and the chest well 
 forward. 
 
 If the points of posture noted be carefully observed, this is 
 an excellent exercise for the chest and shoulder blades. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 111 
 
 6 c. TRUNK TWISTING ALTERNATED WITH CLICKING BELLS 
 FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right; 2, return to the front; 
 3j click the bells in front ; 4, click the bells behind ; 5, twist 
 the trunk to the left ; 6, return to the front ; 7, click the bells 
 in front ; 8, click the bells behind. 
 
 5 d. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING WITH CLICKING BELLS 
 FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
 
 1, twist to the right and click the bells in front of the body 
 as it then faces ; 2, face to the front and click the bells behind ; 
 3, twist to the left and click the bells in front ; 4, face to the 
 front and click the bells behind. 
 
112 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON IX 
 
 Stretching. 
 
 Facings. 
 
 Marching. 
 
 a. 
 
 h, 
 c. 
 a. 
 K 
 
 c. 
 a. 
 b, 
 c. 
 d. 
 
 Swinging bell forward to shoulder, extending forward 
 
 and returning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 Foot ! — forward — up — down — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 Swinging bells sideways and clicking, both — One ! 8. 
 
 On toes ! 8. 
 
 Note. — Eising on toes. 
 
 Combine ! 8. 
 
 Clicking bells forward and backward — One ! 8. 
 
 Trunk ! — twist — front. 8. 
 
 Alternate ! — twdst — front — click — click. 
 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 Forw^ard — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Running. 
 Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 16. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 113 
 
 4 a. SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING 
 
 1, raise the bells straight out at the sides at shoulder level, 
 bells horizontal; 2, swing the bells down in front and click 
 the thumb ends ; 3, swing them up again to the side position ; 
 4, 5, 6, 7, continue to alternate the two movements as above ; 
 8, bells down to position at the sides. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND SWINGING BELLS 
 SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING 
 
 1, raise the bells to the sides and rise on toes ; 2, heels down 
 and click the bells in front 
 
114 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON X ■ 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, extending sideways 
 
 and returning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. Foot ! — side — face — front— heels. 8 — 8- 
 
 Note. — Point step and facing sideways, 
 c. Combine! 8 — 8. 
 ( a. Swinging bells sideways and clicking, both — One ! 8. 
 h. On toes ! 8. 
 
 5. 
 
 . Combine ! 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 ' a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, both — One ! 8. 
 h. Trunk ! — bend — up — left — up. 8. 
 
 Note. — Trunk bending sideways, right and left 
 alternately. 
 
 c. Alternate ! — bend — up^arms— place. 16. 
 
 d. Combine ! 8. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3 a. SWINGING BELL SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDER, EXTENDING 
 SIDEWAYS AND RETURNING 
 
 1, swing the bell sideways to the top of the shoulder ; 2, ex- 
 tend the arm sideways, elbows straight, palm up, bell hori- 
 zontal ; 3, return to the shoulder ; 4, swing sideways and 
 downward to position at the side. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 
 
 115 
 
 Zh. POINT STEP AND FACING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step to the side ; 2, face to the side, the feet being 
 then in the position of point step forward; 3, return to the 
 front, the feet being then in the position of point step position 
 sideways ; 4, heels together. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND FACING SIDEWAYS WITH 
 SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step to the side and swing both bells sideways to 
 the top of the shoulders ; 2, face to the side and extend the 
 bells sideways at shoulder level ; 3, return to the front, bells 
 on the shoulders ; 4, heels together and swing the bells out- 
 ward to the sides and downward to position. 
 
116 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 c. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING 
 SIDEWAYS AND SWINGING 
 BELLS SIDEWAYS TO SHOUL- 
 DERS 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the right 
 side ; 2, resume the erect posi- 
 tion; 3, swing both bells side- 
 ways to the shoulders ; 4, ex- 
 tend the bells sideways and 
 return them to the hips ; 5, bend 
 the trunk to the left ; 6, erect 
 position; 7, swing the bells 
 sideways to the top of the 
 shoulders ; 8, return the bells 
 to the hips. 
 
 5 d. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND SWINGING 
 
 BELLS TO SHOULDERS 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the side and swing the bells to the top 
 of the shoulders ; 2, resume the erect position, extend the bells 
 sideways and return them to the hips. Alternate the bending 
 from right to left. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 117 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, extending side- 
 ways and returning right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. Foot ! — side — face — front — heels. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Swinging bells right and left alternately— One ! 8. 
 h. On toes !— right— left. 8. 
 
 Note. — Swinging upon toes. 
 c. Combine ! 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, both — One ! 8. 
 h. Trunk ! — bend — up — left — up. 8. 
 c. Alternate ! — bend — up — arms — place. 16. 
 , d. Combine ! 8. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4 a. SWINGING BELLS RIGHT AND LEFT ALTERNATELY 
 
 1, swing both bells to the right side, the right arm extended 
 at full length, palm to the front, the left arm bent across the 
 front of the body, palm facing inward, both bells vertical; 
 2, swing the arms down across the front of the body with a 
 full downward extension of the arms in the transition, and 
 raise them to the same position on the left side that they had 
 on the opposite side on the first count ; 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, continue to 
 swing the arms from side to side ; 8, bells down to position. 
 
 This is a very effective exercise for the top and back of the 
 shoulders. 
 
118 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4&. SWINGING UP ON TOES 
 
 1, take a short step to the right and rise on the toes ; 2, keep- 
 ing the feet in the same relative position, lower the heels, 
 transfer the weight mainly to the left foot and swing up on 
 the toes on that side ; 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 8, continue to swing from 
 one side to the other, rising on the toes in the terminal posi- 
 tions as above. Keep the shoulders squarely to the front. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF SWING- 
 ING UP ON TOES WITH BELLS 
 
 1, swing up on the toes 
 toward the right side and 
 swing both arms to the right ; 
 2, swing upon the toes toward 
 the left side and swing both 
 arms to the left ; 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 
 continue to alternate the di- 
 rection of the swinging as 
 above ; 8, heels together and 
 bells down to position at the 
 sides. 
 
 I ■__- 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Bovs and Girls 119 
 
 6. 
 
 3. \ 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Clicking bells forward and backward — One ! 16. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — raise— down — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step forward, and raising knee. 
 , c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 r a. Swinging bells right and left alternately — One ! 8 
 4. I h. On toes !— right— left. 8. 
 I c. Combine ! 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulder, both — One ! 
 h. Trunk ! — bend — up — left — up. 8. 
 
 c. Alternate ! — bend — up — arms — place. 16. 
 
 d. Combine ! 8. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Punning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
120 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 h. POINT STEP FORWAUD AND RAISING KNEE 
 
 1, point step forward ; 2, from this position raise the knee 
 as in previous lessons; 3, return to the point step; 4, heels 
 together. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND RAISING KNEE, WITH 
 CLICKING FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
 
 1, point step forward and click the bells in front; 2, raise 
 the knee and click the bells behind; 3, point step forward 
 again and click the bells in front ; 4, heels together and bells 
 to position at the sides. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 121 
 
 LESSON XIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Clicking bells forward and backward — One ! 16. 
 
 3. -j h. Foot ! — forward — raise — down — place. 8 — 8. 
 [c. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 a. Swinging bells right and left alternately — One ! 8. 
 
 4. \ b. On toes !— right— left. 8. 
 c. Combine ! 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 a. Alternate swinging bells sideways to shoulders and 
 
 clicking over head, both — One 1 16. 
 ». Trunk ! — bend — up — rise — down. 16. 
 
 Note. — Alternate trunk bending sideways and rising 
 on toes. 
 . Combine ! 16. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
122 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 a. ALTERNATE SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS AND 
 
 CLICKING OVER HEAD 
 
 1, swing the bells sideways to the top of the shoulders ; 
 2, return the bells to the hips ; 3, click the thumb ends of the 
 bells directly over the head ; 4, bells on hips. Keep the head 
 erect. 
 
 5 h. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the right side ; 2, resume the erect posi- 
 tion ; 3, rise on the toes ; 4, heels down ; 5, 6, 7, 8, repeat but 
 bend to the left side. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND RISING ON 
 TOES, WITH BELLS ON SHOULDERS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the right side and swing both bells to 
 the top of the shoulders ; 2, resume the erect position, bells 
 on hips ; 3, rise on the toes and click the bells over the head ; 
 4, heels down and bells on hips. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys ami Girls 123 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Bells on hips, sideways and return, right — One! 
 
 8—8—8. 
 
 3. <i b. Foot! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Stepping and bending forward. 
 
 , c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 r a. Clicking bells vertically forward — One I 8. 
 
 Note. — As in Lesson 11. 
 
 b. Foot ! — forward — place — left — place — walk, two, three 
 —heels. 16. 
 
 Note. — Alternate point step and walking. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 a. Alternate swinging bells sideways to shoulders and 
 clicking over head, both — One ! 16. 
 
 b. Trunk ! — bend — up — rise — down. 16. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March I (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. '' 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4. i 
 
 3 a. BELLS ON HIPS, SIDEWAYS AND RETURN 
 
 1^ both bells on the hips ; 2, extend the bells sideways to 
 full arm's length at shoulder level, turning the palms upward 
 as they move, bells horizontal ; 3, return the bells to the hips ; 
 4, bells down to position. 
 
124 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 6. STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD 
 
 1, step forward so that the weight is carried equally by both 
 feet ; 2, bend the forward knee, keeping the back knee straight 
 and both feet flat upon the floor; 3, straighten the forward 
 knee ; 4, heels together. The trunk should be held erect 
 throughout. There should be no scuffing. 
 
 The bending movement should be as far as is possible with 
 an erect carriage of the trunk, that the muscles of the calf and 
 thigh may be brought well into action. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD WITH 
 BELLS ON HIPS AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, step forward and x^lace both bells upon the hips ; 2, bend 
 the forward knee and extend the bells sideways, palms up; 
 
 3, straighten the knee and return the bells to the hips; 
 
 4, heels together, and bells down to position. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 125 
 
 4 6. ALTERNATE POINT STEP AND WALKING 
 
 1, point step forward with the right foot; 2, heels together; 
 3, point step forward with the left foot; 4, heels together; 
 5, 6, 7, walk forward three steps, starting with the right 
 foot ; 8, heels together. On the next eight counts repeat the 
 figure, but walk backward to place. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND WALKING WITH CLICKING 
 BELLS VERTICALLY FORWARD 
 
 1, point step forward with the right foot, and click the bells 
 vertically forward; 2, heels together, and bells on hips; 
 3, 4, the same with the left foot ; 5, 6, 7, 8, walk forward and 
 bring the heels together, the bells remaining on the hips. On 
 the next eight counts repeat the figure, but walk backward 
 instead of forward. When the bells are returned to the hips 
 the elbows should be well back, so as to expand the chest. 
 
126 School Gymnastics 
 
 5. 
 
 LESSON XV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facin.srs. 
 
 ^&' 
 
 Marchinsr 
 
 &• 
 
 4. \ 
 
 a. Bells on hips, sideways and return, right — One ! 
 8—8—8. 
 
 h. Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8- — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Plade ! 
 ' a. Clicking bells vertically forward — One ! 8. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — place — left — place — walk, two, three 
 — heels. 16. 
 t c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Position ! 
 r a. Alternate swinging bells to shoulders and sideways, 
 both— One ! 16. 
 
 b. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Alternate trunk bending and twisting. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 I 
 
 5 a. ALTERNATE SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, swing the bells sideways to the top of the shoulders ; 
 2, return the bells to the side ; 3, extend the bells to full 
 arm's length sideways at shoulder level, palms upward ; 
 4, return the bells to position at the sides. 
 
Third Series — Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 
 
 5 6. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING AND TWISTING 
 
 127 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the right side; 2, resume the erect 
 position; 3, twist the trunk to the same side; 4, return to 
 the front. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING AND TWISTING WITH 
 BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the side and swing both bells sideways 
 to the top of the shoulders ; 2, trunk erect and bells down to 
 position ; 3, twist the trunk to the same side and extend the 
 bells sideways, palms upward ; 4, return to the front, bells 
 down to position. 
 
128 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 8. 
 9. 
 
 4. \ 
 
 LESSON XVI 
 Stretching. 
 
 Facings. 
 
 Marching. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 a. Clicking over head, forward and returning — One ! 16. 
 
 h. Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Stepping and bending forward. 
 L c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 ' a. Clicking bells vertically forward — One ! 8. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — place — left — place — walk, two, three 
 
 —heels. 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Position ! 
 a. Alternate swinging bells to shoulders and sideways, 
 
 both— One ! 16. 
 h. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
 , c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Running. 
 Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys ami Girls 129 
 
 3 a. CLICKING OVER HEAD, FORWARD AND RETURNING 
 
 1, click the bells over head ; 2, click them at arm's length 
 forward at shoulder level ; 3, click again over head ; 4, bells 
 on hips. All of the clicking should be with the thumb ends 
 of the bells. Keep the head erect. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD WITH 
 CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD AND FORWARD 
 
 J^^^ 
 
 1, step forward and click the 
 bells over the head ; 2, bend the 
 knee and click the bells for- 
 ward; 3; straighten the knee 
 
 and click the bells again 
 over the head ; 4, heels 
 together and bells on the 
 hips. 
 
130 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XVII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 a. Clicking over head, forward and returning — One ! 16. 
 
 3. \ b. Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 [ a. Alternate clicking over head and rising on toes — 
 
 4. \ One! 16. 
 
 b. Combine! 16. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 a. Alternate swinging bells to shoulders and sideways, 
 both— One ! 16. 
 
 b. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
 ^ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 6. 
 
 4 a. ALTERNATE CLICKING OVER HEAD AND RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, click the bells over the head ; 2, bells down to position ; 
 3, rise on the toes ; 4, heels down. 
 
 4 b. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND CLICKING BELLS OVER 
 
 HEAD 
 
 1, rise on the toes ; 2, holding this position, click the bells 
 over the head ; 3, heels down ; 4, bells down. 
 
Third Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 131 
 
 LESSON XVIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 a. Clicking over head, forward and returning — One ! 16. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 r a. Alternate clicking over head and rising on toes — 
 
 4. \ One! 16. 
 
 I h. Combine ! 16. 
 
 r a. Facing and trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 
 
 5. 8—8. 
 
 [ h. With arms ! 8—8. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 5 a. FACING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, face to the right side, as in the tactics ; 2, bend the trunk 
 to the right side ; 3, resume the erect position ; 4, face to the 
 front. When facing to the left side bend to the left. 
 
 5 6. COMBINATION OF FACING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 WITH BELLS ON SHOULDERS 
 
 1, face to the side and raise the bells sideways to the top 
 of the shoulders; 2, bend to the side, the bells still on the 
 shoulders ; 3, trunk erect ; 4, face to the front, bells on hips. 
 
1. 
 
 132 School Gymnastics 
 
 Third Series 
 
 Dumb-bells, ^ pound 
 PEOGEAMME FOE SPECIAL EXEECISES 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 a. Extending bells sideways, clicking forward and re- 
 turning, both — One ! 16. 
 h. Foot !— side — forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson VI. 
 
 Position ! 
 a. Swinging bells right and left alternately — One ! 8. 
 h. On toes ! 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8. Lesson XL 
 
 a. Clicking bells vertically forward — ^One ! 8. 
 h. Trunk ! — twist — front — left — front. 8. 
 
 c. Alternate ! — twist — place — click — place. 16. 
 
 d. Combine! 8. Lesson 11. 
 
 a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders and clicking 
 over head alternately, both — One ! 16. 
 
 b. Trunk ! — bend — up — rise — down. 16. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16. Lesson XIII. 
 a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, extending side- 
 ways and returning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 h. Foot ! — side — face — front — heels. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson X. 
 
 a. Swinging bells sideways and clicking, both — One ! 8. 
 h. On toes! 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8. Lesson IX. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 Clicking over head, forward and returning — One ! 16. 
 
 Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Combine 1 8—8. Lesson XVI. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
Fourth Series 
 
 Fourth Year, Boys and Girls 
 
 Wands, 3^ feet 
 
 LESSON I 
 
 Note. — For details of preliminaries, stretching, tactics, etc., 
 see Explanatory Notes. 
 Class — Stand ! 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Left— Face! 
 Right— Face ! 
 
 Forward — March ! (Take wands and hold " at carry " while 
 marching to position on floor.) 
 
 Wand in position for work — One ! Two ! 
 a. Swinging wand forward — One ! 8. 
 h. Foot! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step forward, 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 4. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 Class— Halt! 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
 133 
 
134 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 WAND IN POSITION FOR 
 WORK 
 
 In response to the first 
 count of the executive com- 
 mand, raise the left arm, 
 with the elbow bent at 
 right angles across the fore- 
 head, palm outward, and 
 grasp the upper end of the 
 wand with the left hand. 
 In response to the second 
 count, bring the wand down 
 to a horizontal position at 
 arm's length in front, the 
 hands slightly more than 
 shoulder width apart. 
 
 WAND AT CARRY 
 
 Hold the wand vertically in 
 the right hand so that it rests 
 against the right shoulder, the 
 lower end held by the right 
 forefinger. 
 
Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 135 
 
 To return the wand to the carry position, command ^^ Wand 
 at cany — One ! Two ! '^ On the first count raise the left arm 
 as on the first count of " Position for work '^ ; on the second 
 count drop that arm to position at the side, leaving the wand 
 against the right shoulder. 
 
 4 a. SWINGING WAND FORWARD 
 
 1, swing the wand up at arm's length in front to shoulder 
 level ; 2, return the wand to position. Keep the head and 
 waist firmly erect. 
 
 4&. POINT STEP FORWARD 
 
 1, extend the right foot forward and touch the toe on a line 
 directly forward of the position from which it started; 2, heels 
 together. Keep the shoulders (upper part of body) perfectly 
 still and the knees stiff. Do not drag or scuff the foot over the 
 floor. The weight should remain entirely on the stationary 
 foot. The body should be firmly poised, that the exercise may 
 assist to erect carriage. 
 
136 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND SWINGING WAND FORWARD 
 
 1, point step and wand forward ; 2, heels together and wand 
 down. 
 
Fourth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 
 
 137 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 5. 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 8. 
 
 LESSON II 
 
 Stretching. 
 
 Facings. 
 
 Marching. 
 
 Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Point step sideways. 
 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 Raising wand to chest — One ! 8. 
 
 On toes ! 8. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes. 
 
 Alternate ! 8. 
 
 Combine ! 8. 
 Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Breathing — Begin ! 
 Three times. 
 
 a. 
 6. 
 
 c. 
 a. 
 b. 
 
 c. 
 d. 
 
 3 a. AIMING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, swing the wand 
 up to shoulder level at 
 the right side, the right 
 arm extended at full 
 length to the right, the 
 grasp of the right hand 
 loosened so as to allow 
 the wand to slip through 
 it and rest lightly in 
 the crotch of the thumb ; 
 the wand should be hor- 
 izontal, the left elbow 
 lifted so that it is above 
 the level of the wand ; 
 2, swing the wand down 
 
138 School Gymnastics 
 
 again to position, the right hand resuming its grasp. The 
 extended arm should pull strongly upon the chest. 
 
 3 6. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, touch the side of the toe directly to the side, stretching 
 the instep as straight as possible ; 2, heels together. As in 
 the point step forward, the weight should be held firmly 
 on the stationary foot to cultivate firm, erect carriage. Keep 
 the shoulders squarely to the front and the knees stiff. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND AIMING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, aim to the right and take the point step to the right simul- 
 taneously ; 2, heels together and wand down to position. 
 
 4 a. RAISING WAND TO CHEST 
 
 1, bend the elbows and lift the forearms upward until the 
 wand rests horizontally across the chest ; the upper arms should 
 be drawn backward close to the sides, so as to flatten the 
 shoulder blades and throw the chest forward ; 2, lower the 
 wand again to position. 
 
 4 6. RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, rise on the toes as high as possible ; 2, heels down, quietly 
 and without jarring. Keep the weight poised on the forward 
 part of the feet after the heels are lowered, avoiding any sway- 
 ing backward of the body. 
 
Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 139 
 
 4 e. ALTERNATE RISING ON TOES AND RAISING WAND TO CHEST. 
 
 1, rise on the toes ; 2, heels down ; o, raise the wand to 
 chest ; 4, wand down. 
 
 4 d. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND RAISING WAND 
 
 TO CHEST 
 
 1, rise on the toes and raise the wand to the chest ; 2, heels 
 and wand down. 
 
 8. BREATHING 
 
 Eaise the arms sideways to shoulder level and inhale a deep 
 breath ; lower the arms to position while exhaling. The arm 
 action by raising the ribs expands the chest. 
 
3. 
 
 4. 
 
 140 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON III 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging wand over head — One ! 8. 
 h. Foot! — back — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step backward. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 a. Raising wand to chest — One ! 8. 
 h. On toes! 8. 
 
 c. Alternate ! 8. ' 
 
 d. Combine ! 8. 
 a. Raising wand vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 
 
 8—8—8. 
 h. Trunk! — side — up — left — up. 16. 
 
 Note. — Trunk bending sideways, 
 c. Alternate! 16. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 Note. — See Reference Note 7. 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3 a. SWINGING WAND OVER HEAD 
 
 1, swing the wand up through the forward position until the 
 arms are vertical over the head, the wand horizontal ; 2, wand 
 down again to position. The elbows should be straight through- 
 out. Keep the head perfectly erect. There should be no 
 bending backward at the waist. 
 
 . If taken with care as to the postural points noted, this exer- 
 cise is admirable for the chest and back, and particularly for 
 the shoulder blades. 
 
Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 
 
 3 h. POINT STEP BACKWARD 
 
 141 
 
 1, extend the foot backward and touch the inner side of the 
 toe on a line directly back of the position from which it started, 
 the heel dropped inward ; 2, heels together. There should be 
 no forward yielding of the upper part of the body. The ex- 
 tended leg should be perfectly straight, and the movement 
 should pull strongly from the lower back. 
 
 3 e. COMBINATION OF POINT 
 STEP BACKWARD AND 
 SWINGING WAND OVER 
 HEAD 
 
 1, extend the foot back- 
 ward and the wand upward ; 
 2, heels together and wand 
 down. Be sure to keep the 
 head upright. 
 
 This combination is one 
 of the strongest for the pos- 
 tural correction of the back 
 and chest. 
 
142 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 a. RAISING WAND VERTICALLY 
 FORWARD 
 
 1, raise the wand to a vertical posi- 
 tion at arm's length in front ; 2, return 
 to position. The right arm should be 
 uppermost for eight counts, the left 
 for eight, and alternate eight. 
 
 5 h. TRUNK BENDING SIDE- 
 WAYS 
 
 1, bend the trunk from the 
 waist directly to the side ; 
 2, return to the erect posi- 
 tion. Keep both feet flat 
 upon the floor and the knees 
 stiff. The head should re- 
 main in a straight line with 
 the axis of the trunk. The 
 bending should be as far as 
 can easily be done without 
 strain, that it may effect a 
 pronounced pressure upon 
 
 'sP5 
 
Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 143 
 
 the internal organs, and so stimulate their healthful action 
 and the general circulation. There should be no rotating of 
 the trunk forward or backward of the lateral line. Alternate 
 the directions. 
 
 5 c. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND RAISING 
 WAND VERTICALLY FORWARD 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the right side; 2, resume the erect 
 position ; 3, raise the wand vertically forward with the right 
 arm upperm.ost ; 4, wand down to position ; 5, 6, 7, 8, repeat to 
 the left side. 
 
 Be particularly careful after this lesson, and all others that 
 call for forward movements of the arms, to take the final 
 stretching which counteracts any tendency to chest contraction. 
 
144 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 
 10. 
 
 LESSON IV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging wand over head — One ! 8. 
 
 h. Foot!— back — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Twisting wand, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 h. On toes! 8. 
 
 Note. — Eising on toes, 
 c. Combine ! 8. 
 
 a. Raising wand vertically forward, right arm up- 
 One ! 8—8—8. 
 h. Trunk ! — side — up — left — up. 16. 
 ^ c. Alternate ! 16. 
 Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 Forward — March ! (Return wand to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Running. 
 
 Four times. 
 
 Breathing- 
 
 -Begin ! 
 
Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 
 
 145 
 
 4 a. TWISTING WAND 
 
 1, raise the wand horizontally across the chest, the forearms 
 bent at right angles so as to twist the right end of the wand 
 over to the left side, and vice versa; 2, wand down to position. 
 On the first count the right arm should be uppermost ; on the 
 second count, the left arm. Keep the chest high and the head 
 well up. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND TWISTING WAND 
 
 1, rise on the toes and twist the wand, right arm uppermost ; 
 2, heels and wand down. Alternate the arms. 
 
3. 
 
 5. 
 
 146 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON V 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Aiming upward^ right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. Foot ! — oblique — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step obliquely forward. 
 ^ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 f a. Twisting wand right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 4. ] 6. On toes ! 8. 
 I c. Combine ! 8. 
 a. Eaising wand vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 
 
 8—8—8. 
 h. Trunk ! — side — ^up — left — up. 16. 
 ^ c. Alternate ! 16. 
 
 6. Wand at carry !— One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3 a. AIMING UPWARD 
 
 1, raise the wand vertically upward from the right shoulder, 
 the right arm extended upward at full length, pulling well 
 upon the chest, the grasp of the right hand loosened and the 
 wand pushed through and held in the same way as in aim- 
 ing to the side; the left hand should hold the lower end of 
 the wand close to the front of the right shoulder, the left 
 elbow being raised forward at shoulder level ; 2, wand down 
 to position. 
 
Fourth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 
 
 147 
 
 3 b. POINT STEP OBLIQUELY FORWARD 
 
 1, extend the foot diagonally forward in the direction in 
 which the toe points when the heels are together; 2, heels 
 together. The weight should remain entirely on the stationary 
 foot, that the exercise may have its full effect as a balance 
 movement. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
 OBLIQUELY FORWARD AND AIMING 
 UPWARD 
 
 1, extend the right foot diagonally 
 forward and raise the wand vertically 
 from the right shoulder ; 2, foot and 
 wand to position. 
 
148 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 ( a. Aiming upward, right— One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 3. \ b. Foot !— oblique — place. 8—8. 
 i c. Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 r a. Twisting wand right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 4. i b. On toes ! 8. 
 
 I c. Combine ! 8. 
 
 a. Swinging wand forward — One ! 8. 
 
 b. Trunk ! — bend — up. 8. 
 
 5. i Note. — Trunk bending sideways, alternately. 
 
 c. Alternate ! 16. 
 
 d. Combine ! 16. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Fourth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 149 
 
 5 c. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND SWINGING 
 
 WAND FORWARD 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the side ; 2, trunk erect ; 3, swing the 
 wand forward to shoulder level ; 4, wand down. Alternate 
 the direction of the bending. 
 
 5 il. COMBINATION OF TRUNK 
 BENDING SIDEWAYS AND 
 SWINGING WAND FORWARD 
 
 1, swing the wand forward 
 and bend the trunk to the side ; 
 2, trunk erect and wand down. 
 Alternate the direction of the 
 bending. 
 
150 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 7. 
 8. 
 9. 
 10. 
 
 LESSON VII 
 
 Stretching. 
 Facings. 
 Marching. 
 a. Aiming sideways, upward and return, right — One 
 
 8—8. 
 h. Foot ! — side — oblique— side — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Point step sideways, obliquely forward, 
 and return, 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 f a. Twisting wand, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. On toes! 8. 
 c. Combine ! 8. 
 
 a. Swinging wand forward — One ! 8. 
 h. Trunk ! — bend — up. 8. 
 c. Alternate ! 16. 
 , d. Combine ! 8. 
 Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Eunning. 
 Breathing— Begin ! Four times. 
 
Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 151 
 
 3 a. AIMING SIDEWAYS, UPWARD, AND RETURN 
 
 1, aim to the right side ; 2, raise the wand vertically from 
 the right shoulder ; 3, aim again to the side ; 4, wand down to 
 position. 
 
 This is an excellent exercise for the chest if the extended 
 arm pulls strongly upon it. 
 
 3&. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS, OBLIQUELY FORWARD, AND RETURN 
 
 1, point step to the side; 2, move the foot to the oblique 
 point step ; 3, point step position sideways ; 4^ heels together. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP SIDEWAYS AND OBLIQUELY 
 FORWARD WITH AIMING SIDEWAYS AND UPWARD 
 
 1, point step sideways and aiming to the same side ; 2, point 
 step obliquely forward and aiming upward ; 3, foot and wand 
 again to the side ; 4, heels together and wand down. 
 
152 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 b. 
 c. 
 
 fa- 
 4. \ h. 
 
 I 
 
 u. 
 
 a, 
 b, 
 c. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 
 10. 
 
 LESSON VIII 
 Stretching. 
 Facings. 
 Marching. 
 ' a. Aiming sideways, upward and return, right — One ! 
 
 8—8. 
 
 Foot ! — side — oblique — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 Aiming downward, right — One! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 Facing ! 8—8. 
 
 Combine! 8. 
 
 Swinging wand forward — One ! 8. 
 
 Trunk ! — bend — up. 8. 
 
 Alternate ! 16. 
 
 Combine ! 8. 
 Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Eunning. 
 Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 
 
 153 
 
 4 a. AIMING DOWNWARD 
 
 1, hold the wand vertically 
 downward from the right shoul- 
 der, the right arm extended 
 downward at full length, the 
 left hand grasping the upper 
 end of the wand at the right 
 shoulder, palm outward, the left 
 elbow extended horizontally for- 
 ward; 2, wand down to position. 
 
 4 6. FACING 
 
 1, face to the side as in the tactics, but in one count ; 2, return 
 to the front. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF FACING AND AIMING DOWNWARD 
 
 1, face to the right side and aim downward from the right 
 shoulder ; 2, face to the front, wand in position. Alternate the 
 direction of the facing. 
 
154 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON IX 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Aiming upward, forward, and return, right — One! 
 8—8. 
 
 b. Foot ! — back — forward — back — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Point step backward, forward, and re- 
 turn. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8—8. 
 f a. Aiming downward, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 J h. Facing! 8—8. 
 L c. Combine ! 8. 
 ' a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 h. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
 
 KoTE. — Trunk twisting. 
 c. Alternate ! 8 — 8, 
 (L Combine! 8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 5. 
 
Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 
 
 155 
 
 3 a. AIMING UPWARD, FORWARD, AND RETURN 
 
 1, raise the wand to the vertical position with the right arm 
 upward; 2, aim upward from the right shoulder, the right 
 arm extended forward at full length, the left hand grasping 
 the end of the wand on the front of the right shoulder; 3, 
 return to the upward aiming ; 4, wand down to position. Keep 
 the head well up. 
 
 3 6. POINT STEP BACKWARD, FORWARD, AND RETURN 
 
 1, point step backward ; 2, point step forward with the same 
 foot ; 3, point step backward again ; 4, heels together. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
 BACKWARD AND FORWARD 
 WITH AIMING UPWARD AND 
 FORWARD 
 
 1, point step backward with 
 the right foot and aiming up- 
 ward from the right shoulder ; 
 2, point step forward and aim- 
 ing upward ; 3, point step back- 
 ward and aiming upward again ; 
 4, heels together and wand 
 down. / 
 
 This combination is one of 
 the finest for the back and 
 chest. 
 
 Note. — See cut on next page. 
 
156 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 6 h. TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, twist or rotate the trunk to the side ; 2, return to the for- 
 ward position. The movement should be from the ankles, the 
 feet remaining firmly in place and flat upon the floor. The 
 head should turn with the trunk, but no farther. There should 
 be no bending of the trunk sideways. The twisting should be 
 far enough to create a strong pressure upon the internal organs 
 and stimulate circulation in them. 
 
 ALTERNATE AIMING AND TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right side ; 2, return to the front ; 
 3, aim to the right ; 4, wand down in position. 
 
Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 
 
 157 
 
 5 d. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING WITH AIMING 
 
 1, twist and aim to the right ; 2, face to the front, wand 
 down. 
 
158 School Gymnastics 
 
 5. 
 
 LESSON X 
 
 1, Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Aiming upward, forward, and return, right — One ! 
 
 8—8. 
 6. Foot ! — back — forward — back — place. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 a. Alternate aiming obliquely downward and swinging 
 
 wand over head, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 h. Foot ! — oblique — place — up— down. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Alternate point step obliquely forward 
 
 and rising on toes. 
 
 c. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 a. Aiming sideways, right — One! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
 0. Alternate! 8—8. 
 
 d. Combine ! 8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two . 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Fourth Series, JVands — Boys and Girls 
 
 159 
 
 
 4 a. ALTERNATE AIMING OB- 
 LIQUELY DOWNWARD AND 
 SWINGING WAND OVER HEAD 
 
 1, aim obliquely downward 
 from the right shoulder, the 
 position of the wand being mid- 
 way between the shoulder level 
 and the downward aiming posi- 
 tion and midway between the 
 forward and the side direction, 
 the left hand grasping the up- 
 per end of the wand at the 
 right shoulder with the palm 
 outward, the left elbow hori- 
 zontally forward ; 2, wand down 
 to position ; 3, swing the wand 
 to the horizontal position over 
 the head; 4, wand down to 
 position. 
 
 4 b. ALTERNATE POINT STEP OBLIQUELY FORWARD AND RISING 
 
 ON TOES 
 
 1, point step obliquely forward ; 2, heels together ; 3, rise on 
 the toes ; 4, heels down. 
 
 4 c. A COMBINATION OF OBLIQUE POINT STEP AND RISING ON 
 TOES WITH AIMING DOWNWARD AND SWINGING WAND OVER 
 HEAD 
 
 1, point step obliquely forward with the right foot and aim- 
 ing obliquely downward from the right shoulder ; 2, heels and 
 wand to position ; 3, rise on the toes and swing the wand over 
 the head ; 4, wand and heels down. 
 
160 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 6. 
 
 i . 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 
 10. 
 
 Stretching. 
 
 Facings. 
 
 Marching. 
 
 a. 
 
 (a. 
 I 
 
 4. ] 
 
 i 
 
 Swinging and aiming wand forward, right — One! 
 
 8—8^8. 
 
 Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Stepping and bending forward. 
 Combine ! 8^8. 
 
 Alternate aiming obliquely downward and swinging 
 wand over head, ri.o-ht — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 b. Foot ! — oblique — place — up — down. 8 — 8. 
 
 I c. Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 b. Trunk !— twist— front. 8—8. 
 
 c. Alternate ! 8 — 8. 
 ^ d. Combine ! 8. 
 
 Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 Stretching. 
 
 Running. 
 
 Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Fourth Series, JVands — Boys and Girls 
 
 IGl 
 
 3 a. SWINGING AND AIMING WAND FORWARD 
 
 1, swing the wand horizontally forward at shoulder level; 
 2, aim forward from the right shoulder ; 3, return the wand to 
 the forward position ; 4, wand down. 
 
 3 b. STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD 
 
 1, step forward so that the weight is carried equally by both 
 feet ; 2, bend the forward knee, keeping the back knee straight 
 and both feet flat upon the floor; 3, straighten the forward 
 knee ; 4, heels together. The trunk should be held erect 
 throughout. There should be no scuffing. The step should be 
 long enough to admit of a pronounced bend in the knee, that 
 the thigh and calf muscles may be brought into strong action. 
 
 [See page 162.] 
 
162 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 pmiwnwws-^^^^ 
 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD WITH 
 SWINGING AND AIMING WAND FORWARD 
 
 1, step forward with the right foot and swing the wand 
 horizontally forward ; 2, bend the knee and aim forward from 
 the right shoulder ; 3, straighten the knee and return the wand 
 to the position in 1 ; 4, heels together and wand down. 
 
Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 163 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging and aiming wand forward, right — One ! 
 8—8—8. 
 I h. Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 tc. Combine! 8 — 8. 
 a. Alternate aiming obliquely downward and swinging 
 
 wand over head, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 h. Foot ! — oblique — place — up — down. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 a. Alternate raising wand to chest and over head — 
 
 One! 16. 
 h. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Alternate trunk bending sideways and 
 twisting. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 5. { 
 
 5 a. ALTERNATE RAISING WAND TO CHEST AND OVER HEAD 
 
 1, raise the wand to the chest ; 2, wand down ; 3, swing the 
 wand over the head ; 4, wand down. 
 
 5 6. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND TWISTING 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the right side ; 2, resume the erect 
 position ; 3, twist the trunk to the side ; 4, return to the front. 
 
164 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3, twist the trunk to the side and 
 raise the wand over head; 4, re- 
 turn to the front, wand down. 
 
 This is an excellent exercise 
 for the circulation and digestion. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF 
 TRUNK BENDING 
 SIDEWAYS AND 
 TWISTING WITH 
 
 WAND TO CHEST 
 AND OVER HEAD 
 
 1, bend the trunk 
 to the side and raise 
 the wand to the 
 chest ; 2, trunk erect 
 and wand down ; 
 
Fourth Series, ]Vaiids — Boys and Girls 165 
 
 LESSON XIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Twisting wand, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 XoTE. — As in Lesson IV. 
 h. Foot I — charge — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Charging forward. 
 \ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 a. Aiming sideways, right, left, and return — One! 
 8—8—8. 
 
 4. \ b. Swaying ! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
 jSTote. — Swaying, 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 ( a. Alternate raising wand to chest and over head — One ! 
 ^ I 16. 
 
 1 b. Trnnk! — bend — np — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
 [ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Wand to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3 6. CHARGING FORWARD 
 
 1, step forward and bend the front knee as in the second 
 count of the stepping and bending ; 2, heels together. Keep 
 the trunk of the body erect. The step should be long enough 
 to admit of an effective bend in the knee, that the thigh 
 muscles may be brought into action sufficiently to stimulate 
 the circulation. 
 
166 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF 
 CHAKGING FORWARD 
 AND TWISTING WAND 
 
 Ij charge forward and 
 twist the wand; 2, heels 
 together and wand down 
 to position. 
 
 4«. AIMING SIDEWAYS, 
 
 RIGHT, LEFT, AND RE- 
 TURN 
 
 1, aim to the right 
 side; 2, swing the arms 
 across the chest and aim 
 to the left side; 3, aim 
 again to the right; 4, 
 wand down. 
 
 4 6. SWAYING 
 
 1, take a short step to the right, throwing all of the weight 
 upon the right foot ; 2, rise on the toes and transfer the weight 
 to the left foot, putting the left heel down and keeping the right 
 heel up ; 3, rise on the toes again and transfer the weight back 
 to the right foot, the right heel down and the left foot touching 
 by the toe only ; 4, heels together. The swaying thus consists 
 of a transference of the weight from one foot to the other, ris- 
 ing on the toes in the transition. Keep the shoulders squarely 
 to the front. This is an admirable balance exercise. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF SWAYING AND AIMING 
 
 1, sway to the right and aim to the right ; 2, sway to the 
 left and aim to the left ; 3, sway and aim again to the right ; 
 4, heels together and wand down. 
 
Fourth Series, JVands — Boys and Girls 167 
 
 5. 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Twisting wand, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 3. -j b. Foot !— charge — place. 8—8. 
 Ic. Combine! S—8. 
 ' a. Aiming sideways, right, left, and return — One ! 
 
 8—8—8. 
 b. Swaying ! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
 . c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 { a. Aiming obliquely downward to the side, right — One I 
 8—8. 
 b. Foot ! — side — place — bend — up. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Alternate point step and trunk bending 
 sideways. 
 I c. Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
168 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 a. AIMING OBLIQUELY DOWNWARD TO THE SIDE 
 
 1, aim obliquely downward to the right side, the right arm 
 extended at full length, the upper end of the wand grasped by 
 the left hand, the left elbow horizontally forward; 2, wand 
 down to position. Look in the direction of the aiming. 
 
 This exercise is admirable for chest expansion as well as for 
 its effect upon the digestive organs and circulation. 
 
 5 h. ALTERNATE POINT STEP AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step to the right side; 2, heels together; 3, bend 
 the trunk to the right side ; 4, trunk erect. 
 
 6 c. COMBINATION OF AIMING 
 WITH POINT STEP AND 
 TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step to the right 
 side and aim obliquely down- 
 ward to the right side ; 2, 
 heels together and wand 
 down to position; 3, bend 
 the trunk to the right side 
 and aim obliquely downward 
 to the right ; 4, trunk erect 
 and wand down to position. 
 
Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 169 
 
 LESSON XV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Alternate twisting wand and swinging over head, 
 right arm up — One I 8 — S. 
 h. Foot I — charge — place — back — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Alternate charging forward and point step 
 backward, 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 { a. Aiming sideways, right, left, and return — One ! 
 ! 8—8—8. 
 
 I h. Swaying! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
 ic Combine! 8—8. 
 { a. Aiming obliquely downward to the side, right — One ! 
 
 5 I ^-^- 
 
 j h. Foot ! — side — place — bend — up. 8 — 8. 
 
 lo. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin 1 Four times. 
 
 4. 
 
170 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 a. ALTERNATE TWISTING WAND AND SWINGING OVER HEAD 
 
 1, twist the waud across the chest in front, the right arm 
 uppermost; 2, wand down to position; 3, swing the wand 
 horizontally over the head ; 4, wand down. 
 
 3 6. ALTERNATE CHARGING FORWARD AND POINT STEP 
 
 BACKWARD 
 
 1, charge forward ; 2, heels together ; 3, point step backward 
 with the same foot ; 4, heels together. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND POINT STEP BACK- 
 WARD WITH TWISTING WAND AND SWINGING OVER HEAD 
 
 1, charge forward with the right foot and twist the wand, 
 the right arm uppermost ; 2, heels together and wand down ; 
 
 3, point step backward and swing the wand over the head; 
 
 4, heels together and wand down. 
 
Fourth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 
 
 111 
 
 3. < 
 
 4. 
 
 LESSON XVI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 (a. Alternate twisting wand and swinging over head, 
 right arm up — One ! 8 — 8. 
 h. Foot ! — charge — place — back — place. 8 — 8. 
 t c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 a. Wand twisting, reverse and return, right — One! 
 
 8—8. 
 h. Swaying ! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 a. Swinging wand back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
 h. Trunk !— Bend— up. 8—8. 
 
 Note. — Trunk bending sideways, 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 6. 
 
 4 a. WAND TWISTING, REVERSE AND RETURN 
 
 1, twist the wand across the chest, right arm uppermost; 
 2, reverse the twisting to bring the left arm uppermost ; 3, re- 
 turn to the first position (right arm up) ; 4, wand down to 
 position in front. 
 
172 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF SWAYING AND WAND TWISTING 
 
 1, sway to the right and twist the wand in front of the chest, 
 the right arm uppermost ; 2, sway to the left and reverse the 
 twisting, to bring the left arm up ; 3, sway and twist again to 
 the right ; 4, lieels together and wand down. 
 
 ba. SWINGING WAND BACK OF SHOULDEKS 
 
 1, swing the wand over the head, bend the elbows and lower 
 the wand back of and against the shoulders ; 2, return the wand 
 to position. The elbows should be perfectly straight as they 
 are raised through the forward to the upward position and in 
 returning. Keep the head erect throughout. 
 
 If the points of pos- 
 ture noted be carefully 
 observed, this is one of 
 the finest exercises for 
 <^ "x N the chest and back, in- 
 
 cluding the shoulder 
 blades, and for the car- 
 riage of the head. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF WAND 
 BACK OF SHOULDERS AND 
 TRUNK BENDING SIDE- 
 WAYS 
 
 1, wand back of shoul- 
 ders ; 2, bend the trunk 
 to the side ; 3, trunk 
 erect ; 4, wand down to 
 position. Alternate the 
 direction of the bending. 
 
Fourth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 173 
 
 LESSOR XVII 
 
 i. Stretching. 
 L*. Facings. 
 Marchin.cc. 
 
 ( 
 
 4. 
 
 a. Swinging wand over head, aiming sideways, and re- 
 j turning— One ! 8 — 8. 
 o J b. Foot I — charge— place — twist — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Alternate charging forward and trunk 
 twisting. 
 I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. AVand twisting, reverse, and return^ right — One ! 
 8—8. 
 
 b. Swaying ! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
 I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 r a. Swinging wand back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
 
 5. \ b. Trunk !— bend— up. 8—8. 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
174 School Gymnastics 
 
 Za. SWINGING WAND OVER HEAD, AIMING SIDEWAYS AND 
 
 RETURNING 
 
 1, swing the wand over the head ; 2, aim to the right side ; 
 3, wand again over the head ; 4, wand down to position. Pull 
 well npon the chest with these movements. 
 
 3 6 ALTERNATE CHARGING FORWARD AND TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, charge forward with the right foot ; 2, holding the charge 
 position, twist the trunk to the left ; 3, twist the trunk to the 
 front ; 4, heels together. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND TRUNK TWIST- 
 ING WITH WAND OVER HEAD AND AIMING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, charge forward and swing the wand over the head ; 2, hold 
 the charge position, twist the trunk to the left side and aim 
 backward ; 3, twist the trunk to the front, wand again over the 
 head ; 4, heels together and wand down. The charging posi- 
 tion is held from one to four. 
 
Fourth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 175 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON XVIII 
 
 1. Stretcliing. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 ' a. Swinging wand over head, aiming sideways and 
 returning — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 b. Foot ! — charge — place — twist — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 ( a. Wand twisting, reverse and return, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 4. \ b. Swaying ! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
 [c. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 a. Swinging wand back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
 
 b. Trunk ! — forward — up. 8. 
 Note. — Trunk bending forward. 
 
 [ c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 6. Wand at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return wands to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 5. \ 
 
176 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 bh. TRUNK BENDING FORWARD 
 
 1, bend the trunk directly forward ; 2, resume the erect 
 position. The bending should be from the hips, not from the 
 waist, the back remaining straight and the head in a line mth 
 it, not relaxed or drooping. To insure this straight line of 
 back and head, the bending should be slight in the first few^ 
 lessons, and increased later. Keep the knees stiff. 
 
 This exercise works strongly upon the back muscles which 
 hold the trunk erect. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK 
 BENDING FORWARD AND 
 SWINGING WAND BACK OF 
 SHOULDERS 
 
 1, swing the wand back of 
 the shoulders ; 2, bend the 
 trunk forward ; 3, trunk erect ; 
 4, Avand down to position. 
 
Fourth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 111 
 
 Fourth Series 
 
 Wands, 3^ feet 
 
 PKOGKAMME FOE SPECIAL EXERCISES 
 
 r a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 1. \ h. Foot! — side — X3lace. 8 — 8. 
 
 I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson 11. 
 
 f a. Alternate raising wand to chest and over head — One ! 
 
 2 J ^^- 
 
 j h. Trunk ! — bend — up — twist — front. 8 — 8. 
 
 [ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson XII. 
 
 r a. Aiming downward, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 8. i h. Facing ! 8—8. 
 
 Ic. Combine! 8—8. Lesson VIII. 
 
 ' a. Swinging and aiming wand forward, right — One ! 
 
 8—8—8. 
 
 h. Foot ! — forward — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson XL 
 
 { a. Twisting wand and swinging over head alternately, 
 
 right arm up — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 b. Foot ! — charge — place — back — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson XV. 
 
 ' a. Aiming sideways, right, left, and return — One ! 
 
 8_8— 8. 
 
 b. Swaying ! — right — left — right — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 , c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson XIII. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
178 School Gymnastics 
 
 7. 
 
 ' a. Aiming obliquely downward to the side, right — One ! 
 8 — 8. 
 
 h. Foot ! — side — place — bend — up. 8 — 8. 
 
 . c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson XIV. 
 
 f a. Swinging wand over head, aiming sideways and return- 
 
 ! ing— One! 8—8. 
 
 I h. Foot! — charge — place — twist — place. 
 
 ( c. Combine ! 8 — 8. Lesson XYII. 
 
Fifth Series 
 
 Fifth year, Boys and Girls 
 Indian Clubs, f pound 
 
 LESSON I 
 
 Note. — For details of preliminaries, stretching, tactics, 
 effects of exercises, floor formation, etc., see Explanatory 
 Notes. 
 
 Class — Stand ! 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Note. — Secure the clubs 
 while passing to place. 
 Carry them with the lobes 
 resting upon the shoulders 
 while marching to posi- 
 tion on the floor. See illus- 
 tration. 
 Clubs in position for work — 
 Place ! 
 
 3. Full circle sideways, right out- 
 ward—Start ! Eight 8, left 8, 
 both right 8, both left 8. 
 
 Clubs on shoulders — Place ! 
 
 4. Forward — March! 
 
 (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 6. Breathing — Begin ! 
 
 Position ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
 179 
 
180 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 CLUBS IN POSITION FOR WORK 
 
 Grasp the handle of the club 
 around the ball^ bend the forearm 
 forward so that it forms a slightly 
 acute angle with the upper arm, and 
 hold the club upright. This is the 
 '^rest position'' of the clubs in the 
 following exercise. 
 
 3. FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, from the rest position straighten 
 the arm upward and swing the club 
 outward and downward at full length 
 to the side, across the front of the 
 body, and up on the other side, de- 
 scribing a circle; 2, lower the club 
 to the rest position. Keep the shoul- 
 ders squarely to the front; avoid 
 any swaying of the body. The head should be held firmly 
 erect. 
 
 The full-arm circle works upon the front and side of the 
 chest, upon the top of the shoulder, the back, and the shoulder 
 blades. The erect carriage of head and chest is a crucial feature 
 in cdl of the club sivingijig, and shoidd he strenuoicsly insisted 
 upon. There should be no jerking in the movement. See 
 illustration in Lesson II. 
 
 6. BREATHING 
 
 Eaise the arms sideways to shoulder level and inhale a deep 
 breath, much fuller than the normal; lower the arms and 
 exhale. Eepeat four times. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 181 
 
 LESSON II 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 f a. Full circle sideways, right outward — Start ! Right 
 outward 8, left outward 8, both right 8, both left 8, 
 both inward 8, both outward 8. 
 
 3. \ h. Foot! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Point step sideways. 
 
 c. Alternate! 8—8. 
 i d. Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 4. Forward — March ! (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 Note. — It will be understood hereafter that the 
 clubs are placed on the shoulders at the command to 
 march. 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 Arms folded behind — Place ! 
 
 6. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 7. Forward— March ! (To seats.) 
 
182 School Gymnastics 
 
 Za. BOTH INWARD, BOTH OUTWARD. (FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS.) 
 
 Both inward. Start both arms inward across the front of the 
 body toward the opposite side, the right arm toward the left, 
 the left arm toward the right. 
 
 Both outward. Start both arms simultaneously outward in 
 opposition, the right club toward the right and the left club 
 toward the left. 
 
 This is one of the finest exercises for the chest. 
 
 3 h. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, touch the side of the toe directly to the side, stretching 
 the instep and knee as straight as possible; 2, heels together. 
 The weight should remain firmly on the stationary foot, that 
 the exercise may serve as a balance movement, cultivating erect 
 poise. The shoulders should remain squarely to the front. 
 Keep the knees stiff. The foot should be lifted and touched 
 lightly, without scuffing. 
 
 Best the clubs upon the shoulders while taking the point step. 
 Unless otherwise specified this position of the clubs will be 
 understood in succeeding series whenever another part of the 
 body is working alone. 
 
 3 c. ALTERNATE POINT STEP AND FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step to the right side ; 2, heels together ; 3, full 
 arm circle outward to the right side with the right club; 4, 
 club at rest. In taking the point step with the left foot, 
 alternate with the left club. This change of side will not be 
 mentioned in succeeding exercises, it being understood that 
 when the description mentions only one side the reverse will 
 be taken for the opposite side. 
 
 While taking the point step hold the clubs at rest. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 
 
 183 
 
 3c«. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step to the side and both clubs outward in oppo- 
 sition ; 2, heels together and clubs at rest. Be sure that no 
 weight is carried by the moving foot. 
 
184 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 4. \ 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 8. 
 9. 
 
 LESSON III 
 Stretching. 
 Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 
 Full circle sideways, right outward — Start! 
 
 B. E. 8; B. L. 8; B. inward 8; B. outward 8. 
 
 Foot ! — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Alternate ! 8—8. 
 
 Combine ! 8—8. 
 
 Trunk twisting, right— One ! 8—8—8. 
 
 With clubs! 8—8—8. 
 Forward — March 1 (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Running. 
 
 Note. — See Beference Note 7. 
 Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
 a. 
 
 \ h. 
 
 c. 
 
 d. 
 { a. 
 
 8—8. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 
 
 185 
 
 4 a. TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, twist or rotate the trunk to the side ; 2, return to the for- 
 ward position. The movement should be from the ankles, the 
 feet remaining firmly in place and flat upon the floor. The 
 head should turn with the trunk, but no farther. The twisting 
 should be far enough to create a pressure upon the internal 
 organs sufficient to stimulate their action and the general cir- 
 culation. There should be no sideways bending of the trunk 
 at the waist. Alternate the direction on the last eight counts. 
 The clubs should rest upon the shoulders during this exercise. 
 
 4 6. TRUNK TWISTING WITH 
 FULL CIRCLE 
 
 1, swing both clubs to the 
 left side in the full circle and 
 twist the trunk to the right; 
 2, hold the oblique direction of 
 the trunk and bring the clubs 
 to the rest position; 3, start 
 the clubs to the right and twist 
 the trunk to the front ; 4, clubs 
 at rest. 
 
186 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON IV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 r a. Forearm circle sideways, right outward — Start ! E. 8 ; 
 
 3. j L. 8 ; B. E. 4 ; B. L. 4 ; B. imvard 8 ; B. outward 8. 
 U. On toes! 16. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes. 
 r a. Trunk twisting, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 * j b. With clubs ! 8—8—8. 
 
 5. Forward — March ! (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 6. Stretching. 
 
 7. Eunning. 
 
 8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 9. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 
 
 18' 
 
 3 a. FOREARM CIRCLE AND 
 REST SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, describe a circle side- 
 ways with the forearm, 
 the elbow being the centre 
 of the circle ; 2, rest. 
 
 This exercise has a 
 stronger local effect upon 
 the arm muscles than the 
 full arm circle. 
 
 3 6. RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, rise high on the toes ; 2, heels down, quietly and without 
 jarring. Keep the weight forward on the balls of the feet as 
 the heels are lowered. 
 
188 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSOR V 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 r a. Forearm circle sideways, right outward — Start ! E. 8 ; 
 ' L. 8 ; B. E. 4 ; B. L. 4 ; B. inward 8 ; B. outward 8. 
 h. On toes! 8. 
 
 c. Alternate ! 8. 
 
 d. Combine! 8. 
 
 . {a. Trunk twisting, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 [h. With clubs! 8—8—8. 
 
 a. Trunk bending sideways, alternately, right — One ! 
 16. 
 I h. With clubs ! — alternate. 16. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
 3 c. ALTERNATE RISING ON TOES AND FOREARM CIRCLE 
 
 1, rise on the toes ; 2, heels down ; 3, swing both clubs out- 
 ward in the forearm circle ; 4, clubs at rest. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 189 
 
 Zd. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND FOREARM CIRCLE 
 
 1, rise on the toes and swing both chibs outward ; 2, heels 
 down and clubs at rest. 
 
 5 a. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, bend the trunk from the waist directly to the right side ; 
 2, return to the erect posi- 
 tion ; 3, bend to the left side ; 
 4, trunk erect. Keep both feet 
 flat upon the floor and the 
 knees stiff. The head should 
 remain in a straight line with 
 the axis of the trunk. The 
 bending should be as far as 
 can be done without strain, so 
 as to expand the chest on the 
 convex side and at the same 
 time make an effective press- 
 ure upon the digestive organs. 
 There should be no rotating of 
 the trunk forward or backward 
 of the lateral line. 
 
 The clubs should rest upon 
 the shoulders during the trunk 
 bending. 
 
 5 6. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND FULL CIRCLE 
 
 OUTWARD 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the right side, the clubs resting upon 
 the shoulders ; 2, trunk erect ; 3, swing both clubs in full circle 
 outward in opposition ; 4, clubs at rest ; 5, 6, 7, 8, repeat, 
 bending the trunk to the left side. 
 
190 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 a. Full circle forward^ right — Start ! K. 8 ; L. 8 ; 
 
 Alt. 8 ; B. 8. 
 h. Foot! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Point step forward. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 a. Forearm circle sideways, both outward — Start ! 8. 
 h. On toes ! 8. 
 I c. Alternate ! 8. 
 I d. Combine ! 8. 
 
 f a. Trunk bending sideways, alternately, right — One ! 
 6. ] 16. 
 
 I h. With clubs ! — alternate. 16. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
 4. \ 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 
 
 3 a. FULL CIRCLE FORWARD 
 
 191 
 
 1, straighten the arm upward and forward, swing the club 
 downward and backward at the side to describe a full circle at 
 the side of the body ; 2, rest. Keep the head erect and the 
 shoulders squarely to the front. Unless these points of posture 
 are closely observed, this exercise may be detrimental to good 
 position. 
 
 3 6. POINT STEP FORWARD 
 
 1, extend the foot forward and touch the toe on a line directly 
 forward of the position from which it started ; 2, heels together. 
 Keep the shoulders (upper part of the body) perfectly still and 
 
 the knees stiff. Do not 
 
 p- 
 
 drag or scuff the foot over 
 the floor. The weight 
 should remain entirely on 
 the stationary foot, mak- 
 ing a balance exercise of 
 the movement. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT 
 STEP AND FULL CIRCLE 
 FORWARD 
 
 1, point step forward and 
 both clubs forward in the 
 full circle ; 2, heels together 
 and clubs at rest. Alter- 
 nate the feet in this combi- 
 nation. 
 
192 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON VII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Faciug. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 f a. Full circle forward, right — Start ! E. 8 ; L. 8 ; Alt. 8 ; 
 B. 8. 
 h. Foot! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 a. Alternate full circle to same side and forearm circle in 
 
 opposition, both right — Start ! 16. 
 h. Face! — rest — up — down. 16 — 16. 
 j Note. — Facing and rising on toes. 
 
 [c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 ' a. Trunk bending sideways, alternately, right — One ! 
 6. ] 16. 
 
 . h. With clubs ! — alternate. 16. 
 
 6. Forward — March I (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 193 
 
 4 a. ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE TO SAME SIDE AND FOREARM 
 CIRCLE IN OPPOSITION 
 
 1, swing both clubs to the right in the full arm circle ; 
 2, clubs at rest ; 3, swing both clubs in the forearm circle out- 
 ward in opposition ; 4, rest. Alternate the full arm circle from 
 right to left. 
 
 4 6. FACING AND RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, face to the side as in the tactics, the clubs resting on the 
 shoulders; 2, rest {i.e. hold the position) ; 3, rise on the toes; 
 4, heels down. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF FACING AND RISING ON TOES WITH 
 ALTERNATE FULL AND FOREARM CIRCLE 
 
 1, start both clubs to the left in the full circle and face to 
 the right ; 2, clubs at rest ; 3, both clubs outward in opposition 
 in the forearm circle and rise on the toes ; 4, clubs at rest and 
 heels down; 5, swing both clubs to the right in the full arm 
 circle and face to the left (front) ; 6, clubs at rest ; 7, forearm 
 circle outward in opposition and rise on the toes ; 8, clubs at 
 rest and heels down. Observe that in facing to the left the 
 clubs are started toward the right and vice versa. 
 
 9. BREATHING 
 
 Continue the sideways lifting of the arms taken in the 
 previous breathing exercise, until the arms are in a vertical 
 position ; lower them sideways to position while exhaling. 
 
3. 
 
 194 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON VIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 a. Full circle backward, right — Start! E. 8; L. 8; 
 
 Alt. 8 ; B. 8. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Point step forward, 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 a. Alternate full circle to same side and forearm circle 
 
 in opposition, both right — Start ! 16. 
 h. Face ! — rest — up — down. 16 — ^16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 f a. Trunk bending sideways alternately, right — One ! 16. 
 I h. With clubs ! — alternate. 16. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
 4. 
 
 3 a. FULL CIRCLE BACKWARD 
 
 1, starting upward and backward, swing the club downward 
 and forward to form a full circle at the side of the body ; 2, club 
 at rest. The circle itself is the same as in the full circle for- 
 ward, but the direction in which the arm moves is reversed. 
 
 This exercise, like the forward circle, requires especial care 
 to keep the head perfectly erect. Pull well upon the chest 
 throughout the movement. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND FULL CIRCLE BACKWARD 
 
 1, point step forward and both clubs backward in the full 
 circle ; 2, heels together and clubs at rest. Alternate the feet 
 in this combination. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 195 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 6. 
 
 LESSON IX 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Chibs in position — Place ! 
 a. Full circle backward, right — Start ! E. 8 : L. 8 ; 
 
 Alt. 8 ; B. 8. 
 h. Foot ! — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 f a. Alternate full circle to same side and forearm circle 
 
 in opposition, both right — Start ! 16. 
 h. Face ! — rest — up — down. 16 — 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 a. Alternate point step backward and trunk twisting, 
 
 right— One ! 8—8. 
 h. Together! — alternate. 8. 
 c. With clubs! 16. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six Times. 
 10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
 5 a. ALTERNATE POINT STEP BACKWARD AND TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, point step backward with the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 
 3, twist the trunk to the right ; 4, return to the front. In the 
 point step backward the entire leg should be stretched^ the 
 knee and ankle being fully extended and the movement per- 
 ceptible in the lower part of the back. The toe only should 
 touch the floor. 
 
196 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 b. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP BACKWARD AND TRUNK 
 
 TWISTING 
 
 1, point step backward and trunk twisting to the same side 
 simultaneously ; 2, return to the f ront^ heels together. Alter- 
 nate the direction from right to left. 
 
 This exercise cultivates just what is required by it for proper 
 execution — steady balance and good coordination. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP BACKWARD AND TRUNK 
 TWISTING WITH FULL CIRCLE FORWARD 
 
 1, point step backward and trunk twisting, with full circle 
 forward as the body then faces ; 2, face to the front, heels 
 together and clubs at rest. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 197 
 
 LESSO:^^ X 
 
 1. stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place! 
 a. Alternate full and forearm circle sideways, right — 
 Start 1 E. 8 ; L. 8 ; B. (outward) 8. 
 
 3. \ h. Charge! — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Charging forward. 
 
 c. Combine! 8—8—8. 
 Eising on toes — One ! 16. 
 
 Note. — Clubs on shoulders. 
 
 a. Alternate point step backward and trunk twisting, 
 right— One ! 8—8. 
 
 b. Together ! — alternate. 8. 
 
 c. With clubs ! 16. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 9. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
198 School Gymnastics 
 
 Za. ALTERNATE FULL AND FOREARM CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, swing both clubs to the right in the full circle ; 2, clubs at 
 rest; 3, swing both clubs to the right in the forearm circle; 
 4, clubs at rest. 
 
 3 6. CHARGING FORWARD 
 
 ly step forward and bend the 
 forward knee, both feet flat upon 
 the floor, the back knee straight, 
 and all of the w^eight upon the 
 forward foot; 2, heels together. 
 Keep the trunk of the body up- 
 right and the shoulders squarely 
 to the front. 
 
 This exercise should bring into 
 strong action the muscles of the 
 calf and thigh, and through them 
 quicken effectively the circula- 
 tion. Unless the knee be bent 
 as far as possible, this result will 
 not be obtained. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND ALTERNATE FULL 
 AND FOREARM CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, charge forward with the right foot and swing both clubs 
 to the right in the full circle ; 2, hold the charge position and 
 bring both clubs to the rest position ; 3, heels together and 
 both clubs to the right in the forearm circle ; 4, clubs at rest. 
 On the last eight counts alternate the feet and swing the clubs 
 outward in opposition instead of to the same side. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 199 
 
 3 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 
 a. Alternate full and forearm circle sideways, both right 
 —Start ! R. 8 ; L. 8 ; B. (outward) 8. 
 
 b. Charge ! — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 c. Combine! 8—8-8. 
 
 a. Full circle forward and backward alternately, right 
 —Start ! S—S—S. 
 
 b. Foot ! — forward — place — up — down. 16 — 16. 
 XoTE. — Alternate point step forward and rising 
 
 on toes. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16—16. 
 f a. Alternate point step backward and trunk twisting. 
 
 ! right— One ! 8—8. 
 j b. Together ! — alternate. 
 Ic. With clubs! 16. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
200 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 a. FULL CIRCLE FORWARD AND BACKWARD ALTERNATELY 
 
 1, full circle forward ; 2, clubs at rest ; 3, full circle back- 
 ward; 4, rest. Keep the head well up and the chin in. 
 
 4 6. ALTERNATE POINT STEP FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 
 
 Ij point step forward ; 2, heels together ; 3, rise on the toes ; 
 4, heels down. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 
 WITH FULL CIRCLE, FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
 
 1; point step forward and full circle forward ; 2, heels to- 
 gether and clubs at rest; 3, rise on the toes and full circle 
 backward ; 4, heels down and clubs at rest. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 201 
 
 3. 
 
 5. 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 a. Pendulum and rest, both right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 6. Charge ! — face — front. 16 — 16. 
 
 Note. — Facing sideways and charging. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 a. Full circle forward and backward alternately, right — 
 Start! 8—8—8. 
 ] h. Foot! — forward — place — up — down. 16 — 16. 
 t c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 r a. Trunk bending sideways alternately, right — One ! 
 6. ] 8—8. 
 
 I h. With clubs ! — alternate. 16. 
 
 Note. — As in Lesson V et seq. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
202 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 a. PENDULUM 
 
 In the pendulum swing, the clubs describe the lower half 
 of the full circle across the front of the body, rising only to 
 the shoulder level. 
 
 1, from the rest position start the clubs to the left and 
 swing them down and across the front of the body and up to 
 shoulder level on the right side, both arms horizontal, the right 
 arm extended at full length, the left bent at right angles 
 across the chest; the clubs should be horizontal, continuing 
 the line of the arms ; 2, hold the clubs in this horizontal posi- 
 tion — a rest equivalent to that required for the rest in other 
 exercises ; 3, swing the clubs downward and up to the rest 
 position in front of the body ; 4, hold this rest position. On 
 the last eight counts, instead of coming to the rest position in 
 front of the body, swing the clubs way across to the pendulum 
 position on the opposite side. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 
 
 203 
 
 3 6. FACING SIDEWAYS AND CHARGING 
 
 1, face to the side and charge in the direction in which the 
 body is then turned ; 2, face to the front, heels together. In 
 facing to the right, charge with the right foot, and vice versa. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF FACING AND CHARGING WITH PENDULUM 
 
 1, start both chibs to the left and charge and face to the 
 right; 2, hold the charge and the horizontal position for the 
 clubs ; the latter will then both be extended at full arm's 
 length in front of the body as it then faces ; 3, start the clubs 
 in the direction in which they are then extended (to the right) 
 and face the front, 
 heels together ; 4, hold 
 the normal position for 
 the feet, clubs at rest. 
 When charging and 
 facing to the left, start 
 the clubs to the right. 
 
 5 a. HAND CIRCLE SIDE- 
 WAYS 
 
 The hand circle is 
 made entirely from the 
 wrist, which is the cen- 
 tre of the circle. 1, 
 hand circle sideways ; 
 2, clubs in rest posi- 
 tion. 
 
204 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 6. TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, bend the trunk forward, the back straight, the head well 
 up, and the chin drawn in ; 2, trunk erect ; 3, rise on the toes ; 
 4, heels down. The clubs should rest on the shoulders through- 
 out this exercise. 
 
 If correctly taken, with a straight back, the trunk bending 
 forward strengthens the muscles which hold the trunk erect, 
 by causing their contraction against strong resistance. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 205 
 
 LESSON XIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 [ a. Pendulum, both right— Start ! 8—8—8. 
 
 3. \ b. Charge ! — face — front. 16 — 16. 
 [c. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 a. Full circle forward and backward alternately, right 
 —Start ! 8—8—8. 
 
 4. ] b. Foot! — back — place — up — down. 16 — 16. 
 Note. — Point step backward and rising on toes. 
 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 ' a. Hand circle sideways, right — Start ! R. 8 ; L. 8 ; B. 8. 
 
 b. Trunk ! — forward — up — toes — down. 16. 
 
 5. \ Note. — Alternate trunk bending forward and ris- 
 ing on toes. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 10. Forward — March ! (To seats.) 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND RISING 
 ON TOES WITH HAND CIRCLE 
 
 Take the hand circle sideways with both clubs while rising 
 on the toes; clubs at rest as heels sink. The clubs should 
 rest upon the shoulders for the forward bending of the trunk. 
 
 9. BREATHING 
 
 While inhaling raise the arms forward to a vertical position 
 while exhaling, lower them sideways to position. 
 
206 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 a. Alternate full circle backward and hand circle forward, 
 
 both— Start ! 16. 
 h. Charge ! — forward — hold — place — hold. 16 — 16. 
 
 Note. — Charging forward, 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 f a. Pendulum, both outward — Start ! 8. 
 ] h. On toes ! 8. 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 a. Hand circle outward, right — Start ! R. 8 ; L. 8 ; 
 B. 8. 
 I h. Trunk ! — forward — up — toes — down. 16. 
 1 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Peturn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Punning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 207 
 
 3 a. ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE BACKWARD AND HAND CIRCLE 
 
 FORWARD 
 
 The hand circle forward is done by dropping the club for- 
 ward instead of sideways as in the hand circle sideways. It 
 should describe a circle on a vertical plane inside of the forearm. 
 
 1, full circle backward ; 2, clubs in rest position ; 3, hand 
 circle forward ; 4, rest. Be careful that the head is held per- 
 fectly erect as the clubs swing backward. 
 
 Zh. CHARGING FORWARD 
 
 1, charge forward ; 2, hold the position ; 3, heels together ; 
 4, hold the position. The clubs should rest upon the shoulders 
 during this exercise. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING WITH FULL CIRCLE BACKWARD 
 AND HAND CIRCLE FORWARD 
 
 1, charge forward, and swing the clubs in a full circle back- 
 ward ; 2, hold the charge, and bring the clubs to the rest posi- 
 tion ; 3, heels together and haud circle forward with the clubs ; 
 4. clubs in rest position. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND PENDULUM 
 
 1, rise on the toes and swing the clubs to the outward pen- 
 dulum position ) 2j heels down and swing the clubs inward. 
 
208 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 1. 
 
 9 
 
 3. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 8. 
 9. 
 
 a. 
 
 c. 
 a. 
 
 LESSON XV 
 Stretching. 
 
 Facings. 
 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 
 Alternate full circle backward and hand circle for- 
 ward^ both — Start ! 16. 
 
 Charge ! — forward — hold — place — hold. 16 — 16. 
 
 Combine ! 16—16. 
 
 Pendulum, both outward — Start ! 8. 
 
 On toes ! 8. 
 
 Combine ! 16. 
 
 Pendulum, both right — Start ! 16. 
 
 Trunk I — twist — bend — up — twist — bend — up. 16. 
 Note. — Trunk twisting and bending sideways. 
 
 Combine! 32. 
 Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Running. 
 Breathing — Begin ! Pour times. 
 
 u. 
 
 a. 
 h, 
 
 c. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 209 
 
 bh. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right; 2, hold the position; 
 3, bend the trunk to the right side ; 4, trunk erect ; 5, twist the 
 trunk to the left side ; 6, hold the position ; 7, bend to the 
 left side; 8, trunk erect. The clubs should rest upon the 
 shoulders. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 WITH PENDULUM 
 
 1, start the clubs to the left for a pendulum swing toward 
 the right, and twist the trunk to the right side ; 2, clubs on 
 the shoulders ; 3, bend the trunk to the right side ; 4, trunk 
 erect ; 6, start the clubs to the right for a pendulum swing to 
 the left, and twist the trunk to the left side; 6, clubs on 
 shoulders ; 7, bend the trunk to the left ; 8, trunk erect. 
 
210 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSO]^ XVI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 a. Alternate full circle and hand circle forward, both — 
 
 Start ! 16. 
 h. Charge ! — forward — hold — place — hold, right — hold — 
 place — hold, left — hold — place — hold. 16. 
 Note. — Facing and charging. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 f a. Pendulum, both outward — Start ! 8. 
 
 4. ] 6. On toes ! 8. 
 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 r a. Pendulum, both right — Start ! 16. 
 
 5. j h. Trunk ! — twist — bend — up — twist — bend — up. 16. 
 i c. Combine ! 32. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3 a. ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE AND HAND CIRCLE FORWARD 
 
 1, full circle forward ; 2, clubs at rest position ; 3, inward 
 hand circle forward; 4, outward hand circle forward; 5, 6, 
 repeat hand circles ; 7, full circle forward ; 8, rest. In the out- 
 ward hand circle forward, the circle is described outside of the 
 forearm, instead of inside of it, as in the previous hand circle 
 forward. 
 
Fifth Series, Indian Clubs 
 
 3 6. FACING AND CHARGING 
 
 211 
 
 1, charge forward with the right foot ; 2, hold the position ; 
 3, heels together ; 4, hold the position ; 5, 6, 7, 8, repeat with 
 left foot ; 9, 10, 11, 12, repeat, facing to the right on 9, and 
 charging forward as the body then faces ; return to the front 
 on 12 ; 13, 14, 15, 16, repeat, facing to the left on 13, and to the 
 front on 16; when facing to the left charge with the left foot. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF FAC- 
 ING AND CHARGING WITH 
 ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE 
 AND HAND CIRCLE FOR- 
 WARD 
 
 1, charge forward and 
 take full circle forward ; 
 2, hold the charge, and 
 bring the clubs to the rest 
 position ; 3, 4, 5, 6, con- 
 tinue to hold the charge 
 for the hand circles; 7, 
 full circle forward and 
 heels together; 8, clubs 
 at rest. Eepeat forward 
 with the left foot, and 
 then face and charge to 
 the right and left. 
 
212 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON XVII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 I. Alternate full circle and hand circle forward, both — 
 
 Start ! 16. 
 ). Charge ! — forward — hold — place — hold, right — hold- 
 place — hold, left — hold — place — hold. 16. 
 ). Combine ! 16. 
 
 I, Pendulum, both right — Start ! 8. 
 >. With swaying ! 16. 
 r a. Pendulum, both right — Start ! 16. 
 6. \ b. Trunk ! — twist — bend — up — twist — bend — up. 16- 
 Ic. Combine! 32. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4 6. PENDULUM WITH SWAYING 
 
 1, pendulum to the right (starting the clubs to the left), step 
 to the right side and rise on the toes, bending the trunk slightly 
 at the waist toward the left ; 2, without changing the place of 
 the feet on the floor, lower the heels and transfer the position 
 to the left side, at the same time making the pendulum swing 
 to the left. Come to position on the last count. 
 
Fifth Series, huiiaii Clubs 21; 
 
 LESSON XVIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 a. Alternate full circle and hand circle forward, both — 
 Start ! 16, 
 
 3. \ b. Charge ! — forward — hold — place — hold, right — hold — 
 place — hold, left — hold — place — hold. 16. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 f a. Pendulum, both right — Start ! 8 — 8. 
 
 I b. Trunk ! — twist — bend — up. 16. 
 
 4. -^ . 
 
 Note. — As in preceding lesson. 
 
 ^ c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! 
 
214 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 / 
 
 be. COMBINATION OF TRUNK 
 TWISTING AND BENDING 
 SIDEWAYS WITH CONTINU- 
 OUS PENDULUM 
 
 1, as in the previous com- 
 bination, start the clubs to 
 the left for a pendulum swing 
 to the right as the trunk is 
 twisted to the right ; 2, clubs 
 at rest position; 3, start the 
 clubs to the right and con- 
 tinue the swing into the left 
 pendulum, while bending the 
 trunk to the right ; 4, reverse 
 the pendulum, trunk erect; 
 repeat to the opposite side. 
 
 The combination of the 
 twisting with the bending 
 increases the effect of both 
 exercises upon the digestion 
 and circulation by increasing 
 the pressure upon the ab- 
 dominal organs. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series 
 
 Fifth or Sixth Year, Boys and Girls 
 Double Series^ Wands, 4 feet 
 
 LESSON I 
 
 This series is designed as a substitute for the Indian clubs in 
 the fifth year, where there is not enough free floor space for club 
 work, and for mixed classes of boys and girls, in the sixth year. 
 Many of the exercises can be taken tvith the partners standing 
 back to back. When this is to be done, the partners should turn 
 upon command as described in Exercise Jf., Lesson XVII. 
 
 Note. — For stretching, tactics, floor formation, effects of 
 exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Partners — Face ! 
 (This position will be understood hereafter.) 
 r a. Wand on shoulder, sideways and return — One ! 8 — 8 
 —16. 
 >. Foot ! — step — bend — up — place. 16 — 16. 
 Note. — Stepping and bending sideways. 
 . lo Combine! 16—16. 
 
 Note. — Combination of stepping and bending side- 
 ways with wands on shoulders, and sideways. 
 
 4. Marching. (Keturn wands to place.) 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 6. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 215 
 
 3. 
 
216 School Gymnastics 
 
 WAND AT CAREY 
 
 In marching to place the wand should be held at carry like 
 the bar-bell in the first lesson of the bar-bell series. 
 
 POSITION FOR WORK 
 
 Pupils should be carefully sized so that upon the command, 
 Partners — Face! adjacent pupils of similar size may face 
 each other and lower the wands to position for work. This 
 position of the wands is gained by lowering the upper end of 
 the wand toward one's partner, who grasps that end of it. 
 The wand is thus grasped by each partner and held at arm's 
 length down at the side. Great care should be taken that the 
 partners stand near enough together to jwevent any pulling for- 
 ward of the shoulders during the work. 
 
 3 a. WAND ON SHOULDER, SIDEWAYS AND RETURN 
 
 1, raise the wand to the top of the shoulder ; 2, extend the 
 wand sideways at arm's length, pulling strongly upon the 
 chest ; 3, return the wand to the shoulder ; 4, wand down to 
 position. 
 
 The side to which all movements should begin should be 
 understood by the class, as directions cannot be given in the 
 command without consuming much unnecessary time. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 217 
 
 Zh. STEPPING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, step to the side, with the weight borne equally by the feet ; 
 2, bend the outer knee ; 3, straighten the knee ; 4, heels together. 
 The trunk should be held erect throughout, and the wands 
 should be in their usual position down at the sides. Be sure that 
 the bend of the knee is sufficient to bring into action the large 
 muscles of the leg, and through them stimulate the circulation. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS WITH 
 WANDS ON SHOULDERS AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, step to the side and raise both wands to the top of the 
 shoulder; 2, bend the outer knee and extend the wands; 
 
 3, straighten the knee and return the wands to the shoulders ; 
 
 4, position. 
 
 (Note. — See cut on next page.) 
 
218 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 6. BREATHING 
 
 Eaise the arms sideways to shoulder level, and inhale a deep 
 breath ; lower them to position while exhaling. The breathing 
 should be much slower and deeper than the normal. The arm 
 action lifts the ribs, thereby increasing the diameter of the 
 chest. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys ami Girls 219 
 
 LESSOlSr II 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 [ a. Wand on shoulder, sideways and return — One ! IG 
 
 3. J -16- 
 
 h. Foot ! — step — bend — up — place. IG — IG. 
 
 i c. Combine ! IG— IG. 
 r a. Raising wands sideways, both — One ! 8. 
 h. On toes! IG. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes. 
 I c. Combine ! IG. 
 
 Note. — Combination of rising on toes and raising 
 wands sideways. 
 5. Marching. (Return wands to place.) 
 G. Stretching. 
 7. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 \ 
 
 4 a. RAISING WANDS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, raise the wands sideways to shoulder level ; 2, lower the 
 wands to position. Pull hard upon the chest. 
 
 4 h. RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, rise on the toes as high as possible ; 2, heels down, quietly 
 and without jarring. Avoid all swaying backward upon the 
 heels as they are lowered. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND RAISING WANDS 
 
 SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, rise on the toes and raise the wands sideways to shoulder 
 level ; 2, heels and wands down. 
 
220 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON III 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Wand on shoulder, sideways, and return — One ! 16 
 —16. 
 h. Foot ! — step — bend — up — place. 16 — 16. 
 
 I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 { a. Eaising wands sideways, both — One ! 8. 
 4. \ h. On toes ! 16. 
 
 t c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 r a. Wand on shoulders — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 g I h. With trunk !— bend— up. 8—8—16. 
 
 I Note. — Trunk bending sideways with wands on 
 
 I shoulders. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 221 
 
 5 a. WAND ON SHOULDERS 
 
 1, raise the wand to the shoulder through the full arm exten- 
 sion sideways, pulling well upon the chest in the transition; 
 2, wand down, with the same full extension in the transition. 
 
 bh. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS, WITH WANDS ON SHOULDERS 
 
 1, raise both wands to the shoulders and bend the trunk side- 
 ways from the waist, the head remaining in line with the trunk ; 
 2, position. The bending should be as far as possible without 
 lifting the feet or bending the knees. 
 
 If taken correctly, this exercise is very effective for lateral 
 expansion of the chest and for the circulation and digestive 
 organs. 
 
222 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON IV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marcliing. 
 
 a. Raising wand obliquely upward — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. Charge I — reverse. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Reverse charging. 
 I c. Combine ! 16—16. 
 
 Note. — Combination of reverse charging with wands 
 obliquely upward. 
 r a. Raising wands sideways, both — One ! 8. 
 j h. On toes ! 16. 
 [ c. Combine ! 16. 
 ^ { a. Wand on shoulder — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 [h. Withtrunk!— bend— up. 8—8—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 223 
 
 3 a. RAISING WAND OBLIQUELY UPWARD 
 
 1, raise the 
 arm at full 
 length side- 
 ways to an ob- 
 lique upward 
 position, pull- 
 ing hard upon 
 the chest; 2, 
 wand down to 
 position. Be 
 careful that 
 the trunk of 
 the body does 
 not tip to the 
 side opposite 
 the moving 
 arm, and that 
 the head is held 
 erect. 
 
 3 6. REVERSE CHARGING 
 
 1, face and step to the side and bend the outer knee, with all 
 of the weight upon it, and the trunk erect ; 2, keeping the feet 
 in the same relative position, face and charge in the opposite 
 direction; 8, return to the first charging; continue to reverse 
 the charging as above to 7 ; 8, position. The bend of the knee 
 should be as great as possible, that the heavy thigh muscles 
 may be brought into action and so stimulate the circulation. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF REVERSE CHARGING WITH WANDS 
 OBLIQUELY UPWARD 
 
 1, charge sideways and raise the wand on that side obliquely 
 upward; 2, reverse the charging, lower the raised wand and 
 raise the opposite one j continue to 7 ; 8, position. 
 
224 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON V 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Raising wand obliquely upward — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 3. j h. Charge ! — reverse. 8 — 8. 
 I 0. Combine! 16 — 16. 
 
 a. Raising wand upward — One ! 8—8 — 8. 
 h. On toes. 16. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes. 
 , c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Note. — Combination of rising on toes with raising 
 wands upward. 
 f a. Wand on shoulder — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 \h. With trunk !— bend— up. 8—8—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 Note. — See Explanatory Note 7. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 5. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 225 
 
 4 a. KAISING WAND UPWARD 
 
 1, raise the wand through the sideways to a vertical position, 
 the elbow straight, and the head and shoulders erect through- 
 out ; 2, wand down to position. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH RAISING WANDS 
 
 UPWARD 
 
 1, raise both wands upward and rise on the toes ; 2, heels 
 and wands down. 
 
226 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4. 
 
 6. 
 
 ! 8—8. 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Raising wand obliquely upward — One 
 
 3. \ b. Charge ! — reverse. 8 — 8. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Eaising wand upward — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 \ h. On toes ! 16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Wand on shoulder, extend and return — One ! 8 — 
 8—16. 
 
 Note. — As No. 3 in Lesson I. 
 With trunk! 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — Trunk bending sideways with wands on 
 shoulders, sideways and return. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 a. 
 
 h. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 227 
 
 5 6. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS WITH WANDS ON SHOULDERS 
 
 AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, raise both wands to the shoulders ; 2, extend the wands 
 at arm's length sideways, shoulder high, and bend the trunk 
 sideways; 3, trunk erect and wands to shoulders; 4, bend 
 the trunk and extend the arms ; continue to 7 ; 8, position. 
 
228 School Gvmnastics 
 
 LESSON VII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Raising wand sideways, upward and return — One! 
 8—8—16. 
 
 3. {h. Charge ! — side — rock back — charge. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Rocking. 
 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 Note. — Combination of rocking and raising wand 
 sideways, upward and return. 
 r a. Raising wand upward — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 4. -j h. On toes ! 16. 
 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 r a. Wand on shoulders, sideways and return — One 
 
 5. j 8—8—16. 
 
 \h. With trunk! 8—8—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3 a. RAISING WAND SIDEWAYS, UPWARD AND RETURN 
 
 1, raise the wand sideways at shoulder level ; 2, raise the 
 arms to a vertical position ; 3, wand again sideways at shoulder 
 level ; 4, arms vertical ; alternate to 7 ; 8, wand down to position. 
 Pull strongly upon the chest. Keep the head erect. 
 
 i 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 229 
 
 3 b. ROCKING 
 
 1, face and charge sideways ; 2, keeping the feet in the same 
 position, and the shoulders facing in the same direction, 
 straighten the forward knee, transfer the weight to the rear 
 leg and bend that knee; 3, return to the first charging position ; 
 continue to rock from one charging position to another to 7; 
 8, heels together. The knees should be bent to their farthest 
 extent, as in the charging, that the circulation may be 
 quickened by the action of the large thigh muscles. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF ROCKING AND RAISING WAND SIDEWAYS 
 
 AND UPWARD 
 
 1, face and charge to the side, and extend the wand on that 
 side at shoulder level ; 2, bend the rear knee and extend the 
 
230 School Gymnastics 
 
 arms to a vertical position; 3, return to the forward charge, 
 wand at shoulder level ; continue to 7 ; 8, position. 
 
 9. BREATHING 
 
 While inhaling, continue the sideways lifting of the arms 
 taken in the previous breathing exercise, until the arms are in 
 a vertical position ; while exhaling, lower them sideways to 
 position. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 231 
 
 LESSON VIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 ' a. Eaising wands sideways, npward and return — One ! 
 
 1 h. Charge ! — side — rock back — charge. 8 — 8. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 a. Wand on shoulder, upward and return — One ! 8 — 8 — 
 
 I h. On toes ! 16. 
 [ c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Note. — Combination of rising on toes with wands 
 on shoulders and upward. 
 
 r a. Wand on shoulders, sideways and return — One ! 
 
 5. I 8—8—16. 
 
 i b. With trunk ! 8—8—16. 
 
 6. ^Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4 a. WAND ON SHOULDER, UPWARD AND RETURN 
 
 1, wand on shoulders ; 2, raise the wand upward, arms verti- 
 cal, pull hard upon the chest and keep the head erect; 3, wand 
 again to the shoulders ; 4, wand down to position. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH WANDS ON 
 SHOULDERS AND UPWARD 
 
 1, raise both wands to the shoulders and rise on the toes ; 
 2, hold the position on the toes and raise the arms to a vertical 
 position ; 3, still keeping the heels off of the floor, return the 
 wands to the shoulders ; 4, heels and wands down. 
 
232 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON IX 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Raising wand sideways, upward and return — One ? 
 8—8—16. 
 
 Charge ! — side — rock back — charge. 8 — 8. 
 Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 Wand to shoulder, upward and return — One ! 8— 
 8—16. 
 
 On toes ! 16. 
 Combine ! 16. 
 
 6. a. Facing and charging sideways, and bending trunk for- 
 ward—One ! 16—16. 
 
 6. Marching ! (Return wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 8. 
 
 { a. 
 
 4. { 
 
 
 Running. 
 
 9. Breathing- 
 
 Begin ! 
 
 Six times. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 233 
 
 '-.■rf!»&w^^,^;,-^ss!i^^ , ^^vmm- 
 
 5 a. FACING AND CHARGING SIDEWAYS, AND BENDING TRUNK 
 
 FORWARD 
 
 1, face and charge to the side with the wand extended for- 
 ward at shoulder level ; 2, holding the charge position, bend the 
 trunk forward and touch the wand to the floor ; 3, trunk erect, 
 the weight remaining over the forward knee ; 4, position. 
 
 This is a very effective exercise for the circulation and res- 
 piration as well as for strengthening the muscles of the back 
 and thigh. 
 
234 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON X 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Charging forward and backward alternately — One ! 
 8—8. 
 
 3. \ b. Arms !— up. 8—8. 
 Note. — Combination of charging forward and 
 
 backward with arms upward. 
 
 a. Wand on shoulder, upward and return — One ! 8 — 
 8—16. 
 
 b. On toes! 16. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 5. Facing and charging sideways, and bending trunk forward 
 _One ! 16—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 235 
 
 3 a. CHARGING FORWARD AND BACKWARD, ALTERNATELY 
 
 111 tliis exercise the partners charge forward and backward 
 in opposite directions ; 1, a's charge forward and 6's back- 
 ward on the same side ; 2, position ; 3, a's charge backward 
 and ?>'s forward on the same side ; 4, position ; continue to alter- 
 nate to 7 ; 8, position. 
 
 3 h. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
 WITH ARMS UPWARD 
 
 Raise the arms vertically upward while charging on the first 
 count, and lower them to the sides on the second count. 
 
 < 
 
236 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 {a. Charging forward and backward, alternately — One! 
 
 3. 8—8. 
 
 [h. Arms!— up. 8—8. 
 a. Wand on shoulder — One ! 8 or 16. 
 h. On toes ! — up — bend knees — up — heels. 16. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes and bending knees, 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Note. — Combination of rising on toes and bending 
 knees with wands on shoulders. 
 6. Facing and charging sideways, and bending trunk forward 
 _One! 16—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands -Boys and Girls 237 
 
 4 ft. RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 
 
 1, rise on the toes ; 2, bend the knees, the heels remaining 
 off of the floor ; 3, straighten the knees, the heels still raised ; 
 4, heels down. The knees should spread as they are bent. 
 Keep the trunk perfectly erect. 
 
 This is an admirable exercise for cultivating erect carriage 
 of the trunk, as well as for quickening the circulation. 
 
 '.^^„€i 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 
 WITH WANDS ON SHOULDERS 
 
 1, rise on the toes and place the wands on the shoulders ; 
 2, bend the knees; 3, straighten the -knees; 4, heels and wands 
 down. The wand should remain upon the shoulders from the 
 first to the fourth count. 
 
238 . School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 [ a. Charging forward and backward, alternately — One ! 
 
 3. \ 8—8. 
 
 [ h. Arms ! — up. 8 — 8. 
 
 [ a. Wand on shoulder — One ! 8 or 16. 
 
 4. ] 6. On toes ! — up — bend knees — up — heels. 16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 a. Charging and trunk bending sideways — One ! 8 — 8. 
 h. With wand. 16—16. 
 
 Note. — Combination of charging and trunk bending 
 sideways with wand to floor. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands —Boys and Girls 239 
 
 5 a. CHARGING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, charge directly to the side \ 2, bend the trunk sideways 
 toward the bent knee ; 3, straighten the trunk, but hold the 
 charge position ; 4, heels together. The wand should be placed 
 on the hips during this exercise. 
 
 5 b. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 WITH WAND TO FLOOR 
 
 1, charge sideways ; 2, bend the trunk sideways and touch 
 the wand on that side to the floor ; 3, trunk erect ; 4, position. 
 
240 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 8. 
 9. 
 
 LESSON XIII 
 Stretching. 
 Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 I a. Facing and stretch step sideways with wand downward 
 
 [ and upward — One ! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Wand on shoulder — One ! 8 or 16. 
 
 \ h. On toes ! — up — bend knees — up — heels. 16. 
 
 i c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 a. Charging and trunk bending sideways — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 b. With wands ! 16—16. 
 Marching. (Return wands to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 
 Eunning. 
 
 Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands —Boys and Girls 241 
 
 Zn. FACING AND STRETCH STEP SIDEWAYS WITH WAND 
 DOWNWARD AND UPWARD 
 
 1, face to the side^ bend the inner knee as in a backward 
 charging position, stretch the outer foot forward and touch the 
 toe only to the floor, the knee remaining stiff ; at the same time 
 bend the trunk forward at the waist and touch the wand to the 
 forward ankle ; 2, bend the trunk slightly backward at the 
 
 waist ; raise the arms vertically, bend the head backward, and 
 look up at the wand; 3, bend forward again; 4, position. 
 
 This exercise is excellent for the waist and back muscles. 
 It is very stimulating to the circulation. 
 
 9. BREATHING 
 
 While inhaling, raise the arms forward to a vertical posi- 
 tion ; while exhaling, lower them sideways. 
 
242 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 3. Facing and stretch step sideways with wand downward and 
 
 upward — One ! 16^16. 
 
 a. Wand on shoulders^ upward and return — One i 
 
 16—16. 
 h. On toes ! — up — bend — up — heels. 16. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes and bending knees as m 
 previous lesson, 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Note. — Combination of rising on toes and bending 
 knees with wands on shoulders and upward. 
 r a. Charging and trunk bending sideways — One ! 8 — 8. 
 I h. With wand ! 16—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 243 
 
 4«. WAND ON SHOULDERS, UPWARD AND RETURN 
 
 1, raise the wand to the shoulder; 2, raise the wand up- 
 ward; 3, wand again on the shoulder; 4, wand down to 
 position. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 
 WITH WANDS ON SHOULDERS AND UPWARD 
 
 1, rise on the toes and raise the wands to the shoulders ; 
 2, bend the knees and raise the wands upward ; 3, straighten 
 the knees and return the wands to the shoulders ; 4, position. 
 
244 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 3. Facing and stretch step sideways — One ! 16 — 16. 
 a. Wand on shoulders, upward and return — One ! 16 — 
 
 16. 
 h. On toes ! — up — bend — up — heels. 16. 
 . c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 5. Facing, kneeling, and trunk bending backward — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times* 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 245 
 
 5 a . FACING, KNEELING, AND TRUNK BENDING BACKWARD 
 
 1, face to the side, kneel on the inner knee and extend the 
 wand on that side forward at shoulder level ; 2, bend the trunk 
 backward and raise the wand upward ; bend the head back- 
 ward and look up at the wand ; o, trunk erect and w^and again 
 forward at shoulder level ; 4, position. This is one of the best 
 all-over exercises. 
 
246 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XVI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Raising wand sideways, upward and return — One ! 
 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — As in 3 a, Lesson VII. 
 h. Pivot ! — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Pivoting and bending knees, 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 Note. — Combination of pivoting and bending knees 
 with wand sideways, upward and return. 
 { a. Wand on shoulders, upward and return — One ! 16 — 16. 
 4. \ h. On toes ! — up — bend — up — heels. 16. 
 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 6. Facing, kneeling and trunk bending backward — One ! 
 16—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six tiniesc 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, Wands — Boys and Girls 247 
 
 3 h. PIVOTING AND BENDING KNEES 
 
 1, rise on the toes and pivot to the side on the balls of the 
 feet ; 2, holding this position of the feet, bend the knees ; 
 
 3, straighten the knees ; 4, pivot to the front and lower the 
 heels to position. 
 
 This is one of the most difficult balance movements. If 
 
 correctly done, it is very serviceable for strengthening the 
 muscles that maintain a good carriage of the body. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF PIVOTING AND 
 BENDING KNEES WITH WAND 
 SIDEWAYS AND UPWARD 
 
 1, rise on the toes, pivot to the 
 side and extend the wand on that 
 side forward at shoulder level ; 
 2, bend the knees and raise the 
 wand upward ; 3, straighten the 
 knees and return the wand to 
 the forward position ; 4, pivot to 
 the front, and return the heels 
 and wand to position. 
 
248 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XVII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Wand sideways, upward and return — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 3. \ h. Pivot ! — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 ic. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 4. Cross step and facing to rear — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 5. Facing, kneeling and trunk bending backward — One ! 
 16—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4. CROSS STEP AND FACING TO REAR 
 
 1, cross one foot over the other and touch the toe on a line 
 sideways from that of the stationary foot ; partners should 
 work on the same side ; raise upward the wand on the side of 
 the stationary foot ; 2, face to the rear, turning under the 
 raised wand, and lower the wand to position ; the partners 
 should then be back to back and the heels and wands in 
 position; 3, raise the same wand and return to the front; this 
 will leave the feet crossed and the wand raised ; 4, position. 
 
Fifth or Sixth Series, IVands — Boys and Girls 249 
 
 LESSON XVIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Wancl sideways, upward and return — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 3. i h. Pivot ! — bend — up — place. 8 — 8. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 4. Cross step and facing to rear — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 a. Eaising wand upward — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 iSToTE. — As in 4 a, Lesson V. 
 
 5. ] h. Bend ! 8—8—8. 
 
 I Note. — Trunk bending sideways, wands at hips. 
 
 [c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 XoTE. — Combination of trunk bending sideways 
 and raising wands upward. 
 
 6. starching. (Return wands to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND RAISING 
 
 WANDS UPWARD 
 
 1, bend the trunk sideways and at the same time raise both 
 wands upward, the arms being in a line with the trunk ; 
 2, position. 
 
Seventh Series 
 
 Sixth Year, Boys 
 Bar-bells^ 4 feet 
 
 LESSON I 
 
 ;N"ote. — For stretching, marching, floor formation, effects of 
 exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 
 
 When direction is not mentioned in the command, it is under 
 stood that the exercise will begin to the right side. 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position, for work — One ! Two ! 
 a. Bar at carry, right — One ! 16 — 16. 
 h. Foot !— forward. 8—8—16. 
 Note. — Point step forward. 
 ^ c. Combine ! 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 4. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 While marching to place, the bar should be carried in the 
 right arm, as shown in the illustration for 3 h. 
 
 BAR IN POSITION FOR WORK 
 
 1, raise the left arm upward, with the elbow bent at right 
 angles so that the forearm crosses the forehead, and grasp the 
 bar with the left hand, palm to the front ; 2, lower the bar to a 
 horizontal position at arm's length down in front. 
 
 253 
 
Seventh Series 
 
 Sixth Year, Boys 
 Bar-bells, 4 feet 
 
 LESSOI^ I 
 
 KoTE. — For stretching, raarching, floor formation, effects of 
 exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 
 
 When direction is not mentioned in the command, it is under 
 stood that the exercise will begin to the right side. 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position, for work — One ! Two ! 
 
 a. Bar at carry, right — One ! 16 — 16. 
 
 b. Foot !— forward. 8—8—16. 
 Note. — Point step forward. 
 
 ^ c. Combine ! 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 4. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 While marching to place, the bar should be carried in the 
 right arm, as shown in the illustration for 3 h. 
 
 BAR IN POSITION FOR WORK 
 
 1, raise the left arm upward, with the elbow bent at right 
 angles so that the forearm crosses the forehead, and grasp the 
 bar with the left hand, palm to the front ; 2, lower the bar to a 
 horizontal position at arm's length down in front. 
 
 253 
 
254 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 a. BAR AT CARRY 
 
 The movements in this exer- 
 cise are the same as in the bar 
 in position for work. 
 
 1, place the bar at carry at 
 the right shoulder ; 2, bar down 
 to the horizontal position. 
 
 Zb. POINT STEP FORWARD 
 
 1^ lift the right foot^ extend 
 the leg and touch the toe the 
 length of a step in front of 
 its normal position ; no weight 
 should be carried by the mov- 
 ing foot, the shoulders remain- 
 ing immovable; the knee and 
 instep should be stretched to 
 ' ' .---- .: -^-..^-;-., their utmost ; 2, heels together. 
 
 If correctly taken, this exercise 
 is effective for balance work and for general carriage. The bar 
 should remain at carry during this exercise. This position of 
 the bar will be understood hereafter whenever the legs or trunk 
 are working alone, unless otherwise specified. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND BAR AT CARRY 
 
 1, point step forward with the right foot and bar at carry at 
 the right shoulder, the right arm bent across the forehead and 
 grasping the bar; 2, heels together and bar in horizontal 
 position. In taking the point step with the left foot, the bar 
 should be placed at carry at the left shoulder. Be sure to keep 
 the head erect in this and all other exercises. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells Boys 255 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON II 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 r a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 \. Foot!— side. 8— 8— la 
 
 Note. — Point step sideways. 
 ic. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 { a. Bar at chest — One ! 16. 
 ' h. On toes ! 16. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two I 
 
 5. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
 
 6. Stretching. 
 
 7. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4. \ 
 
 3 a. AIMING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, raise the bar horizontally to shoulder level and aim to the 
 right side, the right arm extended at full length, the left elbow 
 bent and raised to shoulder level ; turn the head and look in 
 the direction of the aiming; 2:)ull hard upon the chest with the 
 extended arm ; 2, wand down to position. 
 
 3 6. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 
 
 This is similar to the point step forward except in direction. 
 The same features of steady carriage and extended knee and 
 nistep should be observed. Start the exercise to the right side. 
 
256 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 a. BAR AT CHEST 
 
 1, bend the elbows 
 and raise the bar to 
 a horizontal posi- 
 tion at the chest ; 2, 
 bar down to position. 
 The upper arms 
 should be drawn 
 backward when the 
 bar is raised, so as ^ 
 to expand the chest. 
 Keej) the head erect. 
 
 3r. COMBINATION OF 
 POINT STEP AND 
 AIMING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step side- 
 ways to the right, 
 and aim to the left 
 side ; 2, heels together 
 and bar down to posi- 
 tion. When the point 
 step is taken to the 
 left side, aim to the 
 right. 
 
 
 
 ^^^K r^^^M^B 
 
 M 1 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 257 
 
 4^. RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, rise as high as possible on the toes ; 2, heels down, quietly 
 and without jarring ; do not let the weight sway backward 
 upon the heels after the latter are lowered. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BAR AT CHEST 
 
 1, rise on the toes and raise the bar to the chest ; 2, heels to- 
 gether and bar down. 
 
 7. BREATHING 
 
 Raise the arms sideways to shoulder level and inhale ; lower 
 them to position and exhale. The breath should be slow and 
 forced, i.e. deeper than the normal. 
 
258 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON III 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 r a. Bar forward, over head and return — One ! 
 h. In quick time ! 8. 
 
 3. \ G. Foot! — forward. 16. 
 
 Note. — Point step forward- 
 ed. Combine! 16. 
 a. Bar at chest — One ! 16. 
 h. On toes! 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two 1 
 
 5. Marching. (Eeturn bar-bells to place.) 
 
 6. Stretching. 
 
 7. Running. 
 
 Note. — See Explanatory Note 1. 
 
 8. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 16. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 
 
 259 
 
 3 a. BAR FORWARD, OVER HEAD AND RETURN 
 
 1, raise the bar horizontally forward at arm's length in front 
 at shoulder level; 2, continue the upward movement until the 
 arms are vertical and the bar directly over the head ; 3, return 
 to the forward position ; 4, bar down to position. Much care 
 will be needed in this exercise to keep the head perfectly erect. 
 Pall hard upon the chest with the arms. 
 
 Zh. BAR FORWARD, OVER HEAD AND RETURN IN QUICK TIME 
 
 1, swing the bar through the forward to the upward posi- 
 tion ; 2, bar down to position. Be careful that the hips, or. ab- 
 domen, and the head are not pushed forward as the bar is 
 raised. A sway-back position should also be avoided. 
 
2G0 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 t^'^'iS^^PfMJ--^- :^^ 
 
 Zd. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND BAR 
 
 OVER HEAD 
 
 1, point step forward and bar over lieaid ; 2, heels and bar to 
 position. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 201 
 
 3. 
 
 5. 
 
 LESSON IV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 a. Bar forward^ back of shoulders, and return — One i 16c 
 h. In quick time ! 8. 
 c. Foot!— back. 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — Point step backward. 
 cl. Combine ! 16. 
 I" a. Bar at chest — One ! 16. 
 ^ h. On toes ! 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
 h. With trunk sideways ! 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — Trunk bending sideways. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
262 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 a. BAR FORWAED, BACK OF SHOULDERS, AND RETURN 
 
 1, bar forward at arm's length at shoulder level; 2, swing 
 the bar to the upward position, with the arms vertical, bend 
 the elbows, and while keeping the head firmly erect, place the 
 bar back of the shoulders ; 3, bar through the upward to the 
 forward position; 4, bar down to position. 
 
 If taken with the head in good position throughout, this ex- 
 ercise is one of the most effective for correcting the position 
 of the shoulders and shoulder-blades. 
 
 3?>. BAR FORWARD, BACK OF SHOULDERS, AND RETURN, IN 
 
 QUICK TIME 
 
 1, swing the bar through the forward and upward positions 
 and place it back of the shoulders; 2, return the bar to posi- 
 tion. Be sure that the arms are stretched to their farthest 
 extent betw^een the terminal positions. 
 
 3 c. POINT STEP BACKWARD 
 
 1, stretch the right leg backward from the w^aist and touch 
 the toe directly back of its normal position; 2, heels together. 
 The moving foot should carry no weight. The knee and instep 
 should be stretched to their utmost. 
 
 If taken correctly, this exercise makes effective work for the 
 lower back muscles, which help to hold the trunk erect. 
 
Seventh Series, bar-bells — Boys 
 
 263 
 
 Zd. COMBINATION OF POINT 
 STEP BACKWARD AND BAR 
 BACK OF SHOULDERS 
 
 1. point step backward 
 with right foot and bar 
 back of shoulders; 2, foot 
 and bar to position. 
 
 bh. TRUNK BENDING SIDE- 
 WAYS WITH BAR BACK OF 
 SHOULDERS 
 
 1, bar back of shoulders as 
 in 3 ; 2, bend the trunk from 
 the waist directly to the right 
 side; 3^ trunk erect; 4, bar 
 down to position. The move- 
 ment of the trunk should be 
 as far as possible without 
 bending the knees or lifting 
 the feet. 
 
 This exercise is admirable 
 for expanding the chest lat- 
 erally and for stimulating the 
 action of the digestive organs 
 and the circulation. 
 
264 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 5. 
 
 LESSON V 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 
 a. Bar forward, back of shoulders, and return — One ! 16. 
 
 h. In quick time ! 8. 
 
 c. Foot!— back. 8—8—16. 
 
 d. Combine ! 16. 
 f a. Bar vertically forward, right arm up — One! 8 — 8 — 8 
 i h. On toes ! 16. 
 
 Note. — Eising on toes, 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 a. Aiming sideways, left — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8. 
 
 Note. — Trunk twisting. 
 
 c. ftuick time ! 8. 
 
 d. Combine ! 8. 
 
 e. Quick time ! 8. 
 
 {a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
 j b. With trunk sideways ! 8—8—16. 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Eeturn bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Seventh Series, Rar-belh — Boys 205 
 
 4 a. BAR VERTICALLY FORWARD, RIGHT ARM UP 
 
 1, raise the bar to a vertical position in front of the body, 
 the arms extended at full length, the right arm upward ; 2, bar 
 down to position. See illustration in Lesson IX, 5 cZ, for the 
 vertical position of the bar. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BAR VERTICALLY 
 
 FORWARD 
 
 1, rise on the toes and extend the bar vertically forward 
 2, heels down and bar to position. 
 
 5 6. TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, twist or rotate the trunk co the right side, the feet remain- 
 ing firmly in place and the knees stiff ; the head should turn 
 with the trunk, but no farther; 2, return to position. The 
 chest should be thrown well forward as the body is rotated, 
 and the chin should be drawn in. The twisting should be as 
 far as possible with the maintenance of a good position, that a 
 strong pressure may be exerted upon the digestive organs. 
 
 be. TRUNK TWISTING IN QUICK TIME 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right ; 2, twist to the left ; 3, twist 
 to the right ; continue to alternate the directions to 7 5 8, posi- 
 tion. 
 
266 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 bd. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND AIMING 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right and aim directly backward, 
 twisting the head so as to look in the direction of the aiming ; 
 2, return the trunk and bar to position. 
 
 be. TRUNK TWISTING AND AIMING IN QUICK TIME 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right and aim backward from the 
 right side ; 2, twist the trunk to the left and aim backward 
 from the left side ; continue to alternate the sides to 7 ; 8, 
 trunk and bar to position. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 20' 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 a. Bar forward — One ! IG. 
 
 Note. — As for the first count of 3 a, Lesson IV. 
 h. Charge! 16—16. 
 
 Note. — Charging forward. 
 c. Combine! 16—16—32. 
 f a. Bar vertically forward^ right arm up — One ! 8 — 8 
 —8. 
 h. On toes! 16. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 b. Trunk !— twist. ^—S. 
 5. { c. Quick time ! 8. 
 
 d. Combine ! 8. 
 
 e. Quick time ! 8. 
 a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
 
 ^' ' b. With trunk sideways ! 8—8—16. 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Keturn bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
268 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3h. CHARGING FORWARD 
 
 1, take a long step forward with the right foot, bend the 
 knee and throw the weight entirely on that leg, though the 
 trunk should remain erect and the rear heel upon the floor ; 
 2, heels together. 
 
 If the bend of the knee is sufficient to bring the thigh 
 muscles w^ell into action, this exercise will have a very stimu- 
 lating effect upon the circulation and respiration. It cultivates 
 an erect carriage of the trunk if the chest is thrown well for- 
 ward and the trunk held erect in the charge position. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND BAR FORWARD 
 
 1, charge forward and swing the bar forward at arm's length 
 at shoulder level ; 2, heels and bar to position. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 269 
 
 6. 
 
 LESSCm VII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Eaeings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 [ a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 10 — IG — 16. 
 
 3. i I). Charge sideways ! 16 — 16. 
 [c. Combine I 16—16—32. 
 
 a. Bar over head — One ! 
 
 h. On toes ! 16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8. 
 ; c. Quick time ! 8. 
 
 d. Combine! 8. 
 
 e. Quick time ! 8. 
 a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
 
 [ h. AYith trunk sideways ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Keturn bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 Zh. CHARGING SIDEWAYS 
 
 This differs from charging forward only in direction. 
 
 1, charge directly to the right side, the trunk erect and all 
 of the weight carried by the moving foot ; 2, position. The 
 shoulders should remain squarely to the front throughout. 
 

 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND AIMING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, charge and aim to the right side ; 2, position. In charging 
 to the left side aim to the left. 
 
 4r. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BAR OVER HEAD 
 
 1, rise on the toes and swing the bar through the forward 
 to the horizontal position over the head; 2, heels and bar 
 down. 
 
 10. BREATHING 
 
 While inhaling continue the upward movement of the arms 
 until they are in a vertical position; arms down while exhaling. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 271 
 
 6 
 
 LESS0:N^ VIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 f a. Bar at carry, aiming forward and returning, right — 
 One ! 16— IG. 
 >. Foot !— backward — charge — backward — place. 16 — 
 
 3. \ 16. 
 Note. — Point step backward, charging forward 
 
 and returning, 
 c. Combine! 16—16—32. 
 r a. Bar over head — One ! 8. 
 
 4. { b. On toes ! 16. 
 
 I 
 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 6. Alternate trunk bending forward and bar back of shoulders 
 
 —One ! 32. 
 
 a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
 
 b. With trunk bending sideways ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3 a. BAR AT CARRY, AIMING FORWARD AND RETURNING 
 
 1, bar at carry at the right shoulder ; 2, aim directly forward 
 by raising the right arm with the bar forward, and placing the 
 left hand, still grasping the bar, at the right shoulder ; 3^ bar 
 at carry ; 4, position. 
 
272 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 Zh. POINT STEP BACKWARD, CHARGING FORWARD, AND 
 
 RETURNING 
 
 1, point step backward; 2, charge forward; 3, point step 
 backward ; continue to 15 ; 16, heels together. 
 
 This combination of exercises is very serviceable for culti- 
 vating erect carriage, if the point step is 
 taken with a strong stretch of the entire 
 leg, and yet without any weight being 
 borne upon it. The balance and control 
 of body required for changing from one 
 position to the other is considerable. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP BACKWARD 
 AND BAR AT CARRY, WITH CHARGING AND 
 AIMING FORWARD 
 
 1, point step backward with the right 
 foot and bar at carry on the same side ; 
 2, charge and aim forward ; 3, point step 
 backward and bar at carry; continue to 
 15 ; 16, position. 
 
 5. ALTERNATE TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND BAR BACK OF 
 
 SHOULDERS 
 
 1, bend the trunk forward from the hips, with the back 
 straight, and swing the arms upward in line with the trunk; 
 the head should remain in a straight line with the back ; 
 2, trunk erect and bar down to position ; 3, bar back of shoul- 
 ders ; 4, bar down to position. 
 
 This exercise is admirable for the back muscles, and if cor- 
 rectly taken will do much to cultivate an erect carriage. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 273 
 
 LESSON IX 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 ' a. Bar at cany, aiming forward and returning, right — 
 
 One ! 16—16. 
 h. Foot ! — backward — charge — backward — place. 16 — 
 
 16. 
 c. Combine! 16—16—32. 
 
 a. Bar over head, back of shoulders and return — One ! 
 16. 
 
 h. On toes ! 16. 
 
 Note. — Eising on toes, 
 c. Combine ! 32. 
 f a. Bar vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 b. ftuick time ! 8. 
 Note. — Alternate the arms without coming to posi- 
 tion. 
 
 c. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—8. 
 Note. — 1, twist ; 2, return to the front. 
 
 . d. Combine ! (Quick time.) 16. 
 
 6. Alternate trunk bending forward and bar back of shoul- 
 ders—One ! 32. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Eeturn bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
274 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4«. BAR OVER HEAD, BACK OF SHOULDERS AND RETURN 
 
 1, bar over head ; 2, bar back of shoulders ; 3^ bar over head ; 
 4, bar down to position. In swinging the bar over the head, 
 keep the elbows straight as they move through the forward 
 position. Keep the head steadily erect throughout. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH BAR OVER HEAD 
 AND BACK OF SHOULDERS 
 
 1, rise on the toes, bar over head ; 2, hold the position on the 
 toes and place the bar back of the shoulders ; 3, still remaining 
 on the toes, return the bar to the position over the head; 
 4, heels and bar down to position. 
 
 5 d. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWIST- 
 ING AND BAR VERTICALLY FOR- 
 WARD 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right 
 and raise the bar vertically for- 
 ward, with the right arm upper- 
 most ; 2, twist the trunk to the 
 left and reverse the arms ; con- 
 tinue to 15 ; 16, position. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 275 
 
 LESSON X 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar. in position — One ! Two ! 
 a. Bar forward and at chest — One ! 16. 
 
 3. I h. Rocking ! 8—8. 
 [c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 r a. Bar over head, back of shoiiklers and return — One ! 
 16. 
 
 5. 
 
 '^' h. On toes! 16. 
 .c. Combine! 32. 
 
 a. Bar vertically forward, right arm up — One! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. Quick time! 8. 
 
 c. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—8. 
 
 d. Combine ! (Quick time.) 16. 
 
 6. Alternate trunk bending forward and bar back of shoul- 
 ders—One ! 32. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
276 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 BAR FORWARD AND AT CHEST 
 
 1, swing the bar forward at arm's length ; 2, bar at chest ; 
 3, bar again forward ; 4, bar down to position. 
 
 3&. ROCKING 
 
 1, charge forward ; 2, keeping the feet in the same place on 
 the floor, straighten the forward knee, bend the rear knee and 
 throw all of the weight npon it ; 3, return to the forward charge 
 position ; continue to alternate the movements to 7 ; 8, position. 
 The trunk should be erect throughout. The transition of the 
 weight from the forward to the rear knee gives a rocking 
 motion to the body. 
 
 This exercise is very serviceable for quickening the cir- 
 culation. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF ROCKING 
 WITH BAR FORWARD AND AT 
 CHEST 
 
 1, charge forward and ex- 
 tend the bar forward ; 2, rock 
 backAvard and place the bar 
 at the chest ; 3, return to the 
 forward position ; continue to 
 15 ; 16, heels together and bar 
 down. The position for the 
 first count is illustrated in 3 c, 
 Lesson VI. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 
 
 211 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 r a. Bar forward and at chest — One ! 16. 
 
 3. b. Eocking ! 16—16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16^ — 16. 
 
 L Bar at chest — One ! 16. 
 
 4. ^ Note. — 1, bar at chest ; 2, position. 
 b. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes and bending knees. 
 
 a. Bar vertically forward, right arm up — One ! 8 — 
 8—8. 
 
 b. Quick time ! 8. 
 
 c. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—8. 
 
 d. Combine ! (Quick time.) 16. 
 a. Bar over head and trunk bending sideways, right — 
 
 One ! 8—8—16. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
278 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 6. RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 
 
 1, rise on the toes and raise the bar to tlie chest; 2, keeping 
 the heels up and the bar at the chest, bend the knees, the trunk 
 remaining erect ; 3, straighten the knees, the heels still remain- 
 ing off of the floor and the bar at the chest ; 4, heels and bar 
 down. 
 
 This exercise is admirable for cultivating erect carriage. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 
 
 279 
 
 4 a. BAR OVER HEAD AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, raise the bar over the head ; 2, bend the trunk to the side ; 
 3, trunk erect ; 4, bar down to position. 
 
 This is excellent work for the chest and waist muscles. The 
 effect upon the circulation and digestion is very stimulating. 
 
280 . School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 5. 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 a. Bar placing obliquely forward^ right — One! 8 — 8 
 
 —16. 
 h. Charge! 16—16. 
 
 Note. — Charging obliquely forward. 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 a. Bar at chest — One ! 16. 
 h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 
 a. Bar back of shoulders — One! 8. 
 h. Trunk! — forward. 16. 
 
 Note. — Bar back of shoulders with trunk bending 
 forward. 
 
 6. Bar above head and trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 
 8—8—16. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Eeturn bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin! Six times. 
 
 3 a. BAR PLACING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 
 
 1, loosen the grasp of the right hand, swing that end of the 
 bar obliquely forward the full length of the left arm, and place 
 or plant it firmly upon the floor, the bar being in a vertical 
 position ; 2, return the bar to position. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 
 
 281 
 
 3 b. CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 
 
 This differs from 23revioiis chargings only in direction, the 
 foot moving outward in a direction midway betw^een the for- 
 ward and sideways directions. The shoulders should face in 
 the direction of the charge. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING 
 AND BAR PLACING OBLIQUELY 
 FORWARD 
 
 1, charge obliquely forward 
 to the right, and place the bar 
 obliquely forward on that side ; 
 2, heels and bar to position. 
 
 bh. BAR BACK OF SHOULDERS WITH 
 TRUNK BENDING FORWARD 
 
 1, bar back of shoulders ; 2, bend 
 the trunk forward ; 3, trunk erect ; 
 4, bar to position. 
 
 This is one of the best exercises 
 in the series for correcting the posi- 
 tion of the shoulder-blades, back, 
 and chest. 
 
282 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 ' a. Bar placing obliquely forward, right !— One ! 8 — 8 
 
 —16. 
 h. Charge! 16—16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 a. Bar above head, back of shoulders and return — One ! 
 
 16. 
 6, On toes ! — up — bend — up — place. 16. (Bar at chest.) 
 c. Combine ! 
 
 [ a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
 \ h. Trunk ! — twist — bend — up — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
 Note. — Trunk twisting and bending forward. 
 
 6. Bar above head, and trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 
 8—8—16. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
 . 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Kunning. 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 
 
 283 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES WITH 
 BAR OVER HEAD, BACK OF SHOULDERS AND RETURN 
 
 1, rise on the toes, the bar over the head ; 2, bend the knees, 
 the bar back of the shoulders ; 3, straighten the knees, bar 
 over head ; 4, position. 
 
 This is a very difficult balance movement. It will be taken 
 easier and in better form if done firmly and steadily instead of 
 rapidly. Keep the head and shoulders erect. 
 
284 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 >tx 
 
 6 h. TRUNK TWISTING AND BEND- 
 ING FORWARD WITH BAR BACK 
 OF SHOULDERS 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right 
 and place the bar back of the 
 shoulders ; 2, holding this di- 
 rection, bend the trunk f orward, 
 keeping the head and trunk in 
 a straight line ; 3, trunk erect ; 
 4, trunk and bar to position. 
 
 10. BREATHING 
 
 Eaise the arms forward to a vertical position, palms facing 
 inward, while inhaling ; lower them sideways, turning the 
 palms downward while exhaling. Keep the head erect and 
 pull well upon the chest with the arm movements. 
 
3. 
 
 4. 
 
 o. 
 
 Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 285 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 1. Stretcliing. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 a. Bar over head — One ! 16. 
 h. Change ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 
 1 Note. — Reverse charging sideways with bar over 
 
 head. 
 a. Bar above head, back of shoulders and return — One ! 
 
 16. 
 h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 
 ^ c. Combine ! 16. 
 f a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
 \ b. Trunk ! — twist — bend — \ip — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 6. Bar above head, and trunk bending sideways, right ! — 
 One ! 8—8—16. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 6. REVERSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS WITH BAR OVER HEAD 
 
 1, face and charge to the right side and swing the bar over 
 the head ; 2, keeping the feet in the same relative position, 
 reverse the charge, i.e. face in the opposite direction, and bend 
 the knee that is then forward; in the transition swing the bar 
 downward, and have it over the head when facing in the 
 opposite direction ; continue to reverse the directions to 15 ; 
 16, position. Be sure to bend the knee as far as possible, 
 that the heavy thigh muscles may be brought well into action 
 and so stimulate the circulation. 
 
286 School Gymnastics 
 
 4. 
 
 LESSON XV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 a. Bar over head — One! 16 — 16. 
 h. Charge ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 
 a. Bar above head, back of shoulders and return — One ! 
 
 16. 
 h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 a. Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
 h. Trunk ! — twist — side — up— place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 Note. — Trunk twisting and bending sideways with 
 
 bar back of shoulders. 
 
 6. Bar back of shoulders and trunk bending forward — One ! 
 32. 
 
 Note. — As in Lesson XII. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-hells ~ Boys 
 
 287 
 
 5 h. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS WITH BAR BACK 
 
 OF SHOULDERS 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right and place the bar back of the 
 shoulders; 2, bend the trunk to the right side; 3, trunk erect; 
 4, face to the front, bar down. 
 
288 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 lesso:n^ XVI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 a. Bar at carry, aiming obliquely upward and returning, 
 
 right— One ! 16—16. 
 h. Charge ! — stamp — charge — place. 16 — 16. 
 
 ISToTE. — Charging obliquely forward, stamping and 
 
 returning. 
 
 Combine ! 16—16. 
 
 Bar above head, back of shoulders and return — One ! 
 
 16. 
 
 On toes ! — ^bend — up — place. 16. 
 
 Combine ! 16. 
 
 Bar back of shoulders — One ! 8. 
 
 Trunk ! — twist — side — up — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 6. Bar back of shoulders and trunk bending forward — One ! 
 32. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 
 I c. 
 
 
 ' a. 
 
 4. 
 
 h. 
 
 
 . c. 
 
 5. - 
 
 fa. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 
 
 289 
 
 3«. BAR AT CARRY. AIMING OBLIQUELY UPWARD AND 
 
 RETURNING 
 
 Ij bar at carry; 2, aim obliquely upward; 3, bar at carry; 
 4, bar in position. 
 
 3 b. CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD, STAMPING AND RETURNING 
 
 1, charge obliquely forward ; 2, give two quick stamps with 
 the forward foot, slightly extending the step with each ; 3, 
 return to the position of the charge ; 4, heels together. 
 
290 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND STAMPING WITH AIMING 
 
 OBLIQUELY UPWARD 
 
 1, charge obliquely forward, bar at carry ; 2, stamp twice 
 quickly and aim obliquely upward ; 3, charge position and bar 
 at carry ; 4, heels together and bar in position. 
 
 LESSOI^ XVII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 a. Bar at carry, aiming obliquely upward and returning, 
 
 right— One ! 16—16. 
 h. Charge ! — stamp — charge — place. 16 — 16. 
 c. Combine! 16 — 16. 
 a. Bar above head — One ! 8. 
 h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes and bending knees with 
 bar over head. 
 [ a. Trunk twisting and bending sideways with aiming to 
 
 5. ] the rear, left— One ! 16—16. 
 [b. With charging ! 16—16. 
 
 6. Bar back of shoulders and trunk bending forward — 
 One ! 32. 
 
 Note. — As in Lesson XII. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Eeturn bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Bunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 
 
 291 
 
 4 6. RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES WITH BAR OVER HEAD 
 
 1, rise on the toes, bar over head ; 2, keeping the bar above 
 the head, bend the knees ; 3, straighten the knees ; 4^ heels and 
 bar down. 
 
292 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 a, TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS WITH AIMING 
 
 TO THE REAR 
 
 1. twist the trunk to the right^ bend the trunk sideways to 
 the left and aim obliquely upward to the rear; 2, hold the 
 position ; 3, return to position ; 4^ hold. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 
 
 293 
 
 5 h, CHARGING WITH TRUNK TWISTING AND AIMING TO THE REAR 
 
 1, charge forward with the right foot, twist the trunk to the 
 aef t, bend to the right and aim upward to the rear ; 2, hold the 
 position ; 3, return to position ; 4, hold. 
 
294 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XVIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Bar in position — One ! Two ! 
 a. Aiming obliquely upward, alternately, right — One ! 
 16. 
 
 Note. — As for the second count of 3 a, Lesson XVI. 
 h. Charge ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 
 
 Note. — Reverse charging and aiming obliquely. 
 
 r a- Bar above head — One ! 8. 
 
 4. \ 
 
 [ h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 
 
 r a. Trunk twisting and bending sideways with aiming to 
 
 5. \ the rear, right — One ! 16 — 16. 
 I h. With charging ! 16—16. 
 
 ( a. Alternate trunk bending forward and bar back of 
 
 6. I shoulders — One! 16. 
 16. Combine! 8. 
 
 Bar at carry — One ! Two ! 
 
 7. Marching. (Return bar-bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Kunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Seventh Series, Bar-bells — Boys 
 
 295 
 
 3 6. REVERSE CHARGING AND AIMING OBLIQUELY 
 
 1, charge obliquely forward with the right foot, and aim 
 obliquely upward in the direction of the charge ; 2, reverse the 
 charging position by facing obliquely to the rear to the left 
 side, left knee bent, and swing the wand downward and upward 
 to the oblique upward aiming, in the direction of the last charge ; 
 continue to reverse the directions to 15; 16, position. 
 
296 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 6 a. TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND BAR BACK OF SHOULDERS, 
 
 ALTERNATELY 
 
 1, bend the trunk forward^ the bar down in front at arm's 
 length ; 2, trunk erect ; 3, bar back of shoulders ; 4, bar to 
 position. In bending the trunk forward keep the back straight 
 and the head in line with it. 
 
 6 6. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND BAR BACK 
 
 OF SHOULDERS 
 
 1, bend the trunk forward and place the bar back of the 
 shoulders, as shown in the illustration to 5 h, Lesson XII; 
 2, trunk erect and bar down to position. 
 
Eighth Series 
 
 Sixth Year, Girls 
 Iron Grace Hoops wound with Tape — li pounds 
 
 LESSON I 
 
 Note. — For stretching, marching, floor formation, effects of 
 exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position for work — Place ! 
 a. Hoop forward — One ! 8. 
 
 3. \ h. Hoop at chest — One ! 8. 
 G. Alternate ! 16. 
 
 a. Point step forward, alternately, right — One ! 16. 
 h. Backward! 16. 
 
 Note. — Point step backward. 
 Ic. With hoop! 32. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 5. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to j)lace.) 
 
 6. Stretching. 
 
 297 
 
298 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 HOOP AT CARRY 
 
 While marching to and from 
 position on the floor, the hoop 
 should be carried over the right 
 shoulder, as in the accompanying 
 illustration. 
 
 HOOP IN POSITION FOR WORK 
 
 Swing the hoop forward at arm's 
 length, grasp it with both hands, 
 and lower the arms at full length 
 in front, so that the hoop rests 
 against the body in a vertical posi- 
 tion. To return the hoop to carry, 
 reverse this movement. 
 
Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 299 
 
 3«. HOOP FORWARD 
 
 1, raise the hoop forward at arm's length; 2, return the 
 hoop to position. Keep the head erect. 
 
 Zb. HOOP AT CHEST 
 
 1, bend the elbows and place the hoop vertically in front of 
 the chest and face, so that it forms a frame for the latter ; 
 2, position. In raising the hoop for this exercise, the shoulder- 
 blades should be drawn together, so that they may be flattened 
 and the chest expanded; the chin should be held well in. 
 
 3 c. HOOP FORWARD AND AT CHEST 
 
 1, raise the hoop forward; 2, hoop in position; 3, hoop at 
 chest; 4, position. 
 
 4 a. POINT STEP FORWARD 
 
 1, touch the toe of the right foot forward as far as can be 
 done without transferring any weight to it ; the knee and in- 
 step should be strongly stretched ; 2, heels together. 
 
 This is a balance exercise, and cultivates firm, erect 
 carriage. 
 
 4&. POINT STEP BACKWARD 
 
 This is the same as the point step forward, except in direc- 
 tion. The stretching should be from the waist, so as to in- 
 crease the curve of the lower back. 
 
300 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
 FOKWARD AND BACKWARD WITH 
 HOOP FORWARD AND AT CHEST 
 
 1, point step forward with the 
 right foot, and hoop forward; 
 2j foot and hoop in position; 
 
 3, the same with the left foot; 
 
 4, position ; 5, point step back- 
 ward with the right foot, and 
 hoop at chest ; 6, position ; 7, the 
 same with the left foot ; 8, posi- 
 tion. 
 
Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls oOl 
 
 LESSON II 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 a. Aiming sideways right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 h. Foot: 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — Point step sideways. 
 
 c. Alternate! 16—16. 
 
 d. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 a.* Hoop at chest — One ! 8. 
 h. On toes! 8. 
 
 Note. — Eising on toes, 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 5. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 
 
 6. Stretching. 
 
 7. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3. 
 
 3 a. AIMING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, extend the right arm sideways at full length at shoulder 
 levelj the hoop resting vertically against the arm, the left 
 elbow high; pull hard upon the chest; the position is that 
 of aiming with a bow and arrow ; turn the head and look in 
 the direction of the aiming ; 2, hoop down to position. 
 
 Zh. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 
 
 This is the same as the previous point steps except in direc- 
 tion. Be sure that the weight remains firmly on the station- 
 ary foot; so as to cultivate steady poise. 
 
302 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 c. ALTERNATE POINT 
 STEP AND AIMING 
 SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, aim to the right 
 side; 2, position; 3, 
 point step to the right 
 side ; 4, position. 
 
 Zd. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND AIMING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step and aiming simultaneously to the right side ; 
 2, foot and hoop to position. 
 
 4 6. RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, rise on the toes as high as possible ; 2, heels down, with- 
 out noise or jarring. The weight should remain on the forward 
 part of the foot after the heels are lowered. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND HOOP AT CHEST 
 
 1, rise on the toes and raise the hoop to the chest ; 2, hoop 
 and heels down. 
 
 BREATHING 
 
 Eaise the arms sideways to shoulder level while inhaling ; 
 lower them to position while exhaling. 
 
Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 
 
 303 
 
 3. \ 
 
 4. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 
 LESSON III 
 Stretching. 
 Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 Hoop over head — One ! 16. 
 Foot !— forward. 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — Point step forward. 
 Combine ! 16. 
 
 Aiming sideways, right — One ! 
 Trunk !— twist. 8—8—8. 
 Note. — Trunk twisting. 
 Combine ! 16. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 Forward — - March ! (Eeturn 
 
 hoops to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Running. 
 
 Note. — See Explanatory 
 Note 7. 
 Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 a. 
 h. 
 
 c. 
 
 3 a. HOOP OVER HEAD 
 
 1, raise the hoop horizontally over 
 the head, the arms fully extended ; 
 bend the head backward and look 
 up through the hoop ; 2, hoop down 
 to position. Pull upon the chest 
 with the arms. Keep the chest well 
 forward and avoid a sway-back 
 position. 
 
 8—8. 
 
304 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP FORWARD AND HOOP OVER HEAD 
 
 1, point step forward and hoop over head ; 2, hoop and foot 
 to position. 
 
 4&. TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, keeping the feet firmly in position, twist or rotate the 
 trunk to the side as far as possible, so as to create a strong 
 pressure upon the internal organs ; the chest should be thrown 
 well forw^ard in this movement; the head should move with 
 the trunk, but no farther ; 2, return to position. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND AIMING 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right side, and aim to the rear on 
 the same side ; 2, trunk and hoop to position. In this combi- 
 nation the head should turn so as to follow the direction of 
 the aiming. 
 
3. 
 
 Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 305 
 
 LESSON IV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 ' a. Hoop above and behind head — One ! 16. 
 
 b. Foot ! — forward — backward — forward — place. 16 — 
 16. 
 
 Note. — Point step forward, backward, forward, 
 and place. 
 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 Hoop back of head — Place ! 
 
 4. Alternate point step and walking forward, right — One! 
 16—16—16. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 r a. Aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 5. I h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—8. 
 [ c. Combine — 16. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (K/Cturn hoops to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. HOOP ABOVE AND BEHIND HEAD 
 
 1, raise the hoojj horizontally over the head, as in the first 
 exercise of the previous lesson ; 2, keeping the head perfectly 
 still, with the chin drawn in, lower the hoop to a vertical posi- 
 tion behind the shoulders, so that the upper rim of it touches 
 the head ; the hoop may have to slip through the hands some- 
 what to allow it to touch the head ; 3, hoop again in the hori- 
 zontal position over the head ; 4, hoop to position. 
 
 This is one of the best exercises for the chest and shoulder- 
 blades. 
 
306 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 6. POINT STEP FOKWARD AND BACKWARD 
 
 1, point ste^D forward ; 2, point step backward ; 3, point step 
 again forward; 4, heels together. The shoulders should not 
 move in this exercise, the weight remaining firmly on the 
 stationary foot. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
 FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
 WITH HOOP ABOVE AND BE- 
 HIND HEAD 
 
 1, point step forward with 
 the right foot, and the hoop 
 horizontally over the head ; 
 2, point step backward, and hoop 
 behind the head ; 3, point step 
 forward, and hoop over the 
 head ; 4, foot and hoop to posi- 
 tion. 
 
 4. ALTERNATE POINT STEP AND WALKING FORWARD 
 
 1, point step forward with the right foot ; 2, heels together ; 
 3, 4, the same with the left foot; 6, 6, 7, walk forward; 
 8, heels together. Eepeat, walking backward to place. Ee- 
 peat, facing to the right on the first count, walking in that 
 direction and back to place, and then to the left and to place. 
 The entire exercise may be repeated if time allows. 
 
Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 307 
 
 LESSON V 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 r a. Hoop above and behind head — One ! 16. 
 3^ \h. Foot ! — forward — backward — forward — place. 16 — 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 Hoop back of head — Place ! 
 a. Alternate point step and walking forward, right — 
 
 One! 
 h. With aiming ! Once in each direction. 
 
 Note. — Aim sideways Avith the point step on the 
 same side as the moving foot, and place the hoop back 
 of the head for walking. 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 a. Hoop forward — One ! 8. 
 
 Note. — As in 3 a, Lesson I. 
 
 5. \ h. Trunk !— bend. 8—8—8. 
 Note. — Trunk bending sideways. 
 
 !. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Punning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
308 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 ft. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, bend the trunk from the waist directly to the side, the 
 head remaining in line with the trunk ; 2, return to the erect 
 position. 
 
 This exercise, by means of the pressure exerted upon the 
 internal organs, quickens the circulation and digestion. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK 
 BENDING SIDEWAYS AND 
 HOOP FORWARD 
 
 1, raise the hoop for- 
 ward ; 2, keeping the hoop 
 in this position, bend the 
 trunk to the side ; 3, trunk 
 erect; 4, hoop down to 
 position. On the last eight 
 counts alternate the sides, 
 raising the hoop as the 
 trunk bends and return- 
 ing it to position as the 
 trunk is raised. 
 
 9. BREATHING 
 
 Eaise the arms sideways to a vertical position while inhal- 
 ing; arms down to position while exhaling. 
 
6. 
 
 Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls .'>()9 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place. 
 a. Aiming obliquely downward, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 5. Foot!— side. 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — Point step sideways. 
 . c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Hoop back of head — Place ! 
 f a. Alternate point step and walking forward, right — 
 4. ] One! 16—16—16. 
 
 [h. With aiming! 16—16—16. 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 Hoop forward — One 1 8. 
 h. Trunk!— bend. 8—8. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place I 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 f a 
 \ h 
 
 3 a. AIMING OBLIQUELY DOWNWARD 
 
 1, aim obliquely downward at the side, the hoop resting on 
 the arm ; turn the head and look down in the direction of the 
 aiming ; 2, hoop in position. 
 
310 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP 
 SIDEWAYS AND AIMING OB- 
 LIQUELY DOWNWAKD 
 
 1, point step sideways, with a 
 slight bend at the waist, and aim 
 obliquely downward; turn the 
 head and look down at the foot ; 
 2, foot and hoop to position. 
 
Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 311 
 
 LESSON VII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 • f a. Aiming obliquely downward, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 3. j h. Foot !— side. 8—8—16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 r a. Hoop over shoulders — One ! 16. 
 
 4. \b. Balance step — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 i c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 a. Hoop over head — One ! 8. 
 h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8. 
 c. Combine !— 16 or 32. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 6. Forward— March ! (Return hoops to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin! Six times. 
 
 5. 
 
 4«. HOOP OVER SHOULDERS 
 
 1, raise the hoop above the head at arm's length, bend the 
 elbows and lower the hoop over the head to shoulder level; 
 2, return the hoop to position, being sure to extend the arms 
 upward to their full length in the transition, with a strong 
 pull upon the chest. The head should remain firmly erect> 
 throughout. 
 
 4 6. BALANCE STEP 
 
 1, cross the right foot over in front of the left one, and rise 
 on the toes of both feet; the knee of the moving foot should 
 not bend, and the shoulders should remain squarely to the front ; 
 2, heels together. 
 
 Like all balance exercises, this is admirable for cultivating a 
 firm poise and upright carriage. 
 
312 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF BALANCE STEP 
 AND HOOP OVER SHOULDERS 
 
 1, balance step with the right 
 foot and hoop over the shoulders ; 
 2, position. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWIST- 
 ING AND HOOP OVER HEAD 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the side and 
 raise the hoop horizontally over 
 the head, at arm's length ; 2, posi- 
 tion. 
 
o 
 
 3. 
 
 Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 31* 
 
 LESSON VIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 a. Hoop forward — One ! 16. 
 h. Charge! 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — Charging forward, 
 c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 r a. Hoop over shoulders — One ! 16. 
 
 4. ] h. Balance ! 8—8—16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 r a. Hoop over head — One ! 8. 
 
 5. \ b. Trunk !— twist. 8—8. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 6. Hoop over shoulders and trunk bending sideways^ right — 
 One ! 32. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 6. CHARGING FORWARD 
 
 1, take a long step forward with the right foot, bend the right 
 knee and throw all of the weight upon it ; the trunk should be 
 held erect, and the shoulders should face to the front ; the rear 
 heel should remain upon the floor and the rear knee should be 
 stiff ; 2, recover position without scuffing the feet over the floor. 
 The bend of the forward knee should be enough to bring the 
 large muscular groups of the thigh well into action^ and so 
 quicken the circulation. 
 
314 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 2 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING 
 AND RAISING HOOP FORWARD 
 
 1^ charge forward and raise 
 the hoop forward at arm's 
 length ; 2, position. 
 
 6. HOOP OVER SHOULDERS AND 
 TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, hoop over the shoulders 
 as with the balance step ; 
 
 2, bend the trunk to the side ; 
 
 3, trunk erect ; 4, hoop down 
 to position. 
 
Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 315 
 
 LESSON IX 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place! 
 
 a. Hoop forward — One ! 16. 
 
 h. Charge! 8—8—16. 
 Ic. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 ( a. Hoop swinging sideways^ right — One ! 16. 
 
 4. -j h. Alternate balance! 16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 f a. Hoop above head — One ! 8. 
 
 5. ] h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 6. Hoop over shoulders and trunk bending sideways, right — 
 One ! 32. 
 
 Hoop at carry ^ — Place ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
316 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 a. HOOP SWINGING SIDEWAYS 
 
 In two counts swing the hoop across the front of the body to 
 an oblique upward position at the side, the hoop itself held ver- 
 tically; on the next two counts swing the hoop down, across, 
 and up to the other side. Turn the head so as to look at the 
 hoop. 
 
 4 6. ALTERNATE BALANCE 
 
 This is the same as the balance step in previous lessons, ex- 
 cept that the feet are alternated. 1, balance step with the 
 right foot ; 2, heels together; 3, balance step with the left foot; 
 4, heels together. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF ALTER- 
 NATE BALANCE STEP AND 
 HOOP SWINGING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, balance step with the 
 right foot, crossing it toAvard 
 the left, and swinging the hoop 
 up on the left side; 2, heels 
 together and hoop down; 3, 
 balance step with the left foot 
 toward the right, and swing 
 the hoop up on the right side ; 
 continue to alternate to 15; 
 16, position. The movement 
 should be a continuous swing 
 from one side to the other, 
 without any pause or jerk in 
 the transition. 
 
3. 
 
 Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 317 
 
 LESSON X 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facing's. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — I^hice ! 
 a. Hoop back of shoulder^ right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 h. Foot!— back. 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — Point step obliquely backward. 
 c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 a. Hoop swinging sideways, right — One ! 16. 
 'i h. Alternate balance ! 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 a. Hoop back of head — One ! 16. 
 
 5. ] h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 6. Hoop over shoulders and trunk bending sideways, right — 
 One ! 32. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Eunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. HOOP BACK OF SHOULDER 
 
 This is like the aiming sideways, except that the hoop is back 
 of the extended arm instead of in front of it. The opposite 
 arm will be back of the head. Turn the head to look backward 
 through the hoop. 
 
 This exercise is admirable for flattening the shoulder-blades 
 and expanding the chest. 
 
 3&. POINT STEP OBLIQUELY BACKWARD 
 
 This differs from the other point steps only in direction. 
 The toe should touch at a point midway between a direct back- 
 
318 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 ward and a sideways position. Turn the head and look back- 
 ward over the shoulder at the moving foot. There should be 
 no bend at the waist or turning of the shoulders. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT 
 STEP OBLIQUELY BACK- 
 WARD AND HOOP BACK 
 OF SHOULDER 
 
 1, point step obliquely 
 backward with the right 
 foot and aim sideways 
 back of the right shoul- 
 der ; look through the 
 hoop at the foot ; 2, posi- 
 tion. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWIST- 
 ING AND HOOP BACK OF HEAD 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the side and 
 place the hoop back of the head, 
 drawing the chin in; stretch the 
 arms fully upward in the transi- 
 tion; 2, position. 
 
 This §xercise is excellent for the 
 shoulders and chest, as well as for 
 its stimulating effect upon the cir- 
 culation and digestion. 
 
Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 319 
 
 LESSON* XI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 r a. Hoop back of shoulder, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 3. \ b. Foot !— back. 8—8—16. 
 [ c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 a. Hoop swinging sideways, right — One ! 16. 
 
 b. Alternate balance ! 16. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 ^ (a. Hoop under arm, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 I b. Trunk forward ! 16. 
 
 ' a. Hoop back of head — One ! 16. 
 
 6. j b. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
320 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 h. TRUNK BENDING OBLIQUELY 
 FORWARD WITH HOOP UNDER 
 ARM 
 
 1, place the hoop verti- 
 cally under the arm at the 
 side, bend the trunk obliquely 
 forward, and look through 
 the hoop ; 2, position. 
 
 5 a. HOOP UNDER ARM 
 
 1, raise the arm outward at 
 the side and place the hoop 
 vertically under it; 2, hoop 
 in position. 
 
Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 321 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 a. Hoop over head — One ! 16. 
 h. Charge! 8—8. 
 1 Note. — Charging obliquely forward. 
 
 t c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 r a. Hoop swinging obliquely forward, right — One ! 8 — 8 
 4. ^ h. Balance ! — double time. 16. 
 
 5. 
 
 L c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 a. Hoop under arm, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 h. With bending ! 16. 
 
 r a. Hoop back of head — One ! 16. 
 
 6. \ b. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
322 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 6. CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 
 
 This differs from the charging forward only in the direction, 
 which should be midway between the front and side. The 
 shoulders should face in the direction of the charge. Be sure 
 that the step is long enough to admit of a bend of the knee 
 sufficient to stimulate the circulation through the action of the 
 thigh muscles. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD AND 
 
 HOOP OVER HEAD 
 
 1, charge obliquely forward . and raise the hoop over the 
 head ; bend the head backward and look up through the hoop ; 
 
 2, position. 
 
 4 a. HOOP SWINGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 
 
 1, swing the hoop obliquely upward in front, holding it hori- 
 zontally ; 2, hoop down and up to the opposite side, still in 
 the horizontal position. The head should follow the move- 
 ment of the hoop. 
 
 4 h. OBLIQUE BALANCE STEP, IN DOUBLE TIME 
 
 This is the alternate balance step taken in double time, and 
 with a longer step, the foot being placed obliquely forward on 
 the opposite side from its normal position. 1, balance step to 
 the right ; 2, heels together and balance step to the left ; 
 
 3, heels together and balance step to the right, etc. ; 16, position. 
 In this oblique balance step, the shoulders should face obliquely 
 in the direction of the step. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF BALANCE STEP IN DOUBLE TIME AND 
 HOOP SWINGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 
 
 1, a long balance step to the left with right foot, and swing 
 the hoop horizontally upward on the left side ; 2, reverse the 
 position ; continue to 15 ; 16, position. 
 
Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 323 
 
 LESSON XIIT 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 C a. Hoop over head — One ! 16. 
 
 3. ] h. Charge ! 8—8—16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 r a. Hoop swinging obliquely forward, right — One! 16. 
 
 4. ] b. Balance ! ^—S, 
 
 i c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 r a. Hoop under arm — One ! 8 — 8. 
 \h. With bending! 16. 
 a. Hoop back of head — One ! 8. 
 h. Trunk ! — sideways. 32. 
 
 Note. — Trunk bending sideways. 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 7. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
324 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 6 6. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 WITH HOOP BACK OF HEAD 
 
 1, hoop back of the head; 
 
 2, bend the trunk to the side ; 
 
 3, trunk erect; 4, hoop in posi- 
 tion. Alternate the sides. 
 
 This exercise has a stimulat- 
 ing effect upon the digestive 
 organs and the circulation if 
 the bend is considerable. It is 
 excellent for the chest and 
 shoulder-blades. 
 
Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 325 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 a. Hoop obliquely upward and downward — One ! 16. 
 
 3. h. Rocking! 16—16. 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 r a. Hoop swinging obliquely forward — One ! 16. 
 
 4. ^ h. Balance ! 8—8. 
 
 I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 ^ I a. Hoop back of head — One ! 8. 
 I h. Trunk ! — sideways. 32. 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. HOOP OBLIQUELY UPWARD AND DOWNWARD 
 
 1, raise the hoop obliquely forward and upward in a hori- 
 zontal position; 2, hold the position; 3, lower the hoop to 
 a position obliquely downward, the outer edge tipped below 
 the horizontal ; continue to 15 ; 16, position. Bend the head 
 so as to look through the hoop in both the upward and down- 
 ward positions. 
 
326 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 Zh. ROCKING 
 
 1^ charge forward; 2, without moving the feet, straighten 
 the knees, transfer the weight to the rear foot and bend the 
 rear knee; 3, rock forward to the charge position again; 
 continue to alternate to 15 ; 16, position. Bend the knee as 
 much as possible. 
 
 ^ T^^ ■^?sC^r=''5S«*'?^^ 3W. '^■"'^^ 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF ROCKING WITH HOOP OBLIQUELY UPWARD 
 
 AND DOWNWARD 
 
 1, charge forward, and raise the hoop obliquely forward in 
 the horizontal position; look up through the hoop; 2, rock 
 backward, lower the hoop obliquely downward, the outer rim 
 touching the forward ankle, and look down at that point ; 
 16, position. 
 
 I 
 
3. 
 
 Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 327 
 
 LESSON XV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 a. Hoop obliquely upward and downward — One ! 16 — 16, 
 h. Rocking! 16—16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 a. Hoop swinging sideways, right — One ! 16. 
 
 Note. — As in Lesson IX. 
 h. Swaying and bending, right — One ! 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 C a. Hoop back of head — One ! 16. 
 
 5. ] h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
 [ c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4 6. SWAYING AND BENDING 
 
 1, step to the right side with the weight on the right foot; 
 the left toe should touch as in the point step to the left side ; 
 bend slightly at the waist and look down at the left foot; 
 2, hold the position ; 3, rise on the toes and reverse the posi- 
 tion by transferring the weight to the left foot, and looking 
 down at the right; 4, hold the position; continue to 15; 
 16, position. 
 
328 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF SWAYING AND BENDING WITH HOOP 
 SWINGING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, step to the right, swing the hoop up to the right side, and 
 bend and look down toward the left foot ; 2, hold the position ; 
 3, reverse ; 4, hold ; continue to 15 ; 16, position. 
 
 This exercise is excellent for the waist muscles and for cul- 
 tivating freedom and grace of movement. 
 
 9. BREATHING 
 
 Eaise arms forward to the vertical position while inhaling ; 
 lower them sideways Avhile exhaling. 
 
Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 329 
 
 LESSON XVI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 a. Hoop forward and back of head — One ! 16. 
 h. Charge ! — foot back. 16 — 16. 
 
 ISToTE. — Charging forward and point step backward. 
 ^ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 r a. Hoop swinging sideways, right — One ! 16. 
 h. Swaying! 16. 
 c. Combine! 32. 
 
 a. Aiming sideways, hoop over head and return, right — 
 One ! 16—16. 
 
 5. \ b. Facing and trunk bending sideways, right — One! 
 16—16. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16—16. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3 a. HOOP FORWARD AND BACK OF HEAD 
 
 1, raise the hoop forward at arm's length ; 2, hold the posi- 
 tion ; 3, hoop vertical, back of the head ; 4, hold ; 5, hoop for- 
 ward again ; 6, hold ; 7, hoop back of head ; 8, hold ; 9, hoop 
 forward; 10, hold; alternate these two movements to 15; 
 16, position. 
 
 3&. CHARGING FORWARD AND POINT STEP BACKWARD 
 
 1, charge forward ; 2, hold the position ; 3, point step back- 
 ward ; 4, hold the position ; alternate the two movements to 
 15 ; 16, position. 
 
330 
 
 School Gvmnastics 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND POINT STEP 
 BACKWARD, WITH HOOP FORWARD AND BACK OF HEAD 
 
 1, charge forward and raise the hoop forward at arm's 
 length ; 2, hold the position ; 3, point step backward and hoop 
 back of head ; 4, hold the position ; alternate the movements 
 to 15 ; 16, position. 
 
 ba. AIMING SIDEWAYS AND HOOP OVER HEAD 
 
 1, aim to the side, the hoop vertical ; 2, hoop horizontal over 
 the head ; 3, aim to the side ; 4, position. Pull well upon the 
 chest. ■ 
 
 6 6. FACING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, face to the right ; 2, bend the trunk to the right side ; 
 3, trunk erect ; 4, face the front. 
 
 be. COMBINATION OF FACING 
 AND TRUNK BENDING SIDE- 
 WAYS WITH AIMING SIDE- 
 WAYS AND HOOP OVER HEAD 
 
 1, face and aim to the right 
 side ; 2, raise the hoop over 
 head and bend the trunk to 
 the right ; 3 as 1 ; 4, position. 
 
 This exercise is particu- 
 larly effective for strengthen- 
 ing the muscles of the trunk 
 around the waist. 
 
Eighth Series J Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 331 
 
 5. 
 
 LESSON XVII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marchinsr. 
 
 ^&" 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 -. Hoop forward and back of head — One ! 16. 
 . Charge !— back. 16—16. 
 . Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 ,. Hoop swinging sideways, right — One ! 16. 
 . Swaying with reverse bending, right — One ! 32. 
 . Combine! 32. 
 
 ,. Aiming sideways, hoop over head and return, right- 
 One ! 16—16. 
 . Face!— bend. 16—16. 
 . Combine! 16—16. 
 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 6. Forward — March ! (Return hoops to place.) 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4 6. SWAYING WITH REVERSE BENDING 
 
 1, sway to the right as in the previous swaying exercise, and 
 look down at the left foot ; 2, hold the position ; 3, keeping 
 the weight on the right foot, bend at the waist to the right 
 side, and look up to the left ; 4, hold ; 5, return to the previous 
 position ; 6, hold ; 7, sway to the opposite side and repeat the 
 movements there ; come to position on the last count. 
 
332 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF SWAYING WITH REVERSE BENDING AND 
 HOOP SWINGING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, step to the right, swing the hoop up to that side and look 
 down at the left foot ; 2, hold the position ; 3, bend the trunk 
 to the right side, swing the hoop up to the left side, and look 
 up at it ; 4, hold the position ; 5, return to the previous 
 position ; 6, hold ; 7, transfer the weight to the opposite foot, 
 and repeat the movements on that side ; position on the last 
 count. 
 
 This exercise is excellent for cultivating strength and sup- 
 pleness of the waist muscles. 
 
Eighth Series, Iron Grace Hoops — Girls 333 
 
 LESSON XYIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Hoop in position — Place ! 
 r a. Hoop forward and back of head — One ! 16. 
 
 3. \ b. Charge !— back. 16—16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 [ a. Hoop swinging sideways^ right — One ! 16. 
 
 4. -! b. Swaying ! — bend — reverse — place. 16 — 16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 r a. Hoop aiming sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 5. \ b. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
 
 I c. Combine with charging ! 16 — 16 — 32. 
 Hoop at carry — Place ! 
 
 6. Forward — March ! (Eeturn hoops to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
334 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 be. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND TRUNK TWISTING WITH 
 HOOP AIMING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, charge forward with the left foot, at the same time twist- 
 ing the trunk to the right and aiming backward to the right ; 
 2, hold the position ; 3, position ; 4^ hold. 
 
Ninth Series 
 
 Seventh Year, Boys and Girls 
 Indian Clubs, 1 pound 
 
 LESSOR I 
 
 Note. — For stretching, tactics, floor formation, effects of 
 exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 a. Full circle sideways, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. Foot !— side— place. 16—16. 
 
 Note. — Point step sideways. 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 4. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 335 
 
336 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 CLUBS IN POSITION FOE WORK 
 
 Grasp the handle of the clubs 
 around the ball, bend the fore- 
 arm forward so that it forms a 
 slightly acute angle with the 
 upper arm, and hold the clubs 
 upright. This is the ^^rest 
 position" of the clubs in the 
 following exercise. 
 
 Za. FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, from the rest position straighten the arm upward, and 
 swing the club outward and downward at full length to the 
 side, with a strong pull upon the chest, across the front of the 
 body, and up on the other side, describing a circle ; 2, lower 
 the club to rest position. Keep the shoulders squarely to the 
 front; avoid any swaying of the body. The head should be 
 held firmly erect. 
 
 The full arm circle works u]3on the front and sides of the 
 chest, upon the top of the shoulder, the back, and the shoulder- 
 blades. 
 
 The erect carriage of head and chest is a crucial feature in all 
 of the club sivinging, and should he strenuously insisted upon. 
 There should be no jerking in the movement. 
 
 See illustration in Lesson II. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 337 
 
 Zh. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, touch the side of the toe directly to the side, stretching 
 the instep and knee as straight as possible ; 2, heels together. 
 The weight should remain firmly on the stationary foot, and 
 the shoulders should be turned squarely to the front. Keep 
 the knees stiff. The foot should be lifted and touched lightly, 
 without scuffing. 
 
 This exercise cultivates steadiness and erectness of carriage. 
 
 Rest the clubs on the shoulders while taking the point step. 
 Unless otherwise specified, this position of the clubs will be 
 understood in succeeding series whenever another part of the 
 body is working alone. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND FULL CIKCLE 
 
 SIDEWAYS 
 
338 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON II 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 f a. Full circle forward, both — Start ! 16. 
 I h. Foot !— forward. 16—16. 
 I ISToTE. — Point step forward. 
 
 ic. Combine! 16—16. 
 a. Full circle sideways, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 h. On toes! 16. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes. 
 G. Combine ! 16. 
 
 a. Full circle, both right — Start ! 8 — 8. 
 h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8. 
 
 Note. — Trunk twisting. 
 c. Combine ! 16—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4. 
 
 6. 
 
 3 a. FULL CIRCLE FORWARD 
 
 1, straighten the arm and swing the clubs forward, down- 
 ward, and backward at the side to describe a full circle at the 
 side of the body ; 2, rest. Keep the head erect and the shoul- 
 ders squarely to the front. Unless these points of posture are 
 closely observed, this exercise may be detrimental to good 
 position. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Roys and Girls 339 
 
 3^. POINT STEP FORWARD 
 
 1, extend the foot forward and touch the toe on a line 
 directly forward of the position from which it started ; 2, heels 
 together. Keep the shoul- 
 ders (upper part of the 
 body) perfectly still and 
 the knees stiff. Do not 
 drag or scuff the foot 
 over the floor. The weight 
 should remain entirely on 
 the stationary foot, that 
 the exercise may serve as 
 a balance movement, culti- 
 vating steady poise of body. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT 
 STEP AND FULL CIRCLE 
 FORWARD 
 
 1, point step forward and 
 both clubs forward in the 
 full circle ; 2, heels together 
 and clubs at rest. Alter- 
 nate the feet in this com- 
 bination. 
 
340 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 6. RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, rise high on the toes ; 2, heels down, quietly, and without 
 jarring. There should be no swaying backward upon the heels 
 as these touch the floor. The normal standing position should 
 have the weight so far forward that no forward movement is 
 necessary for rising on the toes. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND FULL CIRCLE 
 
 SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, rise on the toes and swing the clubs in the full circle side- 
 ways ; 2, heels down and clubs at rest. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 341 
 
 5 6. TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, twist or rotate the trunk to the side far enough to make a 
 strong pressure upon the internal organs ; 2, return to the for- 
 ward position. The movement should be from the ankles, the 
 feet remaining firmly in place and fiat upon the fioor. The 
 head should turn with the trunk, but no farther. There should 
 be no sideways bending of the trunk at the waist. Alternate 
 the direction on the last eight counts. The clubs should be 
 upon the shoulders during this exercise. 
 
 be. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWIST- 
 ING AND FULL CIRCLE 
 
 1, swing both 
 side in the full 
 the trunk to the 
 oblique direction 
 bring the clubs to 
 3, start the clubs 
 twist the trunk 
 clubs at rest. 
 
 clubs to the left 
 circle and twist 
 
 right; 2, hold the 
 
 of the trunk and 
 the rest position; 
 to the right and 
 
 to the front; 4, 
 
 8. BREATHING 
 
 While inhaling, raise the arms sideways to shoulder level; 
 while exhaling, lower the arms to position. The breathing 
 should be much slower and deeper than the normal. 
 
342 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON III 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Chibs in position — Place ! 
 a. Alternate full and hand circle forward, right — Start ! 
 8—8—16. 
 
 3. I b. Charge! 16—16. 
 
 I Note. — Charging forward. 
 
 [c. Combine! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Full circle sideways, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 4. \ b. On toes ! 16. 
 
 [ c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 f a. Alternate full circle and pendulum sideways, both right 
 
 I —Start ! 16. 
 
 5. \ b. Trunk !— twist. 16. 
 
 I Note. — Trunk twisting and holding. 
 
 [ c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Running. 
 
 Note. — See Reference Note 7. 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. HAND CIRCLE rORWARD 
 
 The hand circle is made entirely from the wrist, which is the 
 centre of the circle. Drop the club forward and describe with 
 it a circle on a vertical plane inside of the forearm. 1, full 
 circle forward; 2, hand circle forward; alternate to 7; come to 
 the rest position on the last count. 
 
 3 b. CHARGING FORWARD 
 
 1, step forward and bend the forward knee, both feet flat 
 upon the floor, the rear knee straight, and all of the weight 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 343 
 
 upon the forward foot; 2, heels together. Keep the trunk of 
 the body upright and the shouklers squarely to the front. 
 
 This exercise should bring into strong action the muscles of 
 the calf and thigh, and through them quicken effectively the 
 circulation. Unless the knees are bent as far as possible, this 
 result will not be obtained. 
 
 3r. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD WITH ALTERNATE 
 FULL AND HAND CIRCLE FORWARD 
 
 1, charge forward, and swing both clubs in a full circle for- 
 ward; 2, hold the charge position and make the hand circle 
 forward ; 3, heels together and full circle forward ; 4, hokl the 
 position for the hand circle. 
 
344 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 last count. 
 
 6 a. ALTERNATE FULL 
 CIRCLE AND PENDU- 
 LUM SIDEWAYS 
 
 In the pendulum 
 swing the clubs de- 
 scribe the lower half 
 of the full circle across 
 the front of the body, 
 rising only to the 
 shoulder level. 
 
 1, full circle with 
 both clubs to the right ; 
 2, continue the full 
 circle to a pendulum 
 swing, pausing at 
 shoulder level on the 
 left sidfe; 3, full circle 
 to the right; 4, pen- 
 - ^ dulum to the left; 
 
 clubs at rest on the 
 Keep the chest high and the chin drawn in. 
 
 5 6. TRUNK TWISTING AND HOLDING 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right ; 2, hold the position ; 3, twist 
 to the left; 4, hold ; come to position on 16. The clubs should 
 rest upon the shoulders throughout. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING WITH FULL CIRCLE AND 
 
 PENDULUM SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, swing the clubs in a full circle to the left, and twist the 
 trunk to the right; 2, hold the position of the trunk while the 
 clubs take the pendulum swing to the right; 3, clubs in full 
 circle to the right and twist the trunk to the left ; 4, hold the 
 position for pendulum swing to the left. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 345 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSOK IV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 r a. Alternate full and hand circle forward, both — Start ! 
 J 16. 
 
 I h. Charge ! 16—16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 r a. straightening clubs forward, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — ^8. 
 h. On toes ! 16. 
 
 ISToTE. — Rising on toes. 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 [ a. Alternate full circle and pendulum sideways, both 
 
 right— Start ! 16. 
 i h. Trunk!— twist. 16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Running. 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4. \ 
 
 5. < 
 
346 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 a. STRAIGHTENING CLUBS FORWARD 
 
 1, from the rest position, straighten the arm and club directly 
 forward in one continuous line ; 2, return to the rest position. 
 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND STRAIGHTENING 
 
 CLUBS FORWARD 
 
 1, rise on the toes and straighten the clubs forward ; 2, heels 
 down and clubs in rest position. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls ^47 
 
 LESSON V 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 r a. Alternate hand and full circle forward, both — Start ! 
 I 16. 
 
 3. \ h. Foot !— Bend— up— bend— up. 16. 
 
 Note. — Stepping and bending forward. 
 . c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 r a. Straightening clubs forward, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 4. ^ h. On toes ! 16. 
 
 L c. * Combine ! 16. 
 
 r a. Alternate full circle and pendulum sideways, both 
 right— Start ! 16. 
 h. Trunk !— twist. 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Clubs on shoulders — Place ! 
 
 6. Marching. (Keturn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Kunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six timeSo 
 
 5. \ 
 
348 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 a. ALTERNATE HAND AND FULL CIRCLE FORWARD 
 
 This is like the first exercise in the previous lesson, except 
 in the order of the alternation, which is reversed. 
 
 1, hand circle forward ; 2, full circle forward ; rest position 
 on the last count. 
 
 3 6. STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD 
 
 1, step forward, both feet flat upon the floor, and the weight 
 equal ; 2, bend the forward knee to the charging position j 
 3, straighten the forward knee again, weight equal ; 4, bend as 
 in 2 ; continue to alternate the bending and straightening of the 
 forward knee to 7; 8, heels together and clubs at rest. The step 
 should be long enough to admit of a bend in the knee suflELcient 
 to call into action the large thigh muscles, and so stimulate the 
 circulation. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND BENDING FORWARD WITH 
 ALTERNATE HAND AND FULL CIRCLE FORWARD ^ 
 
 1, hand circle and stepping forward ; 2, full circle and charge 
 position ; 3, hand circle and straighten forward knee ; 4, 5, 6, 
 7, continue to alternate the two exercises ; 8, clubs at rest. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 349 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 r a. Alternate hand and full circle forward, both — Start ! 
 
 3 ' ^^• 
 
 j h. Foot !— bend— up. 16—16. 
 
 L c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 r a. straightening clubs upward, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 . I h. On toes ! 16. 
 4. { 
 
 Note. — Eising on toes. 
 
 L c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 r a. Alternate full circle forward and hand circle sideways, 
 both— Start ! 16. 
 h. With trunk! 16. 
 L Note. — Trunk bending forward. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 5. 
 
350 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 a. STRAIGHTENING CLUBS 
 UPWARD 
 
 Straighten the arms and 
 clubs upward to a vertical 
 position, the clubs continu- 
 ing the line of the arms. 
 Pull well upon the chest ; 
 keep the head erect and 
 the chin in. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING 
 ON TOES AND STRAIGHT- 
 ENING CLUBS UPWARD 
 
 1, rise on the toes and 
 straighten the arms up- 
 ward ; 2, heels down and 
 clubs in rest position. 
 
 5 a. ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE FORWARD AND HAND CIRCLE 
 
 SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, from rest position straighten the arms upward and swing 
 the clubs downward and backward in a full circle ; 2, return to 
 the rest position ; 3, drop the clubs outward to the sides and 
 describe a hand circle sideways ; 4, clubs at rest. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 351 
 
 5 a. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING FORWARD WITH ALTER- 
 NATE FULL CIRCLE FORWARD AND HAND CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, raise the clubs upward for the full circle, and as they 
 move downward and backward, bend "the trunk forw^ard from 
 the hips, with the back straight and the head up ; 2, trunk 
 erect and swing the clubs forward and upward to the rest posi- 
 tion ; 3, hand circle outward ; 4, clubs in rest position. 
 
 This exercise strengthens the back muscles that hold the 
 trunk erect. 
 
 9. BREATHING 
 
 Raise the arms forward to the vertical position while inhal- 
 ing ; lower them sideways while exhaling. 
 
352 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON VII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 Alternate hand and full circle sideways, both right — 
 
 Start I 16. 
 Foot I— bend— up. 16—16. 
 
 Note. — Stepping and bending sideways. 
 Combine ! 16—16. 
 
 Straightening clubs upward, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 On toes ! 16. 
 Combine ! 16. 
 Alternate full circle forward and hand circle sideways, 
 
 both— Start ! 16. 
 With trunk ! 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 {a. 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 3. \ b. 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 (C. 
 (CI. 
 
 lb. 
 
 I 
 
 [c. 
 
 C a. 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 [b. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 i 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 
 
 353 
 
 3«. ALTERNATE HAND AND FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, hand circle sideways ; 2, full circle sideways; continue to 
 alternate these two movements until the last count, when the 
 clubs should be returned to the rest position. 
 
 3 6. STEPPING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, step to the right side, the weight equal ; 2, bend the knee 
 on that side as for a side charge ; 3, straighten the knee ; 
 4, bend again ; continue to alternate the bending and straighten- 
 ing to 15 ; 16, position. The clubs should rest upon the shoul- 
 ders for this exercise. 
 
School Gymnastics 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS WITH 
 HAND AND FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, hand circle with both clubs to the right and step sideways 
 to the right; 2, full circle with both clubs to the right and 
 bend the right knee to the charge position ; 3, hand circle and 
 knee straight ; alternate to 15; 16, position. 
 
Ninth Series, huiian Clubs — Boys and Girls 355 
 
 3 
 
 LESSON VIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Chibs in position — Place ! 
 a. Alternate hand and full circle sideways, both — Start ! 
 16. 
 I h. Foot! — bend — up. 16 — 16. 
 i c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 a. Straightening clubs forward, upward and return, right 
 
 —Start! 8. 
 h. On toes! — bend — up — place. 16. 
 j iSToTE. — Rising on toes and bending knees. 
 
 [ 0. Combine ! 16. 
 fa. Pendulum, both right — Start! 8 — 8. 
 
 5. ] h. Trunk side ! 16. 
 
 I IS^oTE. — Trunk bending sideways. 
 
 6. Marching. (Keturn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Kunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4 a. STRAIGHTENING CLUBS rOEWARD, UPWARD AND RETURN 
 
 1, extend the clubs forward ; 2, raise them to a vertical posi 
 tion ; 3, return to the forward position ; 4, clubs at rest posi- 
 tion. Be sure to keep the elbows straight as the arms move 
 from the forward to the upward position and back again. The 
 head should be perfectly erect throughout. 
 
356 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 6. RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 
 
 1, rise on the toes; 2, bend the 
 knees ; 3, straighten the knees ; 4, 
 heels down. The clubs should rest 
 upon the shoulders throughout this 
 exercise. The trunk should be held 
 perfectly erect as knees bend. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON 
 TOES AND BENDING KNEES WITH 
 STRAIGHTENING CLUBS FORWARD 
 AND UPWARD 
 
 1, rise on the toes and straighten 
 the clubs forward ; 2, bend the knees 
 and raise the clubs upward ; 3, 
 straighten the knees and extend the 
 clubs forward again; 4^ heels down 
 and clubs at rest position. The head 
 will need especial attention in this 
 combination. 
 
 5 a. PENDULUM 
 
 1, pendulum swing to the left with both clubs, starting these 
 clubs to the right ; 2, pendulum to the right ; 3, pendulum to 
 the left; continue to 7 ; 8, clubs at rest position. On the 
 second eight counts start both clubs outward and repeat the 
 movement with the clubs moving in opposition. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 367 
 
 bh. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 WITH PENDULUM CLUB SWING- 
 INQ 
 
 1, start both clubs to the right 
 and bend the trunk to the right ; 
 2, hold the position, as in the 
 illustration ; this gives a pause 
 in which to reverse the mo- 
 mentum of the movement; 3, 
 reverse the movement, bending 
 the trunk and swinging the clubs 
 to the opposite side; return to 
 position on the last count. 
 
 The bending of the trunk 
 should be from the waist and 
 directly to the side. The head 
 should be in line with the trunk. 
 This exercise is very serviceable 
 for expanding the chest later- 
 ally. It strengthens the waist 
 muscles and stimulates circula- 
 tion and digestion. 
 
358 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. < 
 
 LESSON IX 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 r a. Full circle backward, both — Start ! 16. 
 ' b. Stretch step! 8—8. 
 
 Note. — Stretch step forward. 
 [c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 r a. straightening clubs forward, upward, and return, both 
 —Start! 8. 
 h. On toes I — bend — up — place. 16. 
 L c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 r a. Pendulum, both left — Start ! 8 — 8. 
 • [h. Trunk side! 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin! Six times. 
 
 4. \ 
 
 3 a. FULL CIRCLE BACKWARD 
 
 This is the same as the full circle forward except in direc- 
 tion, the club being swung backward after it is lifted. This is 
 a very difficult exercise to do correctly, as the head is very apt 
 to move forward in opposition to the arms. Observe carefully 
 a firm, upright carriage of the head and chest throughouto 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys mid Girls 
 
 359 
 
 3 6. STRETCH STEP FORWARD 
 
 1, bend the left knee, which should retain all of the weight, 
 and extend the right^foot forward, the knee stiff, and the toe 
 only touching the floor ; 2, heels together. The bend of the 
 knee should be as deep as possible with an erect position of 
 the trunk. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF STRETCH STEP FORWARD AND FULL CIRCLE 
 
 BACKWARD 
 
 1, stretch step forward with the right foot and full circle 
 backward with both clubs ; 2, heels together and clubs at rest. 
 Be sure to keep the head erect in this exercise. 
 
360 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 ! 16. 
 
 lesso:n" X 
 
 1. stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 f a. Full circle backward^ both — Start 
 j h. Stretch step ! 8—8. 
 Ic. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 I' a. Straightening clubs sideways, upward and return, 
 left— Start ! 8—8—8. 
 
 6. On toes ! — bend — ^np— place. 16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 a. Trunk twisting and bending forward, left — Start ! 16. 
 
 6. With clubs! 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eetnrn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 361 
 
 4 a. STRAIGHTENING CLUBS SIDEWAYS, UPWARD AND 
 
 RETURN 
 
 1, straighten the arms and clubs in a line sideways at 
 shoulder level ; 2, move them to the vertical position ; 3, return 
 to the side position ; 4, clubs at rest. 
 
 4 6. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH STRAIGHTENING 
 CLUBS SIDEWAYS AND UPWARD 
 
 This combination is the same as in a similar exercise in 
 preceding lessons. 
 
 5 a. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING 
 FORWARD 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the side ; 
 2, hold the direction and bend for- 
 ward ; 3, return to the erect posi- 
 tion ; 4, face the front. Keep the 
 back straight and the head well up 
 as the trunk is bent forward. 
 
362 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 bh. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING FORWARD WITH FULL 
 CIRCLE SIDEWAYS AND FORWARD 
 
 1, start both clubs to the right for a full circle, and twist the 
 trunk to the left ; 2, hold the position of the trunk and bring 
 the clubs to rest position ; 3, straighten the clubs upward, and 
 swing them downward and backward with the trunk bending 
 forward; 4, swing the clubs forward as the trunk returns to 
 the erect attitude, and bring the clubs to rest position ; 5, start 
 both clubs to the left, and twist the trunk to the right side ; 
 6, hold the oblique position, and bring the clubs to rest ; 7, bend 
 the trunk forward, etc. On the last count, face to the front 
 and return the clubs to the rest position. 
 
3. 
 
 Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 363 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 1. Stretcliiiig. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — ^Place ! 
 f a. Shoulder circle inward^ right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 ' h. Foot I— back. 8—8. 
 
 I^OTE. — Point step backward. 
 c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 a. Straightening clubs sideways, upward and return, rirfit 
 
 —Start ! 8—8—8. 
 h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 10. 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 a. Trunk twisting and bending forward, right — Start ! 16. 
 h. With clubs! 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 3 a. SHOULDER CIRCLE INWARD 
 
 1, double the arm upon itself, with the elbow extended side- 
 ways, and describe a hand circle back of the shoulder, starting 
 inward ; 2, bring the club to the rest position in front of the 
 body. Great care will be needed to keep the head perfectly 
 erect. 
 
364 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 Zb. POINT STEP BACKWARD 
 
 1, stretch the leg backward from the waist and touch the toe 
 in a point step backward; 2, heels together. The knee and 
 instep should be stretched. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP BACKWARD AND SHOULDER 
 
 CIRCLE INWARD 
 
 1, backward circle with the right hand, and point step back- 
 ward with the right foot; 2, clubs at rest, heels together. 
 Through the count of 16, use both clubs and alternate the feet. 
 Keep the head erect. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 365 
 
 LESSOISr XII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clnbs in position — Place ! 
 C a. Shoulder circle inward, right — Start ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 3. [ b. Foot !— back. 8—8. 
 [c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 r a. Full circle, both left— Start ! 8—8—8. 
 
 4. I h. Pivoting ! 8—8—16. 
 U. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 r a. Trunk twisting and bending forward, right — Start ! 
 6. J 16. 
 
 I h. With clubs ! 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Ennning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
3G6 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 ft. PIVOTING 
 
 1, rise on the toes^ pivot to the side on the balls of the feet, 
 and put the heels down ; the feet should then be in a straight 
 line, one behind the other ; 2, hold the position ; 3, rise on the 
 toes and pivot to the front, heels down ; 4, hold the position. 
 The clubs should rest upon the shoulders. 
 
 This balance exercise, like all others, cultivates general 
 steadiness of poise and upright carriage; it is unusually 
 
 strengthening for 
 rotator muscles. 
 
 the ankles, as it brings into action the 
 
 4r. COMBINATION OF PIVOTING AND FULL CIRCLE SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, start both clubs to the left in the full circle and pivot to 
 the right ; 2, heels down and clubs at rest ; 3, start both clubs 
 to the right and pivot to the front ; 4, heels down, clubs at rest. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 'Mn 
 
 LESSON XllI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 ((. Alternate full circle and shoulder circle outward, right 
 
 —Start I 8— 8— IG. 
 h. Foot I— side. 16—16. 
 
 Note. — Stretch step sideways. 
 I c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 f a. Full circle, both right— Start ! 8—8—8. 
 
 4. ] h. Pivoting ! 8—8—16. 
 Ic. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 f a. Trunk twisting and bending forward, right — Start ! 
 
 5. { 16. 
 
 [h. With clubs! 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE AND SHOULDER CIRCLE OUTWARD 
 
 1, full circle outward ; 2, back shoulder circle outward ; 
 alternate through 7 ; 8, clubs at rest. 
 
368 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 6. STRETCH STEP SIDEWAYS 
 
 The stretch step sideways is the same as the stretch step 
 forward except as to the direction taken by the extended foot. 
 
 1, stretch step sideways ; 2, hold the position ; 3, heels to- 
 gether ; 4, hold the position. The clubs should remain upon 
 the shoulders. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF STRETCH STEP SIDEWAYS WITH FULL 
 CIRCLE AND SHOULDER CIRCLE OUTWARD 
 
 1, stretch step sideways and swing both clubs outward in the 
 full circle ; 2, hold the stretch step for the shoulder circle out- 
 ward ; 3, heels together and full circle outward ; 4, hold the 
 position for the shoulder circle ; 8, heels together and clubs in 
 position. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 369 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 a. Alternate full circle and shoulder circle outward, right 
 
 —Start ! 8—8—16. 
 h. Foot!— side. 16—16. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 a. Hand circle forward, twice inward, twice outward, 
 
 both— Start ! 8. 
 h. Step!— kneel. 16—16. 
 
 Note. — Kneeling. 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 a. Pendulum and rest, both right — Start ! 16. 
 h. Trunk !— twist— bend. 16. 
 
 jSTote. — Trunk twisting and bending sideways. 
 c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing— Begin ! Six times. 
 
 HAND CIRCLE FORWARD 
 
 1, forward hand circle inward; 2, repeat; 3, forward hand 
 circle outward ; 4, repeat ; 8, position. 
 
370 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 ft. KNEELING 
 
 1, 2, step forward with the entire weight on the moving foot, 
 the rear foot touching by the toe only ; 3, 4, kneel on the rear 
 knee ; 5, 6, rise to the same position as in 1 ; 7, 8, heels together. 
 Keep the trunk erect. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF KNEELING WITH HAND CIRCLE 
 
 1, 2, step forward and describe two hand circles inward ; 
 3, 4, kneel and describe two circles outward ; 5, 6, rise and 
 describe two circles inward; 7, 8, heels together, two circles 
 outward. 
 
 5 a. PENDULUM AND REST 
 
 1, start both clubs to the right, and continue the movement 
 into the pendulum swing to the left ; 2, clubs at rest ; 3, start 
 the clubs to the left, pendulum swing to the right ; 4, clubs at 
 rest. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 371 
 
 5^. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right; 2, hold the position; 3, bend 
 the trunk to the right side ; 4, erect position ; 5, twist the trunk 
 to the left side ; 6, hold ; 1, bend to the left side ; 8, erect 
 position. 
 
 This exercise is particularly effective for the digestive organs. 
 
 5r. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 WITH PENDULUM 
 
 1, start both clubs to the left, pendulum and trunk twisting 
 to the right ; 2, hold the position ; 3, start the clubs to the right 
 and bend to the right ; 4, reverse the clubs, swing and return to 
 erect position; 5, start the clubs to the right, pendulum and 
 trunk twisting to the left, etc. 
 
372 School Gymnastics 
 
 4. 
 
 LESSON XV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 a. Alternate full circle and hand circle forward, both — 
 
 Start! 16. 
 h. Charge ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 
 
 ISToTE. — Reverse charging sideways. 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 a. Hand circle forward, twice inward, twice outward, 
 
 both— Start ! 8. 
 h. Step!— kneel. 16—16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 r a. Pendulum and rest, both right — Start ! 16. 
 h. Trunk! — twist — bend. 16. 
 
 c. Combine I 16 or 32. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE AND HAND CIRCLE FORWARD 
 
 1, full circle forward ; 2, hand circle forward ; 3, full circle 
 forward ; alternate to 16. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 373 
 
 3 6. REVERSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, face and charge to the right side ; 2, hold the position ; 
 3, without changing the place of the feet, face and charge in 
 the reverse direction ; 4, hold ; 5, 6, reverse ; 16, position. 
 Observe the usual points of a strong bend in the knee and an 
 upright position of the head and trunk. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF REVERSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS WITH 
 ALTERNATE FULL CIRCLE AND HAND CIRCLE FORWARD 
 
 1, clubs in full circle to the right, charge and face to the left ; 
 2, hold the charge position, for the outward hand circle forward 
 with both clubs ; 3, swing both clubs in full circle to the left, 
 and reverse the charge to the right side; 4, hold the charge 
 position for the hand circle ; 16, feet and clubs to position. 
 
374 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XVI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 
 a. Alternate full circle and hand circle forward^ both- 
 Start ! 16. 
 
 4. 
 
 h. Charge ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 
 
 . c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Full circle outward, both — Start ! 16. 
 
 I). On toes ! — pivot — return — down. 16 — 16. 
 Note. — Return pivoting". 
 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 f a. Pendulum and rest, both right — Start ! 16. 
 
 5. ] h. Trunk !— twist— bend. 16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4 6. RETURN PIVOTING 
 
 1, 2, rise on the toes ; 3, 4, j^ivot to the right side ; 5, 6, return 
 to the front ; 7, 8, heels down. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RETURN PIVOTING AND FULL CIRCLE 
 
 OUTWARD 
 
 1, 2, rise on the toes, swing the clubs in a full circle outward 
 and bring them to rest position ; 3, 4, pivot to the side with 
 another circle and rest ; 5, 6, return to the front, clubs in full 
 circle and rest ; 7, 8, heels down, circle clubs, and rest. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 375 
 
 LESSON XVII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 
 Marching. 
 
 Clubs in position — Place ! 
 
 a. One full circle and three hand circles forward, both — 
 
 Start ! 16. 
 
 h. Charge! — reverse. 16 — 16. 
 
 , Note. — Reverse charging obliquely forward. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Full circle outward, both — Start ! 16. 
 
 4. -! h. On toes ! — pivot — return — clown. 16 — 16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Pendulum and rest, both right — Start ! 16. 
 
 5. -j h. Trunk ! — twist — bend. 16. 
 i c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return clubs to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 Za. FULL CIRCLE AND HAND CIRCLES FORWARD 
 
 1, full circle forward ; 2, outward hand circle forward ; 
 3, inward hand circle forward ; 4, outward hand circle forward ; 
 5, full circle forward ; 6, 7, 8, repeat the hand circles. 
 
 3/>. REVERSE CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 
 
 1, charge obliquely forward, right ; 2, hold the position ; 
 3, reverse to an oblique backward charge, left ; 4, hold ; 
 5, reverse the oblique forward charge ; 6, hold ; continue to 
 reverse the charging, with two counts for each position, to 14 ; 
 15, 16, position. 
 
376 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF REVERSE CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD, 
 AND FULL CIRCLE AND HAND CIRCLES FORWARD 
 
 1, charge obliquely forward and take the full circle forward 
 with both clubs ; 2, 3, 4, hold the charge position for the 
 hand circles ; 5, full forward circle and reverse the charge ; 
 6, 7, 8, hold the position for the hand circles ; 16, feet and 
 clubs to position. 
 
Ninth Series, Indian Clubs — Boys and Girls 377 
 
 LESSON XVIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Chibs in position — Place ! 
 
 a. One full circle and three hand circles forward, both — 
 Start ! 16. 
 
 b. Charge ! — reverse. 16—16. 
 
 c. Combine! 16 — 16. 
 
 [ a. Full circle outward, both — Start ! 16. 
 
 4. \ b. On toes ! — pivot — return — down. 16 — 16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 r a. Alternate full circle forward and hand circle side- 
 
 5. i ways, both — Start ! 16. 
 
 I b. With trunk ! — forward. 16. 
 
 I^OTE. — As in Lesson VI. 
 r a. Straightening clubs upward, both — Start ! 8. 
 [b. Trunk I— side. 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — Combination of trunk bending sideways 
 and straightening clubs upward. 
 
 7. Marching. (Eeturn clubs to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Kunning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
378 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 'tMJm^M/M/M/AyMfMMMil 
 
 6 6. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND 
 STRAIGHTENING CLUBS UPWARD 
 
 1, straighten both, clubs upward and bend the trunk to the 
 right side ; 2, clubs in rest position, trunk erect. 
 
 This is one of the strongest exercises for the trunk muscles, 
 and in its effect upon the digestive and circulatory functions. 
 
Tenth Series 
 
 Seventh or Eighth Year, Boys and Girls 
 Double Series, Dumb-bells — 1 pound 
 
 This series is designed as a substitute for Indian clubs in the 
 seventh year, where there is not enough free floor space for club 
 icork; and for mixed classes of boys and girls in the eighth year. 
 
 lesso:n^ I 
 
 Note, — For stretcliing, tactics, floor formation, effects of 
 exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 Partners — Face ! 
 
 a. Clicking bells sideways, same — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 6. Foot! — point — place. 8 — 8. 
 j Note. — Point step sideways. 
 
 Ic. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 4. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 379 
 
380 School Gymnastics 
 
 XoTE. — The floor formation for this series should be such 
 as to leave the pupils standing in pairs, or partners, of equal 
 height. These partners should face each other upon the com- 
 mand Partners — Face ! This relative position of the partners 
 will be understood in subsequent lessons without the special 
 command. 
 
 As it is impracticable for commands to indicate on which 
 side movements shall begin for two persons facing each other, 
 it should be understood at the first lesson toward which side of 
 the room all exercises should be commenced. When the com- 
 mands indicate that both partners are to start on the " same 
 side/' it means that both are to start toward this understood 
 side of the room. When the commands indicate opposite 
 sides for the two partners, number ones will start toward the 
 usual side, and number twos toward the opposite side. 
 
 3 a. CLICKING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, swing the bells sideways to shoulder level, palms down, and 
 click the thumb ends of partner's bell ; 2, bells to position. 
 The arm should pull hard upon the chest when it is extended, 
 but the trunk should not turn. 
 
 3 d. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, extend the foot sideways and point the toe, i.e, stretch 
 the instep and depress the toe, touching the toe to the floor ; 
 the entire leg from the hip should be stretched, but the weight 
 should remain firmly on the stationary foot that the exercise 
 may cultivate firm poise of body ; 2, heels together. The bells 
 should be placed at the hips during this and all other exer- 
 cises in which the arms are not in action. They should be 
 placed there on the first count of the foot exercise, without a 
 separate command, and lowered to the sides on the last count. 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 381 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND CLICKING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step and click the bells sideways at shoulder level 
 on the same side as the moving foot ; 2, position. 
 
382 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON II 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 ^ a. Clicking bells sideways, same side — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 3. ] b. Foot !— side— place. 8—8. 
 [ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Clicking bells sideways, both — One ! 8. 
 ' b. On toes ! 16. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes, 
 c. Combine ! 16. . 
 
 5. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 6. Stretching. 
 
 7. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 4. 
 
 4/>. RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, rise on the toes as high as possible; 2, lower the heels 
 quietly to the floor, without allowing the weight to sway 
 backward upon them. There should be no sound or jarring as 
 the heels come to place. 
 
 4 e. COMBINATION OF RISING ON THE TOES AND CLICKING BOTH 
 
 BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, rise on the toes and click the thumb ends of both bells 
 sideways at shoulder level ; 2, position. 
 
 7. BREATHING 
 
 Kaise the arms sideways to shoulder level wliile inhaling; 
 lower them to position while exhaling. The breathing should 
 be slower and much deeper than the normal 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 383 
 
 LESSOK III 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 ^ a. Clicking bells sideways, same side — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 3. j b. Foot ! — point — place. 8 — 8. 
 i c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Clicking bells sideways, both — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 4. j b. On toes ! 16. 
 
 Ic. Combine! 16—16. 
 About — Face ! 
 
 Note. — The execution of this order will leave the 
 pupils standing back to back. 
 
 5. Trunk twisting and clicking bells sideways — One ! 8 — 
 8—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
384 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 6 a. TRUNK TWISTING AND CLICKING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, keeping the feet firmly in position, twist the trunk toward 
 the side (partners working toward the same side), and click the 
 thumb ends of the bells at arm's length sideways, at shoulder 
 height ; 2, twist toward the other side and click the bells on 
 
 that side, and return the opposite bell to the hip ; continue to 
 alternate the direction to 7 ; 8, position. Be sure to keep the 
 head erect, though it should turn to follow the movement of 
 the bells. The bells should be upon the hips on the first 
 count and return to that position after the clicking as above 
 illustrated. 
 
Tertth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 385 
 
 LESSON IV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging opposite bells sideways and clicking in centre 
 —One ! 8—8. 
 
 3. \ b. Foot ! — side — cross forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 Note. — Point step sideways and cross step forward. 
 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 f a. Clicking bells sideways, both — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 4. -i b. On toes ! 16. 
 
 Ic. Combine! 16—16. 
 About — Face ! 
 
 5. Trunk twisting and clicking bells sideways — One ! 8 — 
 8—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
386 School Gymnastics 
 
 Za. SWINGING OPPOSITE BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING IN 
 
 CENTRE 
 
 1, swing the opposite bells sideways to shoulder level, turn- 
 ing the palms upward ; 2, click the thumb ends of the same 
 bells in the centre, palms downward, elbows straight ; 3, swing 
 the bells again sideways with the palms upward ; 4, position. 
 The shoulders should not turn with the arm movement. 
 
 3 6. POINT STEP SIDEWAYS AND CROSS STEP FORWARD 
 
 1, point step sideways, the partners working with opposite 
 feet; 2, cross the same foot forward and touch the toe on a 
 
 line in front of the 
 stationary foot ; 3, re- 
 turn to the point step 
 sideways ; 4, heels 
 ^1^- ^ together. The cross 
 
 fHpp p > > step should be made 
 
 ^^^^P" ¥ ^1^ ^^ with a full swing 
 
 ^^^^Bjfe /^tl^^f^^^^% from the hip joint, 
 
 ^^^n «H|V , so as to cultivate 
 
 ^^^V ^^^E^ strength and freedom 
 
 ^^^^Bk l^lk ^^ movement there. 
 
 ^^^^^H fl^^fe "^^^^ knee should re- 
 
 ^^^^^^m I^^^K main stiff. There 
 
 ^^^^^^H I^^^K' should be no turning 
 
 ^^^^^^^H ^^^sk of the shoulders. 
 
 ^^^^^^^ Mm COMBINATION OF 
 
 ^WI^^Mi^ mm POINT AND CROSS 
 
 ^B ^Jiv Jk STEPS WITH SWING- 
 
 Vjj^ <mk ING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 AND CLICKING 
 
 1, point step side- 
 ways and swing bells sideways to shoulder level^ with palms 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 387 
 
 upward, using the bells on the side of the moving feet ; 2, cross 
 step toward the centre and click the bells in the centre ; 3, point 
 step and bells again sideways ; 4, position. 
 
;88 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON V 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Swinging opposite bells sideways and clicking in 
 ' centre— One ! 8—8. 
 
 h. Foot! — side — cross forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 ^ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 4. Rising on toes, clicking opposite bells over head, and changing 
 places — One ! 32. 
 
 About — Face ! 
 
 5. Trunk twisting and clicking bells sideways — One ! 8 — 
 8—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 Note. — See Explanatory Note 7. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 
 
 389 
 
 4. RISING ON TOES, CLICKING OPPOSITE BELLS OVER HEAD 
 AND CHANGING PLACES 
 
 1, rise on the toes and click the thumb ends of the opposite 
 bells at arm's length upward in the centre ; 2, position ; 3, rise 
 on the toes and click the other bells upward; 4, position; 5, 
 
 6, 7, 8, walk to partner's place and face to the centre, starting 
 to the right; repeat, rising on the toes and clicking the bells 
 on the first four counts and returning to place on the last four. 
 The unused bell should be upon the hip during the clicking, 
 and both bells should be at the hips while walking to places. 
 
390 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. \ 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Swinging opposite bells sideways and clicking in cen- 
 tre—One ! 8—8. 
 h. Foot! — side — cross forward — side — place. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 4. Eising on toes, clicking opposite bells over head, and 
 changing places — One ! 32. 
 
 5. Trunk bending sideways and clicking bells over head— One ! 
 32. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 391 
 
 5. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD 
 
 1, bend the trunk sideways from the waist and click the 
 thumb ends of one's own bells over head ; the head and arms 
 should be in line with 
 the trunk, and part- 
 ners should bend to- 
 ward the same side ; 
 2, position ; 3, repeat 
 to the other side ; 4, 
 position; 5, partners 
 click opposite bells 
 in the centre, over 
 head, trunk erect; 6, 
 position ; 7, click the 
 other bells, the trunk 
 still erect ; 8, posi- 
 tion. 
 
 This exercise is 
 very effective for 
 strengthening the 
 waist muscles, for ex- 
 ])anding the chest lat- 
 erally, and for quick- 
 ening the circulation 
 and digestion. . 
 
 9. BREATHING 
 
 While inhaling, raise the arms forward to a vertical position ; 
 while exhaling, lower them sideways to position. Keep the 
 head erect and pull upon the chest with the arm movements. 
 
392 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSOX VII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Stretching and clicking bells obliquely — One ! 8 — 8 
 —8! 
 
 b. Charge I — obliquely forward. 8 — 8. 
 ^OTE. — Charging obliquely forward. 
 
 t c. Combine I 8—8—8. 
 
 4. Eising on toes, clicking opposite bells over head, and 
 changing places — One ! 32. 
 
 5. Trunk bending sideways and clicking bells over head — 
 One ! 32. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. STRETCHING AND CLICKING BELLS OBLIQUELY 
 
 1, stretch the right arm diagonally upward, and the left di- 
 agonally downward, the bells continuing the line of the arms ; 
 keep the head erect and pull hard upon the chest ; there should 
 be no movement of the trunk or head ; 2, click the little finger 
 ends of the bells at elbow height, directly in front of the body ; 
 3, stretch the arms again obliquely ; 4, click ; continue to 8. 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 393 
 
 3 h. CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 
 
 1, take a long step obliquely forward, and bend the knee on 
 that side so as to carry the entire weight of the body ; the rear 
 knee should be straight, both heels upon the floor, and the trunk 
 erect; the partners should work with opposite feet, and will 
 thus pass each other in charging ; 2, heels together. The bells 
 should be on the hips during this exercise. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND STRETCHING ARMS 
 
 OBLIQUELY 
 
 1, charge obliquely forward, and stretch the arm on that side 
 
394 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 obliquely upward and the other arm obliquely downward ; 
 2, heels together and click the bells. 
 
Tenth Series, Dufiib-bells — Boys ami Girls 395 
 
 LESSON VIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 3. 
 
 a. Stretching and clicking bells obliquely — One ! 8 — 8 
 
 —8. 
 h. Charge ! — obliquely forward. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 a. Swinging^ opposite bells sideways and clicking over 
 
 head— One ! 8—8. 
 h. Foot ! — cross forward — on toes — cross forward — place. 
 
 Note. — Cross step and rising on toes. 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 5. Trunk bending sideways and clicking bells over head — 
 One ! 32. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4 a. SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 
 
 1, swing the opposite bells sideways to shoulder level, palms 
 turned upward ; 2, click the thumb ends of these bells diago- 
 nally over head ; 3, stretch the arms again sideways, with the 
 palms upward; 4, position. The arm movements should lift 
 and expand the chest. 
 
396 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 6. CROSS STEP AND RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, cross step forward with opposite feet ; 2, rise on the toes ; 
 3, heels down ; 4, position. 
 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF CROSS STEP AND RISING ON TOES WITH 
 BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 
 
 Start with the bells on hips ; cross step forward with oppo- 
 site feet and swing sideways the bells on that side, with the 
 palms upward ; 2, rise on the toes and click the thumb end of 
 partner's bell diagonally upward in the centre ; 3, heels down 
 and bells again at the sides ; 4, heels together and bells on hips. 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 397 
 
 LESSON IX 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 ' a. Stretching and clicking bells obliquely — One ! 8 — 8 
 
 3. J -^- 
 
 I 6. Charge ! — obliquely forward. 8 — 8. 
 
 [ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 a. Swinging opposite bells sideways and clicking over 
 head— One ! 8—8. 
 
 4. \ h. Foot ! — cross forward — on toes — cross forward — place. 
 8—8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 a. Facing, trunk twisting and clicking bells — One ! 
 
 8—8. 
 h. With foot ! — face — forward — place. 16 — 16. 
 Note. — With point step forward. 
 
 6. Marching. (Returnbells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. E/unning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
398 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 a. FACING, TRUNK TWISTING AND CLICKING BELLS 
 
 Start with the bells on the hips. 1^ face sideways, partners 
 working in the same direction ; 2, twist the trunk toward the 
 centre and click the thumb ends of the outside bells forward 
 at shoulder height ; 3, rotate the trunk backward to its normal 
 position, and return the bells to the hips ; 4, twist and click ; 
 continue to 7; 8, face partner. Keep the chest high and 
 prominent throughout this exercise. 
 
 ^ 
 
 j^#- 
 
 bh. FACING AND TRUNK TWISTING WITH POINT STEP 
 
 FORWARD 
 
 This differs from the preceding exercise only in the addition 
 of the point step forward when the trunk is twisted. 
 
3. 
 
 5. 
 
 Tenth Series, dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 399 
 
 LESSON X 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Swinging and clicking bells sideways — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 b. Charge! — reverse. 10 — 10. 
 Note. — Reverse charging sideways. 
 
 [ c. Combine ! 10 — 10. 
 a. Swinging opposite bells sideways and clicking over 
 head— One ! 8—8. 
 4. \ b. Foot ! — cross forward — on toes — cross forward — place. 
 8—8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 10 — 10. 
 f a. Facing, trunk twisting and clicking bells — One ! 8 — 8. 
 I b. Foot ! — face — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 0. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. SWINGING AND CLICKING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, swing one bell sideways at shoulder level and turn the 
 palm upward, partners working on the same side; 2, click 
 the thumb end of partner's bell, keeping the elbows straight; 
 3, stretch the arm again sideways with the palm upward; 4, 
 click ; alternate the movements to 7 ; 8, position. 
 
 3 6. REVERSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, face and charge directly to the side, both partners working 
 in the same direction; 2, hold the position; 3, reverse the 
 charge, i.e. straighten the bent knee, face in the opposite 
 
400 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 direction, throw the weight upon the other knee and bend it in 
 the charge position ; 4, hold ; o, return to the first charge ; con- 
 tinue to reverse the directions to 15; 16, position. The bells 
 should be on the hips during this exercise. 
 
 This is one of the best exercises for stimulating the circu- 
 lation. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF REVERSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS WITH 
 
 SWINGING AND CLICKING BELLS SIDEWAYS ^ 
 
 1, face and charge toward the same side, and stretch sideways 
 the arms on that side, with the palms upward; 2, hold the 
 charge position, and click the thumb ends of the bells forward 
 at shoulder height ; 3, face and charge in the opposite direction, 
 returning the extended bells to the hips, and extending the other 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 401 
 
 ones sideways ; 4, hold the charge position and click the bells ; 
 reverse the charging to 15; 16, position. The illustrations 
 show the positions on the first and fourth counts. 
 
402 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 ' a. Swinging and clicking bells sideways — One ! 8 — 
 
 8—8. 
 h. Charge ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 a. Swinging both bells sideways and clicking overhead — 
 
 One ! 16. 
 h. Point step ! — forward — sideways — backward — heels. 
 
 Twice to each side. 
 
 Note. —Point step and facing. 
 c. Combine ! Twice to each side. 
 a. Facing, trunk twisting and clicking bells — One! 8 
 
 —8. 
 h. Foot ! — face — forward — place. 8 — 8. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4. 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys ami Girls 403 
 
 4 a. SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 
 
 1, swing both bells sideways at arm's length with the palms 
 upward; 2, click the thumb ends of one's OAvn bells over head, 
 elbow^s straight ; 3, extend the bells sideways again ; 4, position. 
 
 This exercise is admirable for chest expansion. The pull 
 upon the chest should be strong and the head should be held 
 erect. 
 
 4 6. POINT STEP AND FACING 
 
 1, point step forward ; 2, face to the side, partners working 
 in the same direction, and take the point step in front of the body 
 as it then faces ; 3, face to the rear, and take the point step in 
 front of the body as it then faces ; 4, heels together ; the pivot- 
 ing should be on the ball of the stationary foot ; 5, 6, 7, return 
 to the front, with the point step in each direction; 8, heels 
 together. Bells on hips. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP AND FACING WITH SWINGING 
 BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 
 
 1, point step forward and click both bells sidew^a^^s at 
 shoulder level, palms upward, from position at the sides; 2, 
 face to the side with the point step in that direction, and click 
 one's own bells over head ; 3, point step and face to the rear, 
 and extend the bells again to the sides; 4, heels together and 
 arms down at the sides ; 5, point step forward in the direction 
 then facing, and extend the bells sideways ; 6, face to the side, 
 point step in that direction, and click the bells over head ; 7, 
 face and point step to the front, arms sideways ; 8, heels and 
 arms to position. 
 
404 
 
 School: Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Swinging and clicking bells sideways — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 3. ] b. Charge ! — reverse. 16 — 16. 
 [ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 ' a. Swinging both bells sideways and clicking over head 
 
 One ! 16. 
 \ b. Point step and facing ! — forward — to the side — to 
 the rear — position. 16 — 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 5. Facing and trunk bending inward — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 — ^ (). Marching. (Ee- 
 turn bells to 
 place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Be- 
 gin I Six times. 
 
 5a. FACING AND 
 TRUNK BENDING 
 FORWARD 
 
 1, partners face 
 to the same side 
 of the room, with 
 bells on hips ; 2, 
 bend the trunk 
 sideways toward 
 partner, and click 
 the outside bells 
 over head ; 3, trunk 
 erect and bells on 
 
 hips; 4, bend and click; continue the bending to 7 ; 8, face 
 
 partner, both bells on hips. 
 
 This exercise is very effective for the waist and chest. 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 406 
 
 3. \ 
 
 lesso:n^ XIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging opposite bells sideways, clicking over head 
 
 and returning — One ! 8 — 8. 
 h. Rocking I — backward. 8 — 8. 
 c. Combine ! IG — 16. 
 
 ' a. Swinging both bells sideways and clicking over head 
 —One ! 16. 
 
 4. { h Point step and facing ! — forward — to the side — to 
 the rear — position. 16 — 16. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 5. Facing and trunk bending inward — One I 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. ilunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. SWINGING OPPOSITE BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING 
 
 OVER HEAD 
 
 1, swing opposite bells sideways, palms upward ; 2, click the 
 thumb ends of these bells diagonally over head, the elbows 
 stiff ; 3, bells again sideways ; continue to 7 ; 8, position. 
 Be careful not to twist the shoulders when clicking the bells. 
 Pull hard upon the chest and keep the head erect. 
 
406 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 Zb. ROCKING 
 
 1, charge backward^ partners working with opposite feet ; 
 the weight should be entirely on the rear foot, the knee on that 
 side bent, and the forward knee straight ; 2, rock forward, i.e. 
 transfer all of the weight to the forward foot and bend the 
 knee on that side ; 3, return to the backward position ; continue 
 to 7 ; 8, heels together. ^ 
 
 This exercise is particularly stimulating for the circulation. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF ROCKING WITH SWINGING OPPOSITE BELLS 
 SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 
 
 1, charge backward, partners working on opposite sides, and 
 extend sideways the bells on the side of the charge, palms 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 407 
 
 upward ; 2, rock forward, and click partner's bell over head ; 
 3, charge backward, and again extend the bells sideways ; 
 continue to 7; 8, position. 
 
408 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 1, Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Swinging opposite bells sideways, clicking over head, 
 
 3, I 
 
 and returning — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 I 6. Eocking ! 8—8. 
 t c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 a. Clicking bells forward, over head and return — One! 
 16—16. 
 
 4. \ h. Twist! — cross forward — face- return — heels. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Foot-crossing and facing to rear. 
 [c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 5. Facing sideways and trunk bending inward — One! 8 — 8 
 —16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Tetitb Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 409 
 
 4rr. CLICKING BELLS FORWARD. OVER HEAD AND RETURN 
 
 1, click the thumb ends of all four bells at shoulder height 
 ill front, the elbows straight; click the same ends of one's own 
 bells over head, elbows straight; 3, click again at shoulder 
 height; 4, position. 
 
 4?>. FOOT CROSSING AND FACING TO REAR 
 
 1, cross one foot over the other, partners w^orking on the 
 same side, and touch the foot by the toe, as in the point step, 
 directly to the side of the stationary toe; 2, rise on the toes 
 of both feet, face to the rear, pivoting on the balls of the feet, 
 and low^er the heels to position; 3, rise on the toes, pivot to 
 the front, and lower the heel that bears the weight; 4, heels 
 together. 
 
 4r COMBINATION OF FOOT CROSSING AND FACING TO REAR 
 WITH CLICKING BELLS FORWARD AND OVER HEAD 
 
 1, cross the feet and click the bells forward ; 2, rise on the 
 toes, turn to the rear and click one's ow^n bells over head ; 3, 
 face partner and click the bells in the centre ; 4, position. 
 
410 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 ' a. Swinging opposite bells sideways, clicking over head 
 and returning — One ! 8 — 8. 
 h. Eocking! 16—16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 ' a. Clicking bells forward, over head and return — One ! 
 
 16—16. 
 h. Twist! — cross forward — face — cross forward — heels. 
 
 8—8. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 5. Facing and trunk bending outward — One ! 16 — 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 411 
 
 5 a. FACING AND TRUNK BENDING OUTWARD 
 
 1, partners face to the same side ; 2, bend the trunk sideways 
 away from partner and click the inside bells upward in the 
 centre ; 3, trunk erect and bells on hips ; 4, bend and click ; 
 continue to 15; 16, face to the centre, bells down. 
 
412 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSOI^ XVI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Anvil strike— One ! 16—16. 
 
 3. \ b. Charge forward !— (opposite). 8 — 8. Bells on hips. 
 [ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 ' a. Clicking bells forward^ overhead, and return — One ! 
 16—16. 
 
 4. \ b. Twist! — cross forward — face — cross forward — heels. 
 8—8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 5. Facing and trnnk bending outward — One ! 16 — 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. ANVIL STRIKE 
 
 1, nnmber ones extend one bell toward the centre at shoul- 
 der level, the bell held in a vertical position ; at the same time 
 nnmber twos swing the opposite bell in a circle starting down- 
 ward and backward, and strike partner's extended bell; 2, num- 
 ber twos hold the bell in the centre and nnmber ones circle and 
 strike; continue to 15; 16, position. The trnnk should be 
 rotated slightly toward the centre to avoid narrowing the chest 
 with the working arms. The bell not in use should be held at 
 the hip. Be sure that the circle is made with the arm fully 
 extended and pidling upon the chest, and that the head is held 
 firmly erect. 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys ami Girls 418 
 
 Zb. CHARGING FORWARD 
 
 1, charge forward, partners working with opposite feet and 
 the bells held on the hips; 2, position. Have the step long 
 enough to bring the thigh muscles well into action when the 
 knee is bent. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND ANVIL STRIKE 
 
 1, partners charge forward with opposite feet ; number ones 
 extend one bell to the centre, number twos circle and strike, 
 both working with the bell on the side of the moving foot; 
 2, still holding charge position, number twos hold bell in the 
 centre and number ones circle and strike; continue alternate 
 striking, still holding charge position to 7 ; 8, position. Twist 
 the trunk slisfhtly toward the centre while the arms are in action. 
 
414 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSOR XA^II 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 { a. Anvil strike — One ! 16 — 16. 
 
 3. \ b. Charge forward ! 16 — 16. 
 U. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 4. Pivoting and trunk bending inward — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 5. Facing and trunk bending outward — One ! 16 — 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin! Six times. 
 
Tenth Series, Dumb-bells — Boys and Girls 415 
 
 4. PIVOTING AND TRUNK BENDING INWARD 
 
 1, rise on the toes, partners pivot to the same side on the 
 balls of the feet, and lower the heels ; the feet will then be in 
 a straight line, one directly behind the other ; 2, bend the trunk 
 inward and click the ontward bells over the head, the inside 
 bells remaining on the hips ; 3, trunk erect and bells on hips ; 
 4; bend and click ; repeat to 7 ; 8, pivot to the front. 
 
416 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSO^^ XVIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Anvil strike — One ! 16 — 16. 
 
 3. j h. Charge forward ! — opposite. 16 — 16. 
 Ic. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 4. Pivoting and trunk bending inward and clicking bells — 
 One! 8—8. 
 
 o. Charging forward and trunk twisting and bending — One I 
 8—8. 
 
 6. Marching. (Keturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Kunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Tenth Series, Dumo-bells — Boys and Girls 41' 
 
 5. CHARGING FORWARD AND TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING 
 
 1, charge forward, past partner, twist the trunk toward the 
 centre, and extend the rear bell sideways at shoulder height, 
 palm upward; 2, holding the charge position, bend the body 
 sideways, toward the bent knee, and click the rear bells over 
 head; 3, trunk erect, still holding the charge position, and 
 extend the arm again sideways ; 4, bend and click ; continue 
 to 7 ; 8^ position. 
 
Eleventh Series 
 
 Eighth Year, Boys 
 
 Dumb-bells — 1 pound 
 
 LESSON I 
 
 Note. — For stretching, tactics, floor formation, effects of 
 exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Raising bells forward, both — One ! 8. 
 
 b. Sideways ! 8. 
 Note. — Raising bells sideways. 
 
 c. Upward! 8. 
 Note. — Raising bells upward. 
 
 d. Foot! 8—8. 
 Note. — Raising foot forward. 
 
 e. Sideways ! 8 — 8. 
 ]^OTE. — Raising foot sideways. 
 
 /. Backward! 8—8. 
 
 ]^0TE. — Raising foot backward. 
 rj. Combine ! 16. 
 
 4. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 6. Breathing — begin ! Four times. 
 
 419 
 
 3. \ 
 
420 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 BELLS IN POSITION FOR WORK 
 
 The bells should be grasped 
 by the steins and held naturally 
 at the sides while marching to 
 place. From this position all of 
 the exercises are taken^ unless 
 the position Bells on hips is 
 specified, when the bells are 
 placed horizontally at the hips, 
 with the elbows well back so as 
 to flatten the shoulder-blades 
 and throw the chest forward. 
 
 3 n. RAISING BELLS FORWARD 
 
 1, raise the bells forward at arm's length in front, the bells 
 held in a vertical position ; 2, lower the bells to the sides. Be 
 sure to keep the hips back and the head well up during this 
 exercise. Stretch the arm hard, but do not twist or rotate the 
 trunk. 
 
 3 h. RAISING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, raise the bells sideways to shoulder level, palms turned 
 downward, the bells horizontal; 2, lower the arms to the sides. 
 Pull hard upon the chest so as to lift and expand it. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 421 
 
 3 v. RAISING BELLS UPWARD 
 
 1, raise the arms through the forward to a vertical position, 
 pahns facing inward ; be sure to keep the head erect, the cliin 
 in, and the hips back ; 2, lower the arms sideways to position, 
 turning the palms down as they move. The chest should be 
 consciously worked upon throughout the movements of the 
 arms. This is one of the most effective exercises for the chest 
 and shoulders. 
 
 Zd. RAISING FOOT FORWARD 
 
 1, raise the right leg forward from the hip, as far as can 
 be done without tipping the trunk forward or backward ; the 
 knee should be fully extended and the toe pointed (i.e. the 
 instep stretched) ; 2, heels together. The bells should be 
 placed on the hips for this and all other balance movements 
 taken without an arm combination. They should be placed 
 there on the first count without a special command and re- 
 turned to position on the last count, unless the following exer- 
 cise calls for the same position of them, as in the present 
 instance. 
 
 3e. RAISING FOOT SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, raise the foot sideways, observing the same points as to 
 erect trunk and stretched knee and instep, as in the previous 
 exercise ; 2, heels together. 
 
 3/. RAISING FOOT BACKWARD 
 
 1, raise the foot backward and stretch the entire leg from 
 the back, dropping the heel inward ; 2, heels together. 
 
 All of these leg exercises cultivate strength and mobility of 
 the hip, thus helping to a firm, erect carriage, and ease of 
 movement. 
 
422 
 
 School Gvmnastics 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 1 
 j 
 
 L^M^^%.^^-'^ 
 
 i 
 
 mI^^ 
 
 3 g. COMBINATION OF RAIS- 
 
 I^^OT 
 
 ING FOOT AND ARMS 
 
 Jpi.^^ 
 
 FORWARDS , SIDEWAYS , 
 
 Mt^^ 
 
 BACKWARD, AND UP- 
 
 j^^ 
 
 WARD 
 
 1, raise both arms for- 
 ward to shoulder level 
 and the right foot for- 
 ward ; 2, position ; 3, raise 
 
 both arms 
 and the left 
 foot f o r- 
 ward ; 4, po- 
 sition; 5, 
 raise both 
 arms and 
 the right 
 foot side- 
 ways ; 6 J po- 
 sition; 7, 8, 
 repeat with 
 
 U.- 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 
 
 423 
 
 the left foot ; 9, raise both arms 
 upward and the right foot back- 
 ward ; 10, 11, hold the position ; 
 
 12, foot and arms to position; 
 
 13, raise both arms upward and 
 the left foot backward ; 14, 15, 
 hold; 16, position. 
 
 This is one of the best possi- 
 ble exercises for increasing the 
 diameter of the chest and for 
 getting the shoulders and spine 
 into a good position. 
 
 6. BREATHING 
 
 Raise the arms sideways to shoulder level while inhaling ; 
 lower them to position while exhaling. The breathing should 
 be slow and much deeper than the normal breath. 
 
424 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSOX II 
 
 1. Str etching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 ]\[arcliin2f. 
 
 [ a. Raising bells forward, sideways and upward, both — 
 One! 32. 
 
 Note. — In series, as for the combination in pre- 
 
 3. \ vious lesson. 
 b Foot! 32. 
 
 ^N^OTE. — Forward, sideways and upward, 
 c. Combine! 32. 
 
 a. Raising and turning bells sideways, right — One ! 
 8—8—8. 
 < b. On toes! 16. 
 
 XoTE. — Rising on toes, 
 c. Combine ! 1(3. 
 ^ a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, both — One ! 10. 
 
 5. \ b. With trunk ! IG— 10— 16. 
 
 I Note. — With trunk bending sideways. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 
 
 425 
 
 4 a. RAISING AND TURNING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, raise the bell sideways to shoulder level, turning the 
 palm upward ; 2, lower the bell to position, turning the palm 
 down in the transition. Lift and pull upon the chest with this 
 exercise ; keep the chin in. 
 
 4&. RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, rise as high as possible on the toes ; 2, heels down, quietly 
 and without jarring. Keep the weight poised forward after 
 the heels are lowered. Bells on hips. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH RAISING AND 
 TURNING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, rise on the toes and raise the bells sideways, palms up- 
 ward ; 2, heels and bells to position. 
 
426 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 i A V 
 
 a. 
 
 SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS 
 
 1, raise the bells as in the previous exercise, but continue 
 the movement by bending the elbows after the palms are 
 turned upward, and bringing the bells to the top of the shoul- 
 ders in a horizontal position, one lobe toward the front and the 
 other toward the rear ; 2, return to position through the full 
 side extension. Be sure that the arm is stretched to its utmost 
 when out at the side, so as to lift and expand the chest. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 
 
 421 
 
 5 h. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND SWINGING 
 BELLS SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS 
 
 1, swing the bells sideways to the shoulders ; 2, bend the 
 trunk directly to the right side from the waist, the head remain- 
 ing in a line with the trunk ; 3, trunk erect ; 4, bells to position. 
 
 This exercise expands the chest laterally and strengthens the 
 waist muscles. It has a very stimulating effect upon the, circu- 
 lation and digestion. 
 
428 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON III 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Clicking bells over head and behind back — One' 16. 
 ^ j h. Charge: 16— IG. 
 
 1 Note. — Charging forward. 
 
 I c. Combine! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Raising and turning bells sideways, both — One ! 8. 
 4. \ h. On toes ! 16. 
 
 i c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 [a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, both — One! 16. 
 • I h. With trunk !— side. 16—16—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 Note. — See Explanatory Note 7. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 Zn. CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD AND BEHIND BACK 
 
 1, raise the bells sidew^ays and click the thumb ends over the 
 head, the elbows f ally extended and the head erect ; 2, lower 
 the arms and click the little finger ends of the bells behind, 
 being sure to keep the head erect, the chin m, and the chest, 
 but not the hips, prominent. 
 
 Zh. CHARGING FORWARD 
 
 1, take a long step forward, bend tUe forward knee, and 
 throw all of the weight upon it ; keep the trunk erect, the rear 
 knee straight, and the rear heel upon the floor ; 2, heels to- 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 
 
 429 
 
 gether. Bells on hips. The bend of the knee should be 
 enough to bring the large muscles of the thigh into action and 
 so quicken the circulation. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND CLICKING BELLS 
 OVER HEAD AND BEHIND BACK 
 
 1, charge forward and click the bells over the head ; 2, heels 
 together and click the bells behind the back. 
 
 This is one of the best all-over exercises in the series, and is 
 particularly useful for the shoulder-blade and other back 
 muscles. To get its full benefit in this way, especial care 
 should be taken to keep the head erect and the chest promi- 
 nent, without any sway -back tendency. 
 
430 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON IV 
 Stretching. 
 
 Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Clicking bells over head and behind back — One! 16. 
 
 h. Charge! 16—16. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, under shoulders 
 and return — both — One ! 16. 
 
 h. On toes ! 16. 
 
 Note. — Eising on toes. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 a. Trunk twisting, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 b. With arms ! 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — With raising and turning bells sideways 
 as in 4, Lesson XL 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 
 
 431 
 
 4«. SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 TO SHOULDERS, UNDER SHOUL- 
 DERS, AND RETURN 
 
 1, swing the bells sideways 
 to the top of the shoulders as 
 in 5, Lesson II ; 2, extend the 
 arms again at full length at 
 the side at shoulder level, turn 
 the palms downward, bend the 
 elbows, and place the bells un- 
 der the arms; 3, return the 
 bells to the top of the shoul- 
 ders, extending the arms fully 
 at the side in the transition; 
 4, stretch the arms sideways, 
 turn the palms downward and 
 lower them to position. 
 
 4r. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND SWINGING BELLS 
 SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS, UNDER SHOULDERS, AND RETURN 
 
 1, rise on the toes, and swing the bells to the top of tlie 
 shoulders ; 2, hold the position and place the bells under the 
 arms ; 3, still remaining on the toes return the bells to the top 
 of the shoulders ; 4, heels and arms down to position. 
 
 5 a. TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, twist or rotate the trunk to the side from the ankles ; the 
 head should turn with the trunk but no farther ; 2, return to 
 the front. Bells on hips. Keep the chest prominent and the 
 shoulders level. The twisting should create a strong pressure 
 upon the internal organs and so quicken their action. 
 
432 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 b. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING WITH RAISING AND 
 TURNING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right, and swing both arms np to 
 the shoulder level at the sides, palms upward; 2. face the 
 front, and lower the arms to position. Pull hard upon the 
 chest with the arms. 
 
 9. BREATHING 
 
 While inhaling raise the arms forward to a vertical position ; 
 while exhaling lower them sideways to position. 
 
9 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 433 
 
 LESSON V 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Anvil strike, right arm forward — One! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 ! h. Foot I — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
 Note. — Stretch step forward. 
 c. Combine! 16 or 32. 
 ( a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, under shoulders 
 I and return, both — One ! 16. 
 1 h. On toes ! 16. 
 [ c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 [ a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, both — One ! 
 ] 16. 
 16. With trunk I 16—16—32. 
 
 Note. — With trunk bending sideways, as in 5, 
 Lesson II. 
 f a. Trunk twisting, left— One ! 8—8—8. 
 j h. With arms 1 8—8—16. 
 
 7. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 Za. ANVIL STRIKE 
 
 1, extend the right arm at full length in front, holding the 
 bell vertically ; at the same time swing the left bell in a full- 
 arm circle backward and upward, pulling w^ell upon the chest ; 
 keep the head "erect and the chin in ; 2, bring the left bell 
 down so as to strike with its lower lobe the upper lobe of the 
 right bell ; 3, drop the left bell to the side ; 4, continue the 
 movement through the backward and upward circle and strike ; 
 continue to 7 ; 8, return both bells to the sides. 
 
434 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 b. STRETCH STEP FORWARD 
 
 I5 bend the left knee, the entire weight of the body resting 
 npon it, and stretch the right foot forward, touching the toe 
 only to the floor; keep the trunk and head erect; 2, heels 
 together. Bells on hips. The bend of the knee in this exer- 
 cise should be sufficient to bring the large muscular groups of 
 the thigh into action, and so quicken the circulation. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF STRETCH STEP FORWARD AND THE ANVIL 
 
 STRIKE 
 
 1, stretch step forward with the right foot, extend the right 
 bell forward and circle and strike with the left ; 2, heels 
 together and bells at sides. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 435 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Anvil strike, right forward— One ! 8—8—8. 
 
 3. ] h. Foot !— forward— place. 8—8—16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 a. Swinging bells to chest, sideways, and return, both- 
 One ! 16. 
 h. Pivoting! 8—8—8. 
 c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Bells on chest — Place ! 
 
 Note. — This is the same position as that called 
 for in the previous exercise. 
 a. Swinging bells downward and upward alternately, 
 both— One ! 16. 
 
 5. \ b. Trunk !— forward— place— back— place. 16. 
 
 Note. — Trunk bending forward and backward. 
 . c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4 a. SWINGING BELLS TO CHEST, SIDEWAYS AND RETURN 
 
 1, raise the forearms forward by bending the elbows, and 
 bring the bells to the chest in a vertical position ; 2, swing the 
 bells sideways at shoulder level, the palms facing forward ; 
 3, return the bells to the chest ; 4, bells down to position. In 
 raising and lowering the bells from the chest, keep the elbows 
 at the sides and the upper arms well back so as to contract the 
 shoulder-blades and throw the chest forward. 
 
436 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 6. PIVOTING 
 
 1, rise on the toes ; 2, pivot on the balls of the feet to the 
 side; 3, still keeping the heels up, return to the front; 4, heels 
 down. Bells on hips. 
 
 This is one of the best balance exercises, as it brings the 
 rotator muscles into action. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF PIVOTING AND SWINGING BELLS TO CHEST, 
 
 SIDEWAYS AND RETURN 
 
 1, rise on the toes and swing the bells to the chest ; 2, pivot 
 to the side and swing the bells sideways ; 3, pivot to the front 
 and return the bells to the chest ; 4, heels and bells down. 
 
 5 a, SWINGING BELLS DOWNWARD AND UPWARD ALTERNATELY 
 
 1, without jerking, swing the bells through the full forward 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 437 
 
 position down to the sides ; 2, swing them through the full 
 forward position to the chest, drawing the shoulder-blades 
 backward when the bells are at the chest ; 3, stretch the bells 
 directly upward ; 4, return the bells to the chest. 
 
 5 h. TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
 
 1, bend the trunk forward from the hips, the back remaining 
 straight and the head in line with it; 2, trunk erect; 3, bend 
 the upper part of the trunk backward, being careful not to 
 throw the hips or abdomen forward ; 4, trunk erect. Keep the 
 bells at the chest for this exercise. 
 
 This exercise works upon the back and abdomen. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK 
 BENDING FORWARD AND 
 SWINGING BELLS DOWN- 
 WARD AND UPWARD 
 
 1, bend the trunk for- 
 ward, keeping the back 
 straight, and stretch the 
 arms downward at right 
 angles to the trunk ; 
 
438 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 2, trunk erect and bells at 
 chest ; 3, bend the trunk 
 backward and stretch the 
 arms upward at right angles 
 to the trunk ; 4, trunk erect 
 and bells at chest. 
 
Eleventh Series, Duiub-bells — Boys 439 
 
 LESSON VII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging bells upward, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 h. Foot! — back — place. 8 — 8— IG. 
 
 Note. — Stretch step backward. 
 e. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 f a. Swinging bells to chest, sideways and return, both — 
 i One! 16. 
 \ b. Pivot ! 8—8—8. 
 [ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 Bells on chest — Place ! 
 f a. Swinging bells downward and upward alternately. 
 I both— One! 16. 
 ^' j b. Trunk ! — forward — place — back — place. 16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. SWINGING BELLS UPWARD 
 
 1, swing the right bell through the forward to the upward 
 position, the elbow remaining stiff throughout; 2, lower the 
 bell sideways to position. The movements should be felt in 
 the chest and shoulder. 
 
440 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 Zb. STRETCH STEP BACKWARD 
 
 This is the same as the stretch step forward except in direc- 
 tion. Keep the weight entirely upon the forward foot, stretch 
 the back knee and instep as far as possible, as the foot moves 
 backward, without transferring any weight to it; keep the 
 trunk erect. Bells on hips. 
 
 3 V. COMBINATION OF STRETCH STEP BACKWARD AND SWINGING 
 
 BELLS UPWARD 
 
 1, stretch step backward with the right foot and swing both 
 bells forward and upward; 2, heels together and lower the 
 bells sideways to position. Keep the head erect. 
 
 This IS one of the most effective exercises for correcting the 
 posture of the shoulders, back, and chest. It is very stimu- 
 lating for the circulation and respiration. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 441 
 
 5. 
 
 LESSON VIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 jMarching. 
 
 ( a. Swinging bells upward, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 3. \ b. Foot I^back— place. 8—8—16. 
 i c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 f a. Swinging bells to chest, sideways and return, both — 
 I One! 16. 
 • I b. Pivot ! 8—8—8. 
 t c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 Bells on chest — Place ! 
 f a. Swinging bells downward and upward alternately, 
 both— One! 16. 
 
 b. Trunk ! — forward — place — back — place. 16. 
 [c. Combine! 16 or 32. 
 
 Position ! 
 r a. Swinging bells to shoulders, sideways and return, 
 both— One ! 16. 
 
 6. i b. Trunk I — twist— bend — up — front. 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — Trunk twisting and bending sideways. 
 
 c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 7. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Punning. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin! Six times. 
 
U2 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 6 a. SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS, SIDEWAYS AND RETURN 
 
 1, swing the bells sideways to the top of the shoulders ; 
 2j extend the bells sideways, palms upward, and lift and expand 
 the chest ; 3, return the bells to the shoulders ; 4, bells down 
 
 to position. 
 
 6 6. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right side ; 2, bend the trunk to the 
 right side ; 3, trunk erect ; 4, return to the front. Bells on hips. 
 
 This exercise, because of the strong pressure exerted upon the 
 digestive organs, is very serviceable for stimulating their action. 
 
 6 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 AND SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right and swing both bells sideways 
 to the shoulders ; 2, bend the trunk to the right side and extend 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 
 
 443 
 
 the bells sideways in line with the shoulders, palms upward ; 
 3, trunk erect and bells on shoulders ; 4, face to the front, bells 
 in position. 
 
444 School Gymnastics 
 
 4. 
 
 6. 
 
 LESSON IX 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Oblique swinging and clicking, right arm up — One! 
 
 8—8—16. 
 h. Charge !— place. 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — Charging obliquely forward. 
 c. Combine ! 16—16. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 [ a. Swinging bells to shoulders, sideways and return, 
 both— One ! 8. 
 
 Note. — As in 6, Lesson A^III. 
 h. On toes !— bend— up — place. 16. 
 
 Note. — Rising on toes and bending knees, 
 c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 { a. Swinging bells downward and upward alternately, 
 ! both— One ! 16. 
 
 I h. Trunk ! — forward — place — back — place. 16. 
 i c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 a. Swinging bells to shoulders, sideways and return, 
 
 both— One ! 16. 
 h. Trunk ! — twist — bend — up — front. 8 — 8. 
 [ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 7. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 
 
 Za. OBLIQUE SWINGING AND CLICKING 
 
 445 
 
 1, swing or stretch the arms in an oblique line, the right arm 
 upward and the left downward and backward, pulling well 
 upon the chest ; the palms should face the front ; 2, click the 
 little finger ends of the bells obliquely forward. Keep the 
 head firmly erect. 
 
 3&. CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 
 
 This differs from the charging forward only in direction. 
 The charge should be toward a point midway between the 
 forward and side- 
 ways directions, the 
 shoulders turning in 
 the same direction. 
 Bells on hips. Re- 
 member that the 
 effectiveness of any 
 charging exercise, as 
 regards the circula- 
 tion, depends upon 
 the degree of the 
 bend in the knee. 
 
 3c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD, WITH 
 OBLIQUE SWINGING AND CLICKING OF BELLS 
 
 1, charge obliquely forward with the right foot, and stretch 
 
446 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 the right arm obliquely upward and the left downward and 
 backward ; 2, heels together and click the bells. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 447 
 
 4 ft. RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 
 
 1, rise on the toes ; 2, keeping the heels from the floor and 
 the trunk erect, bend the knees ; 3, straighten the knees, the 
 heels still remaining off of the floor ; 4, heels down. Bells 
 on hips. 
 
 This is one of the best exercises for cultivating erect car- 
 riage of the trunk. It also works strongly upon the circulation. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES 
 WITH SWINGING BELLS TO THE SHOULDERS AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, rise on the toes and swing the bells sideways to the shoul- 
 ders ; 2, bend the knees and extend the bells sideways, palms 
 upward; 3, straighten the knees and return the bells to the 
 shoulders ; 4, heels and bells down. 
 
448 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSOX X 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Oblique swinging and clicking, right up — One ! 
 ! 8-8-16. 
 
 h. Charge !— place. 8—8—16. 
 [ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Swinging bells to shoulders, sideways and return, 
 ! both— One! 8. 
 j h. On toes ! — bend — up — place. 16. 
 t c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Position ! 
 f a. Clicking bells over head and behind back — One ! 8. 
 5. ] ISToTE. — As in 3, Lesson IV. 
 
 [ h. With trunk ! — forward — up — backward — up. 
 
 XoTE. — Trunk bending forward and backward. 
 f a. Swinging bells to shoulders, sideways and return, 
 both— One ! 16. 
 h. Trunk ! — twist — bend — up — front. 8 — 8. 
 ^ c. Combine ! 8 — 8. 
 
 7. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 8. Stretching. 
 
 9. Running. 
 
 10. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 6. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Bovs 
 
 449 
 
 5 b. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
 WITH CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD AND BEHIND BACK 
 
 1, bend the trunk forward and click the bells over the head; 
 2, trunk erect, and click the bells behind the back ; 3, bend the 
 trunk backward and click the bells over the head; 4, trunk 
 erect, and click the bells behind the back. 
 
 This exercise works strongly upon the muscles of the back 
 and abdomen. 
 
4. 
 
 5. 
 
 450 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Oblique swinging and clicking, right up — One ! 
 8—8—16. 
 
 Note. — As in 3, Lesson IX. 
 h. Charge ! — reverse — return — reverse. 16—16. 
 
 Note. — Reverse charging obliquely forward. 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 a. Swinging bells to shoulders, upward and return, both — 
 One ! 8. 
 
 b. On toes! — bend — up — place. 16. 
 Note. — Rising on toes and bending knees as in 
 
 previous lesson. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 fa. Clicking bells over head and behind back — One! 8. 
 [ b. With trunk ! — forward — up — backward — up. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 6. REVERSE CHARGING OBLIQUELY FORWARD 
 
 1, charge obliquely forward to the right ; 2, straighten the 
 knees ; 3, pivot so as to face and charge obliquely to the rear 
 on the opposite side ; 4, straighten the knees ; 5, reverse the 
 charge to the oblique forward position again ; 6, straighten the 
 knees ; 7, reverse to the oblique backward charge ; 8, position. 
 Bells on hips. 
 
 This is one of the most stimulating exercises for the circu- 
 lation. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 
 
 451 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF RE- 
 VERSE CHARGING OB- 
 LIQUELY FORWARD AND 
 OBLIQUE SWINGING AND 
 CLICKING OF THE BELLS 
 
 1, charge obliquely for- 
 ward to the right, and 
 stretch the arms obliquely, 
 the right arm upward ; 
 
 2, straighten the knees and click 
 the bells; 3, reverse the charging 
 and stretch the arms obliquely with 
 the left upward ; 4, straighten the 
 knees and click the bells ; continue 
 to alternate as above to 7 ; 8, posi- 
 tion. 
 
452 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4«. SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS, UPWARD AND RETURN 
 
 1, swing the bells sideways to the shoulders, stretching the 
 arms to the utmost and pulling upon the chest in the transi- 
 tion ; 2, stretch the arms upward \ 3, bells again on the shoul- 
 ders; 4, bells sideways and dow^nward to position. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES AND BENDING KNEES WITH 
 SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND UPWARD 
 
 This differs from the balance exercise of the previous lesson 
 only in the direction in which the arms are stretched when the 
 knees bend. The balance work is more difficult in the present 
 exercise, and particular care should be taken to move steadily 
 and to keep the chest and head erect. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 
 
 453 
 
 3 
 
 4. 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Oblique swinging and clicking, right up — One ! 
 8—8—16. 
 h. Charge! — reverse — return — reverse. 16 — 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 a. Swinging and turning bells sideways, both — One ! 8. 
 Note. — As in 4, Lesson II. 
 
 b. On toes ! — pivot — bend — hold — up — pivot — down. 16 
 —16. 
 
 Note. — Pivoting and bending knees. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 f a. Clicking bells over head and behind back — One ! 8. 
 
 Note. — As in 3, Lesson IV. 
 h. AYith trunk ! 
 
 Note. — AVith trunk twisting and bending sideways 
 as in previous lessons. 
 I c. Sideways ! 16. 
 
 Note. — Trunk bending sideways with clicking 
 bells over head. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4 6. PIVOTING AND BENDING KNEES 
 
 1, rise on the toes ; 2, pivot to the side ; 3, keeping the heels 
 off of the floor, bend the knees; 4, hold this position; 5, 
 straighten the knees ; 6, pivot to the front ; 7, heels down : 
 8, hold. Bells on liips. 
 
454 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF PIVOTING AND 
 BENDING KNEES WITH SWINGING 
 AND TURNING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, 2, rise on the toes and pivot to 
 the side with the bells on the hips ; 
 3, bend the knees and extend the 
 bells sideways, palms upward; 4, 
 hold; 5, straighten the knees and 
 return the bells to the hips ; 6, 7, 8, 
 pivot to the front, lower the heels 
 and hold the position, the bells re- 
 maining on the hips. 
 
 5 c. TRUNK BENDING SIDE- 
 WAYS WITH CLICKING 
 BELLS OVER HEAD 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the 
 side and click the bells 
 over the head; 2, trunk 
 erect and click the bells 
 behind the back. Alter- 
 nate the direction of the 
 bending. 
 
 This is one of the strong- 
 est exercises for the waist 
 muscles ; it expands the 
 chest on the convex side and 
 is very stimulating for the 
 circulation and digestion. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 455 
 
 LESSON XIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Swinging bell over head, right — One ! 8 or 16. 
 I h. Charge I — reverse — return — place. 16 — 16. 
 Note. — Reverse charging sideways. 
 c. Combine ! 16—16. 
 f a. Pivoting and bending knees, right — One ! 16 — 16. 
 ■ ^ h. With arms ! 16—16 
 
 3. \ 
 
 Position ! 
 r a. Clicking bells over head and behind back — One ! 8. 
 
 5. \ h. With trunk ! — forward — up — back — up — left — up- 
 i right— up. 32. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. SWINGING BELL OVER HEAD 
 
 1, raise the right arm upward and bend the elbow so as to 
 form a right angle, the forearm being over the head, and the 
 bell held vertically at the opposite side of the head ; at the 
 same time raise the left arm sideways at shoulder level, with 
 the palm facing to the front, the bell held vertically ; 2, reverse 
 the position of the arms; continue to reverse the arm positions 
 to 15 ; 16, position. Pull hard upon the chest with the arm 
 movements. 
 
456 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 Zb. KEVEKSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, charge directly to the right side ; 2, transfer the weight 
 to the left foot and bend that knee in the charge position ; 
 3, return to the first position; 4, heels together. Bells on 
 hips. Bear in mind the necessity of strong knee action for 
 the result upon the circulation. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF REVERSE CHARGING SIDEWAYS AND 
 SWINGING BELL OVER THE HEAD 
 
 1, charge to the right side, extend the right arm sideways at 
 full length, and bend the left arm over the head ; 2, reverse 
 the position to the opposite side ; 3, return to the right side ; 
 4, heels and arms to position. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 45' 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Swinging bell over head, right — One ! 8 or 16. 
 
 3. { b. Charge ! — reverse — return — place. 16 — 16. 
 Ic. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 f a. Pivoting and bending knees, right — One ! 16 — 16. 
 • I b. With arms ! 16—16. 
 
 f a Anvil strike, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 I b. Charge ! — twist — twist — twist — place. 16 — 16. 
 
 I Note. — Charging and trunk twisting. 
 
 [c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 5 b. CHARGING AND TRUNK TWISTING 
 
 1, charge forward with the right foot and twist the trunk to 
 the left ; 2, hold the position ; 3, twist the trunk to the right ; 
 4, hold ; 5, twist to the left ; 6, hold ; 7, position ; 8, hold. 
 Bells on hips. 
 
458 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND TRUNK TWISTING WITH 
 
 THE ANVIL STRIKE 
 
 1, charge forward with the right foot, twist the trunk to the 
 left, extend the left arm in front and begin the circle with the 
 right one ready for the anvil strike ; 2, circle and strike with 
 the right arm ; 3, twist the trunk to the right, extend the right 
 arm forward of the body as it then faces and begin the circle 
 with the left arm ; 4, circle and strike with the left ; continue 
 to alternate the directions to 15 ; 16, position. 
 
3. 
 
 Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 459 
 
 LESSON XV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging and holding bells upward and downward, 
 
 both— One ! 16. 
 h. Charge I — bend — up — place. 16 — 16. 
 
 Note. — Charging and bending trunk forward, 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 a. Swinging bells sideways and clicking forward, both — 
 One ! 16. 
 4. \ b. On toes ! 16 or 32. 
 
 Note. — Eising on toes. Bells on hips, 
 c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 ( a. Anvil strike, left— One ! 8—8—8. 
 6. ^ b. Charge ! — twist — twist — twist — place. 16 — 16. 
 [ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 a. SWINGING AND HOLDING BELLS UPWARD AND DOWNWARD 
 
 1, swing bells forward and upward to the vertical position ; 
 2, hold ; 3j swing the bells downward and backward, keeping 
 the chest high and the chin well dj^awn in; 4, hold. 
 
 Zb. CHARGING AND BENDING TRUNK FORWARD 
 
 1, charge forward; 2, hold; 3, still holding the charge posi- 
 tion, bend the trunk forward, keeping the head and back in a 
 straight line; 4, hold ; 5, trunk erect; 6, hold; 7, heels together; 
 8, hold. Bells on hips. 
 
460 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 e. COMBINATION OF CHARGING AND BENDING TEUNK FORWARD 
 WITH SWINGING BELLS UPWARD AND DOWNWARD 
 
 1, charge forward and swing the bells forvv^ard and upward 
 to a vertical position; 2, hold the position; 3, bend the trunk 
 forward and touch the bells to the floor; 4, hold; 5, trunk 
 erect and swing the bells again up to the vertical position; 
 6, hold; 7, heels together and bells to position at the sides; 
 8, hold. 
 
 4 a. SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING FORWARD 
 
 1, swing the bells sideways at shoulder level^ palms to the 
 front; 2, click both ends of the bells forward {i.e. bells vertical). 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH SWINGING BELLS 
 SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING FORWARD 
 
 1, swing the bells sideways while rising on the toes ; 2, click 
 them forward as the heels come down. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 461 
 
 LESSOX XVI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Swinging and holding bells upward and downward, 
 both— One ! 16. 
 h. Charge ! — bend — up — place. 16 — 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 a. Clicking bells over head, swinging sideways, and re 
 turning — One ! 8 — 16. 
 . Trunk forward ! 16—16. 
 
 XoTE. — Trunk bending forward, and raising foot 
 backward. 
 . Combine! 16—16. 
 r a. Anvil strike, left— One ! 8—8—8. 
 
 5. \ h. Charge ! — twist — tw^ist — twist — place. 16 — 16. 
 t c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4«. CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD. SWINGING SIDEWAYS, AND 
 
 RETURNING 
 
 1, click the thumb ends of the bells over head ; 2, extend the 
 arms sideways at shoulder level, palms upward; 3, click again 
 over head ; 4, bells down sideways to position. Be sure to keep 
 the head erect. The arms should pull strongly upon the chest 
 throughout. 
 
462 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4&. TRUNK BENDING 
 FORWARD AND 
 RAISING FOOT BACK- 
 WARD 
 
 1, bend the trunk 
 forward and raise 
 the right leg back- 
 ward, stretching the 
 knee and instep as 
 much as possible ; 
 the body should 
 form a straight line 
 from the head to the 
 extended foot; 
 
 2, hold the position ; 
 
 3, trunk erect and 
 heels together; 
 
 4, hold. Bells on 
 hips. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND RAISING 
 FOOT BACKWARD WITH CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD AND 
 SWINGING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, bend the trunk forward, click the bells over head, and raise 
 the foot backward ; 2, hold the position of the trunk and the 
 foot, and extend the arms sideways at shoulder level ; 3, still 
 holding the trunk and foot position, click the bells again over 
 the head ; 4, position. 
 
 This exercise is particularly effective for the muscles around 
 the hip, and those of the back which hold the trunk erect and 
 flatten the shoulder-blades. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 463 
 
 3. 
 
 LESSON XVII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 jVIarching. 
 
 r a. Raising and turning bells sideways, both — One ! 8 
 or 16. 
 
 XoTE. — As 4, in Lesson 11. 
 L h. With charging I — twist and bend — up — place. 16 — 16. 
 Note. — Charging with trunk twisting and bending 
 to floor. 
 r a. Clicking bells over head, swinging sideways, and re- 
 . I turning — One ! 8 or 16. 
 I h. Trunk forward ! 16—16. 
 [c. Combine! 16—16. 
 r a. Anvil strike, left— One ! 8—8—8. 
 
 5. \ b. Charge ! — twist — twist — twist — place. 16 — 16. 
 L c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
464 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 6- CHARGING WITH TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING TO FLOOR 
 
 1, charge forward with the right foot, and extend the arms 
 sideways at shoulder level, palms upward ; 2, hold the position ; 
 
 3, twist the trunk to the left, bend it sideways to the right, and 
 touch the right bell to the floor, the left arm stretched upward ; 
 
 4, hold the position ; 5, as 1 ; 6, hold ; 7, position ; 8, hold. 
 This is one of the most effective all-over exercises. It works 
 
 strongly upon the circulation and respiration. 
 
Eleventh Series, Dumb-bells — Boys 465 
 
 LESSOX XVIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Raising and turning bells sideways, both — One ! 8 
 o I or 16. 
 
 4. 
 
 Note. — As 4, Lesson II. 
 [ h. With charging ! — twist and bend — up — place. 16 — 16. 
 
 a. Clicking bells over head, swinging sideways, and re- 
 turning — One ! 8 or 16. 
 
 b. Trunk forward ! 16 — 16. 
 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 ' a. Swinging bells to chest, sideways and return, both — 
 One ! 8 or 16. 
 
 5. \ h. Trunk ! — twist — back — up — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 XoTE. — Trunk twisting and bending backward. 
 ic. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 5 a. SWINGING BELLS TO CHEST, SIDEWAYS AND RETURN 
 
 1, raise the forearm and bring the bells to the chest in a 
 vertical position, as in 4, Lesson VI ; 2, swing the bells side- 
 ways at shoulder level, palms to the front ; 3, return the bells 
 to the chest ; 4, bells down to position at the sides. 
 
466 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 h. TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING BACKWARD 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right ; 2, bend the trunk backward ; 
 3, trunk erect ; 4, face to the front. Bells on hips. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND BENDING BACKWARD 
 WITH BELLS TO CHEST AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right and swing the bells to the 
 chest ; 2, bend the trunk backward and swing the bells side- 
 ways ; 3, trunk erect, and bells again at the chest ; 4, face to 
 the front, bells downward to position. 
 
 This exercise works strongly upon the abdominal muscles. 
 
Twelfth Series 
 
 Eighth Year, Girls 
 Dumb-bells — 1 pound 
 
 LESSOR I 
 
 Note. — For stretching, tactics, floor formation, effects of 
 exercises, etc., see Explanatory Notes. 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging bell forward to shoulder, right — One ! 
 
 8—8—16. 
 h. Tap step ! — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 Note. — Tap step forward, 
 c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 4. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 5. Stretching. 
 
 6. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 467 
 
468 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 BELLS IN POSITION FOR WORK 
 
 The bells should be grasped by the 
 stems and held naturally at the sides 
 while marching to place. From this 
 position all of the exercises are taken, 
 unless the position, hells on hips, is 
 specified, when the bells should be 
 placed horizontally at the hips, the 
 hands bent under so as to point the 
 bent wrists forward and downward ; 
 the elbows should be kept well back, 
 so as to flatten the shoulder-blades 
 and throw the chest forward. 
 
 3 a. SWINGING BELL FORWARD TO SHOULDER 
 
 1, swing the bell forward at arm's length, bend the elbow and 
 bring the bell to the top of the shoulder in a horizontal position, 
 one lobe toward the front and the other toward the rear ; 2, swing 
 the bell forward and downward to position. The elbow should 
 be fully extended in the transition, so that the arm pulls upon 
 the chest. 
 
 3 6. TAP STEP FORWARD 
 
 This is like the point step of previous series, except that the 
 toe does not remain upon the floor ; it should tap the floor in a 
 light, easy way, with no weight upon it, and remain extended, 
 with the toe well pointed downward and raised from the floor, 
 and the knee stiff, until the return count is given. 1, tap 
 forward; 2, heels together. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 
 
 469 
 
 This exercise cultivates an erect carriage if the hip action is 
 strong and sustained. Keep the chest well forward and high, 
 avoiding any tendency to a sway-back position. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF TAP STEP AND 
 SWINGING BELLS FORWARD TO 
 SHOULDERS 
 
 1, tap step forward with the right 
 foot and swing both bells forward to 
 the shoulders; 2, foot and bells to 
 position. Alternate the feet on the 
 last sixteen counts. 
 
 6. BREATHING 
 
 Eaise the arms sideways to shoulder level while inhaling ; 
 lower them to position while exhaling. The breathing should 
 be slower and deeper than the normal. 
 
470 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON II 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 [ a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, right — One I 
 j 8—8—16. 
 
 3. \ b. Tap step !— side— place. 8—8—16. 
 I Note. — Tap step sideways. 
 
 [c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 a. Swinging bells forward to shoulders, anvil strike, and 
 return — One ! 16. 
 
 4. \ h. On toes! — pivot — return — place. 16 — 16. 
 Note. — Rising on toes and pivoting. 
 
 c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 5. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 6. Stretching. 
 
 7. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 
 
 471 
 
 3«. SWINGING BELL SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDER 
 
 This differs from the first exercise in the previous lesson 
 only in the direction in which the arms are raised, which is to 
 the side instead of forward. Extend the elbow fully in the 
 transition, and turn the palm upward as the arm is raised. 
 The chest should be lifted and expanded by the movement. 
 The position of the bells on the shoulders is the same as in 
 the swinging forward to shoulder. 
 
 3 6. TAP STEP SIDEWAYS 
 
 This differs from the tap step forward only in direction. 
 Tap the foot directly to the side of its normal position. 
 Stretch the entire leg from the hip in doing this, but be careful 
 that the, whole weight is held upon the stationary foot. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF TAP 
 STEP SIDEWAYS AND 
 SWINGING BELLS SIDE- 
 WAYS TO SHOULDERS 
 
 1, tap step sideways and 
 swing the bells sideways 
 to the shoulders ; 2, posi- 
 tion. 
 
472 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 a. SWINGING BELLS FORWARD TO SHOULDERS, ANVIL STRIKE 
 
 AND RETURN 
 
 1, swing both bells forward to the shoulders ; 2, extend the 
 right arm at full length in front, holding the bell vertically ; 
 at the same time raise the left bell at arm's length upward, 
 and bring it down so as to strike with its lower lobe the upper 
 lobe of the right bell ; 3, return both bells to the shoulders ; 
 4, bells forward and downward to position. Alternate the 
 arms for the anvil strike. 
 
 4&. RISING ON TOES AND PIVOTING 
 
 1, rise on the toes ; 2, pivot to the side on the balls of the 
 feet and lower the heels ; 3, rise on the toes ; 4, pivot to the 
 front, heels down. Keep the weight poised over the forward 
 part of the feet when the heels are lowered. 
 
 
 ,luV. 
 
 1 mil 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF RISING ON 
 TOES AND PIVOTING WITH 
 SWINGING BELLS FORWARD TO 
 SHOULDERS, ANVIL STRIKE AND 
 RETURN 
 
 1, rise on the toes and swing 
 both bells forward to the shoul- 
 ders ; 2, pivot to the right side, 
 put the heels down, extend the 
 right arm and make the anvil 
 strike with the left bell ; 3, rise 
 on the toes and return the bells 
 to the shoulders ; 4, pivot to the 
 front, heels and bells down. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 473 
 
 3 
 
 4. 
 
 LESSON III 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Swinging bell forward to shoulder, right — One ! 
 8—8—16. 
 h. Tap step ! — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 d. Bells sideways ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 Note. — Swinging bells sideways to shoulders. 
 
 e. Tap step ! — side — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
 /. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 a. Swinging bells forward to shoulders, anvil strike and 
 
 return — One ! 16. 
 h. On toes ! — pivot — return — place. 16 — 16. 
 ^ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 f a. Clicking bells over head — One ! 8. 
 
 5. \h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
 I Note. — Trunk twisting. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 Note. — See Explanatory Note 7. 
 
 9. Breathing — ^Begin ! Six times. 
 
 CLICKING BELLS OVER HEAD 
 
 1, swing the bells upward at the side and click the thumb 
 ends over the head; 2, return the bells to position. Extend 
 the arms to their full length in the transition, so as to affect 
 the chest ; keep the head erect. 
 
474 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 h. TUTTNK TWISTING 
 
 1, twist or rotate the trunk to the right, from the ankles ; 
 2, return to the front. The head should turn with the trunk, 
 
 but no farther. The bells should be 
 placed upon the hips for this exercise 
 without any special command, and re- 
 turned to the sides on the last count. 
 Be sure that the elbows are well back, 
 so as to throw the chest forward. The 
 twisting should be as far as possible, so 
 as to make a strong pressure upon the 
 internal organs, sufficient to overcome 
 any sluggish tendency in their action. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING 
 AND CLICKING BELLS OVEB HEAD 
 
 1, twist the trunk to the right and 
 click the bells over the head; 2, posi- 
 tion. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 475 
 
 LESSON IV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 [a. Swinging bell sideways, palm up, right— One! 
 I 8—8—16. 
 
 3. ] h. Foot!— back. 8—8—16. 
 Note. — Point step obliquely backward. 
 
 c. Combine ! 8—8—16. 
 
 a. Swinging bells forward to shoulders, anvil strike and 
 return — One ! 16. 
 
 h. On toes ! — pivot — return — place. 16 — 16. 
 I c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 r a. Clicking bells over head — One ! 8. 
 
 5. ] h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
 [c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Four times. 
 
 3 a. SWINGING BELL SIDEWAYS, PALM UP 
 
 1, swing the bell up to the shoulder level at the side, the 
 arm extended and the palm turned upward; pull hard upon 
 the chest ; 2, return to position. 
 
476 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 Zh. POINT STEP OBLIQUELY BACKWARD 
 
 1, touch, the toe obliquely backward, stretching the entire 
 leg from the hip ; turn the head and drop it backward so as to 
 look back over the shoulder toward the foot ; 2, foot and head 
 to position. Keep the shoulders squarely to the front 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP OBLIQUELY BACKWARD AND 
 SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, point step obliquely backward; extend the arms side- 
 ways with the palms turned upward ; turn the head and look 
 backward over the shoulder at the foot ; 2, position. 
 
 9. BREATHING 
 
 While inhaling, raise the arms forward to a vertical posi- 
 tion ; while exhaling, lower the arms sideways to position. 
 Keep the head erect; pull upon the chest with the arms. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls ^11 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 LESSON V 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Swinging bell sideways, palm up, right — One 
 8—8—16. 
 5. Foot!— back. 8—8—16. 
 c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 a. Clicking bells forward and over head — One ! 8 — 8. 
 h. Stamp ! — stamp — step— heels — step. 32. 
 
 Note. — Stamping twice and follow step. 
 c. Combine ! 32. 
 
 Clicking bells over head — One ! 8. 
 , h. Trunk !— twist. 8—8—16. 
 ic. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 [ a. 
 \ h. 
 
 4 a. CLICKING BELLS FORWARD AND OVER HEAD 
 
 1, click the thumb ends of the bells forward at shoulder 
 level ; 2, click the same ends over head ; alternate to 7 ; 8, posi- 
 tion. Keep the head erect. Pull hard upon the chest with 
 the arms. 
 
 4 6. STAMPING TWICE AND FOLLOW STEP 
 
 1, stamp with the right foot, the emphasis coming mainly 
 upon the ball of the foot ; 2, repeat ; 3, step forward with the 
 right foot, and draw the left toe up to the right heel ; 4, step 
 
478 School Gymnastics 
 
 again with the right foot ; 5, 6, 7, 8, repeat with the left foot, 
 still moving forward with the follow step; repeat, moving 
 backward. The follow step is like the polka step, and should 
 have its rhythm. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF STAMPING AND FOLLOW STEP WITH CLICK- 
 ING BELLS FORWARD AND OVER HEAD 
 
 Click the bells forward and over head, respectively, while 
 stamping ; place them on the hips for the follow step. 
 
3. 
 
 Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls ' 479 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Anvil strike, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 6. Foot ! — oblique — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 Note. — Tap step obliquely forward. 
 ,c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 f a. Clicking bells forward and over head — One ! 8 — 8. 
 4. j h. Stamp ! — stamp — step — heels — step. 32. 
 Ic. Combine! 32. 
 
 f a. Clicking bells forward and backward — One ! 8 — 8. 
 I h. Trunk ! — forward — place. 8. 
 I Note. — Trunk bending forward. 
 
 I c. Combine. 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 9 6. TAP STEP OBLIQUELY FORWARD 
 
 1, tap step obliquely forward, right, turning the shoulders in 
 the direction of the foot ; 2, heels together. Bells on hips. 
 
480 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 ft 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF TAP STEP OB- 
 LIQUELY FORWARD AND ANVIL 
 STRIKE 
 
 1, take the tap step obliquely 
 forward with the right foot, at 
 the same time turn the shoulders 
 and extend the right arm ob- 
 liquely forward at shoulder level 
 in the direction of the foot, the 
 bell vertical, and make the anvil 
 strike with the left bell ; 2, heels 
 together, bells down to position 
 and shoulders to the front. 
 
 5 a. CLICKING BELLS FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
 
 1, click the thumb ends of the bells at arm's length obliquely 
 down in front ; 2, click the bells behind. Avoid any forward 
 movement of the head or shoulders as the bells are clicked 
 behind. 
 
 5 h. TRUNK BENDING FORWARD 
 
 1, bend the trunk forward, the back and head in a straight 
 line ; 2, trunk erect. Bells on hips. 
 
 This exercise is admirable for strengthening the muscles 
 that hold the trunk erect. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 
 
 481 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING 
 FORWARD AND CLICKING BELLS FOR- 
 WARD AND BACKWARD 
 
 1, bend the trunk forward and click 
 the bells in front of the head ; 2, trunk 
 erect and click the bells behind. 
 
 This exercise is one 
 of the best for the 
 shoulder-blades and 
 back. 
 
482 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON VII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Anvil strike, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 3. ^ h. Foot !— oblique— place. 8—8—16. 
 Ic. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 a. Circling bells outward and clicking — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 h. Step ! — point — step— point — back— two— three — heels. 
 32. 
 
 Note. — Stepping and pointing foot forward, 
 c. Combine ! 32. 
 C a. Clicking bells forward and backward — One ! 16. 
 
 5. \ b. Trunk ! — forward — place. 8. 
 I c. Combine ! 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4. 
 
 4«. CIRCLING BELLS OUTWARD AND CLICKING 
 
 1, circle the arms upward and outward ; 2, click the thumb 
 ends of the bells down in front. The arms should be stretched 
 to their full extent during the circle, so as to lift and expand 
 the chest. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 
 
 4 6. STEPPING AND POINTING FOOT FORWARD 
 
 483 
 
 1, step forward with the right foot ; 2, extend and point the 
 left foot, i.e. stretch it downward without touching the floor, 
 as in the tap step ; 3, step forward with the left foot ; 4, extend 
 and point the right foot ; 5, 6, 7, walk backward to place ; 8, heels 
 together. Bells on hips. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING AND 
 POINTING FOOT FORWARD WITH 
 CIRCLING AND CLICKING BELLS 
 
 1, step forward with the right 
 foot, swing the arms outward and 
 upward ; 2, point the left foot and 
 click the bells; 3, step with the 
 left foot and circle the arms ; 4, 
 point the right foot and click the 
 bells ; 5, 6, 7, 8, walk backward to 
 place, the bells on the hips. 
 
 The carriage should be firmly 
 erect during this exercise, and the 
 movements should be light and 
 dainty. 
 
484 School Gymnastics 
 
 5. 
 
 3. \ 
 
 LESSON VIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 ' a. Clicking bells forward and over head — One ! 16. 
 
 Note. — As in 4, Lesson IV. 
 6. Foot ! — oblique — heels — back — heels. 16 — 16. 
 
 Note. — Point step obliquely forward and backward 
 alternately. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 a. Circling bell outward and clicking — One ! 16. 
 h. Step ! — point — step — point — back — two — three— heels. 
 
 32. 
 c. Combine! 32. 
 a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, right — One ! 8 — 8. 
 
 Note. — As in 3, Lesson 11. 
 h. Trunk !— twist— place. 8—8—8. 
 c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 3 h. POINT STEP OBLIQUELY FORWARD AND BACKWARD 
 
 ALTERNATELY 
 
 1, point step obliquely forward; turn the head and look at 
 the foot ; 2, heels together ; 3, point step obliquely backward ; 
 turn the head and look at the foot over the shoulder ; 4, heels 
 together. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 
 
 485 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF POINT STEP OBLIQUELY FORWARD AND 
 BACKWARD WITH CLICKING BELLS FORWARD AND OVER HEAD 
 
 1, point step obliquely forward ; bend forward at the hips 
 and click the bells over the forward foot; 2, heels together, 
 bells on hips ; 3, point step obliquely backward, and click the 
 bells over the head; turn the head and look back over the 
 shoulder at the foot ; 4, heels together and bells on the hips. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK TWISTING AND SWINGING BELLS 
 SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS 
 
 1, twist the trunk and swing both bells sideways to the 
 shoulders ; 2, position. 
 
486 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 8. 
 9. 
 
 LESSOX IX 
 
 Stretching. 
 
 Facings. 
 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Clicking bells forward and over head- 
 ^ ^ ' ^ ^ • " ^ -back — heels. 
 
 ■One ! 16. 
 16—16. 
 
 c. 
 
 a. 
 
 \ b. Foot ! — oblique — heels- 
 
 ic. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 ' a. Circling bells outward and clicking — One ! 16. 
 
 b. Step ! — point — step — point — back — two — three — heels. 
 32. 
 
 Combine ! 32. 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 
 Swinging bells sideways to shoulders, right — One ! 
 8—8—16. 
 
 5. i b. Trunk — side — place. 8 — 8 — 8. 
 
 ISToTE. — Trunk bending sideways. 
 
 c. Combine! 8—8—8. 
 Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 Stretching. 
 Running. 
 Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 
 
 5 6. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 487 
 
 1, bend the trunk directly to the side from the waist, the 
 head remaining in line with the trunk ; the feet should remain 
 firmly upon the floor and the arms stiff ; 2, trunk erect. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS AND SWINGING 
 BELLS SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDERS 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the side, and swing the bells sideways 
 to the shoulders ; 2, trunk erect and bells on the hips. 
 
 This is an excellent exercise for strengthening the muscles 
 around the waist, for expanding the chest on the sides, and 
 for stimulating the digestive organs and the circulation. 
 
488 School Gymnastics 
 
 , LESSON X 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Swinging bells sideways, palms upward, both — One ! 8. 
 ! h. Charge! — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
 1 Note. — Charging forward. 
 
 .c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 { a. Clicking bells and bending head alternately — One ! 32. 
 h. With foot !— cross— place — cross — place; head — up — 
 
 I right — up. 
 
 [ Note. — Cross step forward. 
 
 f a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulder — right — One ! 
 
 i 8—8—16. 
 
 I h. Trunk !— side— place. 8—8—8. 
 
 I c. Combine ! 8—8—8. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin I Six times. 
 
 3 a. SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS, PALMS UPWARD 
 
 1, swing the bells up to the shoulder level at the sides, arms 
 extended and palms upward ; 2, position. The elbows should 
 be fully stretched and the chest lifted by the movement. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 
 
 489 
 
 Zh. CHARGING FORWARD 
 
 1, take a long step forward, bend the knee and throw all of 
 the Ave ight upon it; keep the trunk erect, the rear foot upon 
 the floor and the rear knee straight ; 2, position. Bells on the 
 hips. 
 
 If this exercise is taken correctly, so as to make a consider- 
 able bend in the knee, the large muscles of the thigh will be 
 brought into action and through them the circulation will be 
 much quickened. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARGING FORWARD AND SWINGING BELLS 
 
 SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, charge forward, and swing both bells sideways, palms 
 upward ; 2, position. 
 
 This is an admirable all-over exercise for both the posture 
 and general physiological results. 
 
490 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 a. CLICKING BELLS AND BENDING HEAD ALTERNATELY 
 
 1, click both ends of the bells twice quickly in front ; 2, bells 
 on the hips ; 3, 4, repeat ; 5, bend the head to the right side ; 
 6, head up ; 7, 8, repeat, the head bending to the left side. 
 
 4 h. CROSS STEP FORWARD WITH 
 CLICKING BELLS 
 
 1, cross the right foot over in front 
 of the left and touch the toe in a point- 
 step on a line in front of the left toe ; 
 keep the knees stiff and the shoulders 
 to the front ; click the bells twice, rap- 
 idly, while doing this ; 2, heels together 
 and bells on the hips ; 3, 4, repeat with 
 the left foot ; 5, bend the head to the 
 right ; 6, head up ; 7, 8, repeat the 
 head bending to the left. The cross 
 step helps to ease and grace in walk- 
 ing by the strength and mobility which 
 it cultivates in the hip joint. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 491 
 
 LESSOK XI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 { a. Swinging bells sideways, palms upward, both — 
 ^ i One! 8. 
 
 I b. Charge ! — forward — place. 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 [c. Combine! 8—8—16. 
 
 f a. Clicking bells and bending head alternately — One ! 32. 
 4- \ h. With foot ! — cross — place — cross — place ; head — up 
 
 I — right — up. 
 
 { a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, extending and 
 
 I returning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 6. \ b. Face !— bend. 16—16. 
 
 I Note. — Facing and trunk bending sideways. 
 
 [c. Combine! 16—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 5 a. SWINGING BELL SIDEWAYS TO SHOULDER, EXTENDING AND 
 
 RETURNING 
 
 1, swing the bell sideways to the shoulder ; 2, extend it side- 
 ways at arm's length, the palm upward; 3, return to the 
 shoulder ; 4, swing the bell outward and downward to position. 
 
492 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 h. FACING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, face to the right side ; 2, bend the trunk to the right side ; 
 3, trunk erect; 4, face to the front. 
 
 5 c. COMBINATION OF FACING AND TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 WITH SWINGING BELLS TO SHOULDERS AND EXTENDING 
 SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, face to the side and swing the bells sideways to the 
 shoulders ; 2, bend the trunk sideways and extend the arms 
 at shoulder level, palms upward ; 3, trunk erect and bells on 
 the shoulders ; 4, face to the front, bells down to position. 
 
 This exercise is very stimulating to the circulation and the 
 digestive organs. It is particularly useful for overcoming any 
 sluggishness in these functions incident to much sitting. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 493 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. * 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Clicking bells forward and over head — One ! 16. 
 
 3. ' h. Rocking ! 8—8. 
 ic. Combine! 8—8. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 ' a. Clicking bells and bending head alternately — One ! 
 
 32. 
 5. With foot ! — cross — place — cross — place ; head — up — 
 right — up. 
 ' a. Swinging bells sideways to shoulder, extending and 
 returning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 h. Face!— bend. 16—16. 
 . c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 Zh. ROCKING 
 
 1, charge forward; 2, without changing the place of the feet 
 upon the floor, straighten the knee, transfer the weight to the 
 rear foot and bend the rear knee ; 3, rock forward {i.e. return 
 to the first position) ; continue to alternate to 7 ; 8, heels 
 together. 
 
 If the step is long enough to admit of a good bend of the 
 knee, this exercise is very serviceable for quickening the 
 circulation. 
 
494 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF ROCK- 
 ING AND CLICKING BELLS 
 FORWARD AND OVER 
 HEAD 
 
 1, charge forward and 
 click the bells over head ; 
 2, rock backward (bend 
 the rear knee), bend the 
 
 trunk forward, and click 
 the bells over the forward 
 foot; alternate to 7; 8, 
 position. 
 
 This is one of the most 
 vigorous all-over exercises 
 in the series. 
 
5. 
 
 Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 495 
 
 LESSON XIII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 r a. Clicking bells forward and over head — One ! 16. 
 
 3. \ b. Eocking ! 8—8. 
 i c. Combine ! 8. 
 
 a. Oblique swinging and clicking of bells, right arm up 
 —One ! 8—8—16. 
 . I b. Foot I — oblique — hold — place — hold. 16 — 16. 
 
 Note. — Stepping obliquely forward and rising on 
 toes. 
 . c. Combine ! 16—16—16. 
 
 f a. Swinging bell sideways to shoulder, extending and re- 
 I turning, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 j b. Face !— bend. 16—16. 
 [ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4 a. OBLIQUE SWINGING AND CLICKING OF BELLS, RIGHT ARM UP 
 
 1, swing or stretch the arms in an oblique line, the right 
 upward and the left downward and backward; the palms 
 should face the front ; 2, hold the position ; 3, click the little- 
 finger ends of the bells obliquely forward ; 4, click the thumb 
 ends of the bells ; 5, swing the arms obliquely. The arms 
 should not be brought to position until the last count of the 
 alternation. Keep the head erect. Stretch the arms fully so 
 as to affect the chest and shoulder-blades. 
 
496 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 4 h. STEPPING OBLIQUELY EORWAKD AND RISING ON TOES 
 
 1, step obliquely forward to the right with the right foot, 
 and rise on the toe of the extended foot; 2, hold the position; 
 3, heels together ; 4, hold the position. Bells on hips. 
 
 4 c. COMBINATION OF STEPPING OBLIQUELY FORWARD AND RISING 
 ON TOES, WITH OBLIQUE SWINGING AND CLICKING OF BELLS 
 
 1, step obliquely forward on the right toe, and swing the 
 arms to the oblique position, the right arm upward ; 2, hold the 
 position ; 3, heels together and click the little-finger ends of 
 the bells ; 4, hold the position of the feet and click the thumb 
 ends of the bells. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 497 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Clicking bells forward and over head — One ! 16. 
 
 h, Eocking! 8—8. 
 
 c. Combine ! 
 
 a. Oblique swinging and clicking of bells — right arm up 
 
 _One ! 8—8—16. 
 h. Foot ! — oblique — hold — place — hold. 16 — 16. 
 c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place ! 
 a. Trunk bending sideways, right — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 h. With arm ! 16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Eunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4. \ 
 
498 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 5 h. TRUNK BENDING SIDEWAYS 
 WITH ARM IN HALF CIRCLE 
 
 1, bend the trunk to the right 
 side and raise the left arm in a 
 half circle over the head, the 
 left bell remaining on the hip ; 
 2, trunk and bell to position. 
 
 This exercise is admirable for 
 strengthening the muscles of the 
 trunk as well as for a quicken- 
 ing effect upon the general physi- 
 ological functions. 
 
Tu^elfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 499 
 
 LESSON XV 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 Facings. 
 
 Marching. 
 
 a. Swinging bells backward and clicking over head — One ! 
 
 32. 
 
 h. Charge back! — forward— hold — hold. 16 — lf>. 
 
 Note. — Charging backward and stepping forward. 
 
 . c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Oblique swinging and clicking of bells, right arm 
 
 ! ^^p_One! 8—8—16. 
 4 { 
 
 I b. Foot! — oblique^hold — place — hold. 16 — 16. 
 
 [ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Trunk bending sideways, right I — One ! 8 — 8 — 16. 
 
 *'• j b. With arm ! 16. ^ 
 
 6. Marching. (Eeturn bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
500 School Gymnastics 
 
 3«. SWINGING BELLS BACKWARD AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 
 
 1, swing the bells downward and backward at the sides, the 
 arms parallel ; 2, swing them forward and upward to a vertical 
 position ; 3, click the four lobes of the bells twice, quickly, over 
 head ; 4, repeat the clicking ; 5, swing downward and backward 
 
 3 h. CHARGING BACKWARD AND STEPPING FORWARD 
 
 1, charge backward ; the position is the same as in the second 
 count of the rocking explained in Lesson XII ; 2, throw all 
 of the weight upon the forward foot, and straighten the knee 
 as in stepping forward ; 3, 4, hold the forward position ; 
 
 5, charge backward as in 
 1 ; alternate to lo ; 16, 
 position. The bells should 
 remain upon the hips. 
 
 3 c. COMBINATION OF CHARG- 
 ING BACKWARD AND 
 STEPPING FORWARD 
 WITH SWINGING BELLS 
 BACKWARD AND CLICK- 
 ING OVER HEAD 
 
 1, charge backward, 
 swing the bells downward 
 and backward and bend 
 the trunk slightly forward 
 from the waist ; 2, throw 
 the weight upon the for- 
 ward foot, straighten the 
 forward knee and swing 
 the bells forward and up- 
 ward ; 3, hold the position 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 
 
 501 
 
 and click the bells twice, quickly, over head : 4, repeat the click- 
 ing; 5, charge backward and swing the bells downward and 
 backward. 
 
 This is an admirable all-over exercise, but is particularly 
 useful for the back, including the shoulder-blades. 
 
502 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSON XVI 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 f a. Swinging bells backward and clicking over head — 
 
 3. 
 
 One ! 32. 
 W>. Charge back !— forward — hold — hold. 16 — 16. 
 [ c. Combine I 16 — 16. 
 a. Swinging bells sideways, palms upward, and clicking 
 
 over head — One ! 
 
 4. \ h. On Toes ! 16. 
 
 I Note. — With rising on toes. 1, Eise on the toes ; 
 
 [ 2, heels doAvn. Bells on hips. 
 Bells on hips — Place I 
 
 5. Kneeling and trunk bending forward and sideways — One ! 
 16—16. 
 
 Position ! 
 
 6. Marching ! (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Kunning. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin I Six times. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 50o 
 
 4<r SWINGING BELLS SIDEWAYS. PALMS UPWARD. AND CLICKING 
 
 OVER HEAD 
 
 Ij swing the bells sideways to shoulder level, arms extended 
 and palms upward; 2, click the thumb ends of the bells over 
 head: 3, bells again extended sideways; 4, position. ]\ill 
 strongly upon the chest throughout. Keep the chin well 
 drawn in. 
 
 4 V. COMBINATION OF RISING ON TOES WITH SWINGING BELLS 
 SIDEWAYS AND CLICKING OVER HEAD 
 
 1. rise on the toes and swing the arms out at the sides ; 2, hold 
 the foot position and click the bells over head ; 3, remain on 
 the toes and extend the arms again at the sides ; 4, heels and 
 bells to position. 
 
 5. KNEELING WITH TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 1, 2, kneel on the right knee; 3, bend the trunk forward 
 from the hips, the back and head in a straight line ; 4, trunk 
 erect ; 5, bend the trunk to the right side ; 6, trunk erect ; 
 7, bend the trunk to the left side ; 8, trunk erect ; 9-14, re- 
 peat the bendings; 15, 16, rise to position, with the weight 
 upon the forward foot while rising. Repeat, kneeling on the 
 left knee, and taking the side bending first to the left side. 
 Keep the bells upon the hips. 
 
504 
 
 School Gymnastics 
 
 LESSOR XVII 
 
 1. Stretching. 
 
 2. Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 ' a. Swinging bells backward and clicking over head — 
 
 One! 32. 
 1 h. Charge back ! — forward — hold — hold. 16 — 16. 
 L c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 r a. Swinging bells sideways, palms npward, and clicking 
 over head — One ! 
 h. On toes !— 16. 
 L c. Combine ! 16 or 32. 
 
 Bells on hips — Place \ 
 { a. Kneeling and trunk bending forward and sideways 
 
 5. I —One! 16—16. 
 
 i h. With clicking ! 16—16. 
 
 6. Marching. (Return the bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4. 
 
Twelfth Series, Dumb-bells — Girls 
 
 505 
 
 ■ 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ■ 
 
 H 
 
 m 
 
 f IftJ 
 
 ll^^^^^l 
 
 ^^^^^^^B 
 
 \jff ^jM 
 
 ■HpP^ 
 
 p^&^^^H 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 /^H 
 
 ^Sm^mi 1! 
 
 w^S^ 
 
 , ^v 
 
 1 
 
 m- 4 
 
 ■H 
 
 H^k. 
 
 
 ^x ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^' 
 
 
 5 b. KNEELING AND TRUNK BENDING FORWARD AND SIDEWAYS 
 
 WITH CLICKING BELLS 
 
 Click the bells over the head while bending, and return them 
 to the hips when the trunk is erect. 
 
 This exercise calls for strong localized work of the trunk 
 muscles. 
 
506 School Gymnastics 
 
 4. 
 
 LESSON XVIII 
 
 1. Stretchinsf. 
 
 Facings. 
 Marching. 
 
 fa. Swinging bells backward and clicking over head — 
 
 I One! 32. 
 
 I h. Charge back ! — forward— hold — hold. 16 — 16. 
 
 [ c. Combine ! 16 — 16. 
 
 f a. Stamping, clicking, and follow step, right foot — One ! 
 
 [ Stamp — stamp — click — click ; 1 — 2 — o ; 1 — 2 — 3. 
 
 f a. Kneeling and trunk bending forward and sideways 
 
 5. ] —One! 
 
 [h. With clicking! 
 
 6. Marching. (Return bells to place.) 
 
 7. Stretching. 
 
 8. Running. 
 
 9. Breathing — Begin ! Six times. 
 
 4 a. STAMPING, CLICKING, AND FOLLOW STEP 
 
 1, stamp with the right foot; 2, stamp with the left foot; 
 3, click the thumb ends of the bells ; 4, click the opposite ends 
 of the bells ; 5, 6, follow step forward wdth the right foot lead- 
 ing, the bells on the hips ; 7, 8, follow step forward with the 
 left foot leading. On the next eight counts repeat the stamp- 
 ing and follow step, but take the latter backward to place. 
 Repeat, facing and moving toward the right on the first count, 
 and then returning to place; repeat to the left and then to 
 the rear. In returning from the rear with the follow step, 
 face the front on the last count. INIake the movement light 
 and dainty. 
 
5 m^